JP7535811B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines that variably display three pieces of identification information, namely, first identification information, second identification information, and third identification information, which have the same configuration including a component indicating a character and a component indicating a number (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-077362 A

However, conventional gaming machines did not necessarily enhance the enjoyment of the game when it came to displaying identification information.

The purpose of this invention is to increase the enjoyment of games.

In a representative embodiment of the present invention, in a gaming machine capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed, a special game state can be generated in which a game value is awarded to a player in response to the result of the variable display game becoming a special result, the identification information can be displayed on the identification information display means in a first configuration form which is a configuration form including a first component indicating a number and a second component indicating a character, or in a second configuration form which is a configuration form including the first component and not including the second component, the first identification information, the second identification information, and the third identification information can be displayed as the identification information, and the gaming machine is provided with a performance display means capable of displaying performance related to the game, and a presentation control means capable of displaying and controlling the identification information display means, and the presentation control means controls the display of the identification information display means to display the first identification information, the second identification information, or the third identification information during a reach based on the degree of expectation of the special result. The identification information display means can display the identification information in a first configuration mode or a second configuration mode according to the different types of reach, and during the varying display of the first identification information, second identification information, and third identification information before the reach is established , the varying display of the first identification information and the second identification information is performed in the first configuration mode and the varying display of the third identification information is performed in the second configuration mode , the first identification information and the second identification information are temporarily stopped to establish the reach, and after the reach is established, the varying display of the third identification information is changed from the second configuration mode to the first configuration mode to enable the reach variation to be executed, the identification information to be displayed as a special result on the identification information display means in the first state can be displayed in the first configuration mode, and the identification information to be displayed as a special result on the identification information display means in a second state different from the first state can be displayed in the second configuration mode.

According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

1 is an oblique view of the gaming machine from the front side. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a configuration of a collective display device. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a game control system of a gaming machine. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a performance control system of a gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first half of the main processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the latter half of the main processing. A diagram showing the RAM configuration of a game microcomputer of a game control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure for an output process. A flowchart showing the steps of the prize slot switch/status monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of a game status check process. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of the probability setting value change process. A flowchart showing the steps of the probability setting value confirmation process. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of special game processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of a start port switch monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of common processing of the special chart start port switch. A flowchart showing the steps of the special chart reservation information determination process. A flowchart showing the steps of the large prize slot switch monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for special chart normal processing. A flowchart showing the steps of the special chart 1 change start processing. A flowchart showing the steps of the special chart 2 change start processing. A flowchart showing the steps of the jackpot flag 1 setting process. A flowchart showing the steps of the jackpot flag 2 setting process. A flowchart showing the steps of the jackpot determination process. A flowchart showing the steps of the small hit determination process. This is a diagram illustrating the probability of a big win and the probability of a small win in the special chart variable display game for each setting (each setting value). A flowchart showing the steps of the special chart 1 stop pattern setting process. A flowchart showing the steps of the special chart 2 stop pattern setting process. This is a diagram illustrating the jackpot pattern distribution (jackpot breakdown) of the special chart variable display game for each setting. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of processing during special chart change. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for a pattern change control process. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for a general game process. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a gate switch monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of normal processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first half of an external information editing process. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a second half of the external information editing process. A figure showing an example (part 1) of the display of the collective display device while changing the probability settings. A figure showing an example (part 2) of the display of the collective display device while changing the probability settings. A figure showing an example (part 3) of the display of the collective display device while changing the probability settings. A figure showing an example (part 4) of the display of the collective display device while changing the probability settings. A figure showing an example (part 5) of the display of the collective display device while changing the probability settings. A figure showing an example (part 6) of the display of the collective display device while changing the probability settings. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing another example of the configuration of the collective display device. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing another configuration of the collective display device. 13 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the performance control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a received command check process. 13 is a flowchart showing a received command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart showing a single command process. 13 is a flowchart showing pre-reading pattern command processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a look-ahead variation command process. 13 is a flowchart showing a pattern-related command process. 13 is a flowchart showing variable command processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable performance setting process. A flowchart showing jackpot command processing. A figure showing the appearance of a detachable part according to the second embodiment attached to the gaming machine. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a game board and parts according to a second embodiment. A figure showing another example of a game board and parts according to the second embodiment. 13 is a diagram showing a configuration of a parallel-serial conversion unit of an identification board according to a second embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a first modified example of the identification board (particularly the parallel-serial conversion section) according to the second embodiment; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a second modified example of the identification board (particularly the parallel-serial conversion section) according to the second embodiment. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a third modified example of the identification board according to the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of main processing of the performance control device according to the second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a parts matching process according to the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a reference table that associates model designation commands with model identification information in the second embodiment. A block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a game control system of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment. A figure explaining the transition state when the power is turned on (power is restored) in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. A flowchart showing the steps of the probability setting value change process in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a setting value reception process according to the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a segment LED editing process according to the third embodiment. A timing chart showing an example of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device when changing settings according to the third embodiment. This is a timing chart showing a first modified example of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed in the third embodiment. This is a timing chart showing a second modified example of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display form when changing settings of a status display device according to a second modified example of the third embodiment. A timing chart showing a third modified example of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed in the third embodiment. This is a timing chart showing a fourth modified example of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed in the third embodiment. A timing chart showing an example of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value when confirming the setting in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a display device when confirming settings according to the third embodiment. A timing chart showing a modified example of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value when confirming the setting in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a modified example of the display screen of the display device when confirming settings according to the third embodiment. A block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a game control system according to a fourth embodiment. A diagram showing the addresses of input ports in a game control device related to the fourth embodiment and the signals input to each input port. A front view of a game board related to the fifth embodiment. A figure showing the relationship between the number of reserved items and the probability of a setting suggestion effect occurring in the fifth embodiment (Figure 75 (A)), and the relationship between the number of reserved items, the setting value, and the probability of the red light being turned on (Figure 75 (B)). FIG. 76A is a diagram showing the relationship between error priority and error code bits according to the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 76B is a diagram showing the notation of error codes (binary) and error codes (hexadecimal). These are examples of displaying error codes and error contents according to the sixth embodiment, showing a case where there are two errors (left: binary notation, right: hexadecimal notation) (Figure 77(A)), a case where one error has been resolved (Figure 77(B)), and a case where all errors have been resolved (Figure 77(C)). Examples of switching the display of error contents in the sixth embodiment are shown, which include an example of displaying a panel radio error as the initial state (FIG. 78(A)), an example of displaying a frame radio error by operating the operation unit once (FIG. 78(B)), and an example of displaying a switch abnormality error by operating the operation unit once again (FIG. 78(C)). A figure showing an example of a detachable part according to the seventh embodiment attached to a gaming machine. A figure showing an example of displaying notification information relating to the seventh embodiment on a display device that is displaying a decorative special pattern in a special pattern variable display game. 23A to 23C are diagrams showing an example in which the display mode of notification information according to the seventh embodiment is changed in accordance with the operation of a movable body. A figure showing an example of the part matching process according to the seventh embodiment in which the driving of the frame decoration device is prohibited. 23A and 23B are diagrams illustrating an example of the configuration of an identification board of a part according to the seventh embodiment. A figure showing a reference table (Figure 84 (A)) that associates model designation commands and model identification information in the seventh embodiment, and a reference table (Figure 84 (B)) that shows classifications of incompatible models. 23A and 23B are diagrams illustrating an example of a part matching process according to the seventh embodiment in which the driving mode is changed by classifying parts. A front view of a game board provided in a gaming machine according to an eighth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a light guide plate control process according to the eighth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a movable body control process according to the eighth embodiment. A front view of the game board when the light guide plate in the eighth embodiment has performed its initial operation. This is a front view of the game board when the internal and external devices in the eighth embodiment are performing their initial operations. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of timing of an initial operation control process according to the eighth embodiment. A front view of the game board when the variable display game of the eighth embodiment is being played. This is a front view of the game board when a reach effect is performed while playing the variable display game related to the eighth embodiment. This is a front view of the game board when a reach effect is produced in a variable display game while the initial operation control process relating to the eighth embodiment is being executed. This is a modified example of a front view of the game board when a reach effect is produced in a variable display game while the initial operation control process according to the eighth embodiment is being executed. This is a second modified example of a front view of the game board when a reach effect is produced in a variable display game while the initial operation control process according to the eighth embodiment is being executed. A timing chart showing an example of the timing of the display mode of the variable display game before and after recovery from a power outage in the ninth embodiment. 23A to 23C are diagrams showing examples of a display screen of a display device when identification information is displayed in each display mode in the tenth embodiment. This is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of a display device in chronological order in the tenth embodiment, and is an example of the screen transition of the entire game from when the display result of the variable display game becomes a special result state to when the special game starts. This figure shows the configuration and variation of the decorative special pattern displayed on the display screen of a display device, regarding the 11th embodiment. This figure shows modified examples of the configuration and variation of decorative special patterns displayed on the display screen of a display device, in relation to the eleventh embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, this is a table that is referenced to set the configuration and variation patterns of decorative special patterns. This is a modified example of a table that is referenced to set the configuration and variation patterns of decorative special symbols in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is a screen transition diagram (first half) showing display screens of a display device in chronological order in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is a screen transition diagram (second half) showing display screens of a display device in chronological order in the eleventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a main process according to the twelfth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a hitting style notification process according to the twelfth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a single command process according to the twelfth embodiment; 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure for processing when receiving hitting instructions related to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a screen transition diagram (part 1) illustrating a time series of display screens of a display device according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a screen transition diagram (part 2) illustrating a time series of display screens of the display device according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a screen transition diagram (part 3) illustrating a time series of display screens of the display device according to the twelfth embodiment. A figure illustrating the form of an image of a right-hit instruction display for the thirteenth embodiment. This figure illustrates an example of color changes within the right-hit instruction display for the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 21 is another diagram illustrating the color change inside the right-hit instruction display for the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example in which the colors are arranged so as to gradually change spatially according to a color wheel in the right-hit instruction display in the thirteenth embodiment; This is a screen transition diagram illustrating the movement of the right-hit instruction display on the display screen of a display device in the thirteenth embodiment. This is a figure illustrating the addition of an effect image to a right-hit instruction display in the thirteenth embodiment. A figure showing an example of the presence or absence of each parameter that defines and characterizes the presentation mode of the notification presentation, regarding the 13th embodiment. A figure showing another example of the presence or absence of each parameter that defines and characterizes the presentation mode of the notification presentation, regarding the 13th embodiment. This is a screen transition diagram showing a modified example of the notification display by displaying a right-hit instruction, in the thirteenth embodiment. This is a screen transition diagram showing the presentation mode of the notification presentation by the left-hit instruction display for the 13th embodiment.

[First embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the description of the gaming machine, the terms front, back, left and right refer to the directions as seen by a player playing a game.

[Overall view of the gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

The gaming machine 10 has an opening and closing frame that is attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island equipment and can be opened and closed by pivoting via hinges. The opening and closing frame is composed of a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 that covers the front of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame 12. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area that allows the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 to be viewed.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. In addition, by opening the front frame 12 without opening the glass frame 15, the game control device (main board) 100 (see Figure 7) and the like arranged on the back side of the game board 30 can be accessed.

Various frame components are arranged around the edge of the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15.

At the top center and left side of the glass frame 15, decorative devices 18a, 18b that can emit light depending on the game status are arranged. The decorative devices 18a, 18b house lighting components such as LEDs inside and emit light depending on the game status. The lighting components arranged inside these decorative devices 18a, 18b form part of the frame decoration device 18 (see Figure 4).

Upper speakers 19a are disposed in the upper right and upper left corners of the glass frame 15. In addition to these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided at the bottom of the gaming machine 10. The lower speakers 19b are disposed in the lower left corner of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner of the front frame 12. These upper speakers 19a and lower speakers 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, etc.

A protruding performance unit 13 is disposed on the right side of the glass frame 15, extending in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and protruding forward (towards the player). The protruding performance unit 13 is a performance device that produces light-emitting effects and other effects according to the progress of the game. The lighting members disposed inside the protruding performance unit 13 also form part of the frame decoration device 18 (see Figure 4).

An upper tray unit having an upper tray 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the bottom of the glass frame 15. The upper tray 21 is formed in a box shape with an open top. The game balls stored in the upper tray 21 are supplied one by one to a ball launcher (not shown).

The upper tray unit further includes a presentation operation device that accepts input operations from the player, a ball dispensing operation device that accepts input operations from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs light-emitting effects and the like according to the game status.

The effect operation device is an operation device that incorporates a touch panel 25b into the effect button 25, and is located in the center of the top of the upper tray unit so that it is easy for the player to operate.

By operating the presentation operation device, the player can perform presentations that involve the player's operations in the special chart variable display game and the like displayed on the display device 41 (see Figure 2). For example, a presentation pattern (presentation mode) can be selected, or a preview presentation can be executed that notifies the player of the outcome of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory in advance. Note that the variable display game includes the special chart variable display game, and when it is simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to the special chart variable display game.

In addition, the presentation pattern may be changed by the player operating the presentation operation device not only while the variable display game is being played, but also when the game is not being played.

The game state when the variable display game is executed consists of multiple game states. The normal game state (normal state) is a game state in which no special game state occurs. Special game states are, for example, a time-saving state as a specific game state, a state in which the probability of a special result (e.g., a jackpot) occurring in the variable display game is high (probability change state, probability change state), a jackpot state (special game state), and a small jackpot game state (small jackpot state).

Here, the special probability state (specific game state) can be one that continues until the next big win occurs (loop type), one that continues until a specified number of variable display games have been played (number-cut type, ST), or one that continues until a specified probability of falling lottery is won (falling lottery type).

Furthermore, whether or not the probability of a special state occurring may not be determined by the jackpot pattern random number, but may be set so that the probability of a special state occurring whenever a jackpot occurs, or a prize-winning device or the like having a specific area may be provided so that the probability of a special state occurring when the game ball passes through the specific area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated by a player when borrowing gaming balls, and is located on the upper right side of the upper tray unit. The ball lending operation device is equipped with a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by a player when borrowing gaming balls, and the return button 28 is a button operated by a player when ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. The balance display unit 26 is a display area in which the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed.

The decorative device 22 contains lighting components such as LEDs and is a device that performs light-emitting effects depending on the game status, and is provided in the front part of the upper tray unit. The lighting components provided inside the decorative device 22 form part of the frame decorative device 18 (see Figure 4).

Below the glass frame 15, which includes the upper tray unit and the like, and at the bottom of the front frame 12, there is an operating handle 24 for controlling the operation of the ball launcher (not shown), and a lower tray 23 in which game balls can be stored.

The operating handle 24 is located at the lower right of the front frame 12, below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player rotates the operating handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game balls supplied from the upper tray 21 into the game area 32 of the game board 30. The launching speed of the game balls launched from the ball launcher is set to be faster the greater the amount of rotation of the operating handle 24. In other words, the ball launcher can change the launching force, which is the force (speed) with which the game balls are launched into the game area, in response to the operation of the operating handle 24 by the player, and can launch the game balls in various launch modes with different launching forces. The launch modes include a left hit (normal hit) in which the game balls flow down the left side of the game area 32, and a right hit in which the game balls flow down the right side of the game area 32.

The lower tray 23 is disposed below the upper tray unit at a predetermined distance from the upper tray unit. The lower tray 23 has a ball ejection hole 23a that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower tray 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening/closing operation part 23b for opening and closing the ball ejection hole 23a. When the player operates the opening/closing operation part 23b to open the ball ejection hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower tray 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball ejection hole 23a.

[Game board]
Next, the game board 30 of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 2A. Fig. 2A is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2A, the game board 30 has a flat game board body 30a that serves as a mounting base for various components. The game board body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front side of the game board body 30a. The game machine 10 is configured to play by launching game balls from a ball launcher into the game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31. The game area 32 is provided with windmills, obstacle nails, and the like as components for changing the flow direction of the game balls, and the launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing their rolling direction due to these components.

A center case (front structure) 40 is attached in approximately the center of the play area 32, forming a window that serves as the display area for the variable display game. A display device 41 is disposed behind the window formed in the center case 40, and serves as a performance display device (variable display device) that variably displays (changeably displays) multiple pieces of identification information. The display device 41 is, for example, equipped with a liquid crystal display, and is disposed so that the display contents can be viewed from the front side of the play board 30 through the window of the center case 40. Note that the display device 41 is not limited to one equipped with a liquid crystal display, and may be one equipped with a display such as an EL or CRT.

The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 is provided with multiple variable display areas, and each variable display area displays identification information (special symbols) and characters that create the variable display game. In addition, the display screen displays images based on the progress of the game (jackpot display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.).

The center case 40 is also provided with an inlet 40a to a warp passage 40e for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage section 40b on which game balls that have passed through the warp passage 40e can roll. The stage section 40b of the center case 40 is located above the start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, so that game balls that roll on the stage section 40b are more likely to win the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37.

An upper performance unit 40c and a side performance unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. The upper performance unit 40c and the side performance unit 40d form part of the board decoration device 46 (see Figure 4) and the board performance device 44 (see Figure 4).

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal symbol start gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) is provided for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal symbol start gate 34. When a game ball shot into the game area 32 passes through the normal symbol start gate 34, a normal symbol variation display game is executed.

General winning openings 35 are located in the game area 32 on the lower left side of the center case 40, and general winning openings 35 are also located in the game area 32 on the lower right side of the center case 40. The entry of game balls into these general winning openings 35 is detected by winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see Figure 3) provided on the general winning openings 35.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a start winning port (first start winning area) 36 that sets the conditions for starting the special chart variable display game is provided, and directly below that is a normal variable winning device 37 equipped with a second start winning port (second start winning area). The normal variable winning device 37 is equipped with a movable member (movable piece) 37b that converts the upper end side into a state that makes it easier for game balls to flow in by rotating in a direction that tilts it forward. When the movable member 37b is in a closed state, the game ball cannot win the normal variable winning device 37. When a game ball wins the start winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, the special chart variable display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

The movable member 37b is a so-called tongue-type normal electric device, and when the result of the normal variable display game reaches a predetermined stop display mode, it rotates and opens via the normal electric solenoid 37c (see Figure 3), changing to an open state (a state that is advantageous to the player and makes it easier for game balls to flow into the normal variable winning device 37)

The movable member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100, which will be described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game or by making the winning probability of the normal map fluctuation display game higher than normal, or by lengthening the occurrence time of the easy-to-win state compared to the easy-to-win state that occurs in the normal game state, thereby generating the time-saving state (normal power support state) as the specific game state described above. Note that the time-saving state (normal power support state) also occurs overlappingly in the probability variable state (excluding the latent probability variable state).

In the game area 32 below and to the right of the normal variable prize winning device 37, a special variable prize winning device 39 is provided, which has an attacca-type opening and closing door 39c that opens the large prize winning port by rotating the upper end side in a direction that falls forward by a large prize winning port solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3). The special variable prize winning device 39 converts the large prize winning port from a closed state (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a special game state that is advantageous to the player) depending on the result of the special chart variable display game, and by facilitating the flow of game balls into the large prize winning port, it is designed to award a predetermined game value (prize balls) to the player. In addition, a count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the large prize winning port as a detection means for detecting game balls that have entered the large prize winning port. In addition, one or more large prize opening LEDs 39d (full-color LEDs) that illuminate the large prize opening are disposed within or near the large prize opening of the special variable prize opening device 39 (around the large prize opening).

When a game ball enters the general winning port 35, the start winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the large winning port of the special variable winning device 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) discharges a number of prize balls according to the type of winning port from the payout device to the upper tray 21. In addition, the game area 32 below the normal variable winning device 37 is provided with an outlet 30b for collecting game balls that did not enter the winning ports, etc.

In addition, outside the play area 32, in the lower right corner of the play board main body 30a, there is provided a collective display device 50 that executes the special chart change display game (special chart 1 change display game, special chart 2 change display game) and the normal chart change display game. The collective display device 50 has display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current play status (see FIG. 2B).

Figure 2B is a diagram showing the configuration of the collective display device 50. The collective display device 50 has a first special chart change display section 51 (special chart 1 display, lamp D1) and a second special chart change display section 52 (special chart 2 display, lamp D2) for the change display game, which are composed of 7-segment displays (LED lamps), a change display section 53 (normal chart display, lamps D8, D10, D18) for the normal chart change display game, and a memory display section (special chart 1 hold display 54, special chart 2 hold display 55, normal chart hold display 56) for notifying the start (hold) memory number of each change display game. The special chart 1 hold display 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. The special chart 2 hold display 55 is composed of lamps D13 and D14. The normal chart hold display 56 is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

The collective display device 50 also has a first game status display unit 57 (first game status indicator, lamp D7) that indicates whether it is time to hit from the right (when you should hit from the right) or the left (when you hit normally), a second game status display unit 58 (second game status indicator, lamp D17) that lights up when a time-saving state occurs to indicate the occurrence of the time-saving state, a third game status display unit 59 (third game status indicator, probability state display unit, lamp D9) that indicates that the probability state of a jackpot is in a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and a round display unit 60 (lamps D3-D6) that indicates the number of rounds at the time of a jackpot (the number of times the special variable winning device 39 is opened and closed).

In the special chart 1 display 51 and the special chart 2 display 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display in which the identification information (for example, the central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinked). The special chart 1 display 51 and the special chart 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment-type display unit, and may be composed of a collection of multiple LEDs. When executing the variable display, all LEDs provided as the display may be turned on and off (all LEDs flash simultaneously), or cyclically lit (lighting and turning off in a predetermined order from any one LED at a predetermined time), or a predetermined number of LEDs among the multiple LEDs may be turned on and off (blinked) or cyclically lit. In the general chart display 53, the variable display game is also executed by a variable display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. The general chart display 53 can also be appropriately configured in the same way as the special chart 1 display 51 and the special chart 2 display 52.

The lamp display device 80 has lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) that perform a variable display (flashing) that alternates between lighting and turning off the pattern (the fourth special pattern described below), and lamp display units 3-6 (LEDs) that notify the start (pending) memory count of each special pattern variable display game. The lamp display device 80 is controlled by the performance control device 300 (described below).

Lamp display units 1 and 2 flash at a predetermined flashing cycle (e.g., 200 msec (milliseconds)) as a variable display. The variable display time of the special chart 1 display unit 51, special chart 2 display unit 52, and regular chart display unit 53 of the collective display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, while the variable display time of the lamp display units 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80 is measured by the performance control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 3 and 4 (Special chart 1 reserved LED 1, Special chart 1 reserved LED 2) display the number of reserved special charts 1 (first start memory number) by a combination of off, on, and flashing states. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (Special chart 2 reserved LED 1, Special chart 2 reserved LED 2) display the number of reserved special charts 2 (second start memory number) by a combination of off, on, and flashing states. The lamp display units 3-6 stop displaying the reserved number when a jackpot occurs, but continue to display the reserved number when the jackpot state is not in progress (including when a reach occurs on the display unit 41, as described below).

Next, we will explain the game flow on the gaming machine 10, and the details of the regular chart change display game and the special chart change display game.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by shooting a gaming ball from a ball launcher (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The shot gaming ball flows down the gaming area 32 while changing its rolling direction due to obstacles and windmills arranged in various places in the gaming area 32, and either wins in the normal start gate 34, the normal winning port 35, the start winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 39, or flows into the outlet 30b provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32 and is discharged from the gaming area 32. Then, when a gaming ball wins in the normal winning port 35, the start winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 39, a number of prize balls according to the type of winning port is discharged to the upper tray 21 via the payout device.

The normal map start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) that detects the game ball that has passed through the normal map start gate 34. When the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal map variation display game is executed based on the result of the judgment of the random number value for winning judgment that is extracted at this time.

When the normal map variation display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal map variation display game has already been played and has not ended, or when the result of the normal map variation display game is a win and the normal variation winning device 37 has been converted to an open state, if the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34, the normal map start memory number is incremented (+1) if it is less than the upper limit number.

The normal map start memory stores a random number value for determining whether the normal map variation display game is a win or a loss, and when this random number value for determining whether the game is a win or a loss matches the determination value, the normal map variation display game is a win and a specific result pattern (specific result) is derived.

The normal map variation display game is executed by the normal map display device 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The normal map display device 53 is composed of an LED that indicates a win when lit as normal identification information (normal map) and indicates a loss when unlit, and displays the variation of the normal identification information by flashing this LED, and displays the result by turning the LED on or off after a specified variation display time has elapsed.

If the normal random number value extracted when passing through the normal start gate 34 is a winning value, the normal pattern displayed on the normal display 53 stops in a winning state, and the winning state is reached. At this time, the normal solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) is driven, and the movable member 37b is converted to an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), allowing the game ball to enter the normal variable winning device 37.

The entry of a game ball into the start winning hole 36 and into the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the start winning hole 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the start winning hole 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). A game ball that enters the start winning hole 36 is detected as a start winning ball for the special chart 1 variable display game and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit, and a game ball that enters the normal variable winning device 37 is detected as a start winning ball for the special chart 2 variable display game and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit.

When the starting winning ball of the special chart change display game is detected, the jackpot random number, the jackpot pattern random number, the random number of each change pattern, etc. are extracted. These random numbers are stored a predetermined number of times (for example, up to 8 times) as special chart start winning memories in the special chart reserve memory area (part of the RAM) of the game control device 100. The number of special chart start winning memories is displayed on the special chart 1 reserve display 54 and the special chart 2 reserve display 55, which are used to notify the number of start winnings of the collective display device 50, and is also displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

The game control device 100 executes a special chart 1 variable display game on the special chart 1 display 51 based on a win in the start winning slot 36 or the first start memory. The game control device 100 also executes a special chart 2 variable display game on the special chart 2 display 52 based on a win in the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory.

The special chart 1 variable display game (first special chart variable display game) and the special chart 2 variable display game (second special chart variable display game) are played by displaying identification information (special pattern, special chart) on the special chart 1 display 51 and the special chart 2 display 52, and then stopping to display a predetermined result pattern. In addition, the display device 41 plays a decorative special chart variable display game that displays multiple types of identification information (e.g., numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) in a variable manner corresponding to each special chart variable display game.

The decorative special symbol change display game on the display device 41 starts changing (scrolling) the decorative special symbols (identification information) consisting of the numbers and the like described above in the order of left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and center (third special symbol), and after a predetermined time, the changing symbols are stopped one by one to display the result of the special symbol change display game. In addition, the display device 41 performs various performance displays such as the appearance of characters to increase interest. Furthermore, in the decorative special symbol change display game, as another decorative special symbol (identification information), the fourth special symbol changes by repeatedly turning on and off (flashing) in the lamp display units 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80. The changing display of the lamp display units 1 and 2 stops after a predetermined time from the start with "off" in the case of a miss, and "on" in the case of a big win or small win.

When a game ball enters the start winning hole 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the jackpot random number value at the time of winning detection is a jackpot value), a specific result state (special result state) is derived from the displayed pattern as a result of the special pattern variable display game, and a jackpot state (special game state) is entered. Correspondingly, the display state of the display device 41 becomes a special result state (for example, a state in which the numbers "7, 7, 7" are lined up).

At this time, the special variable prize winning device 39 converts the large prize winning port from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) by energizing the large prize winning port solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3). In other words, the large prize winning port provided in the special variable prize winning device 39 opens wide for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls have won, and during this time the player is given the privilege of winning many game balls.

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the jackpot random number value at the time of winning detection is a small win value), a specific result state (small win result state) is derived from the displayed pattern as a result of the special chart variable display game, and a small win state is achieved. Correspondingly, the display state of the display device 41 becomes a small win result state. Note that in this embodiment, the jackpot random number value is also used to determine a small win, but the small win value (small win determination value) is different from the jackpot value (jackpot determination value).

At this time, the special variable winning device 39 converts the large prize opening from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined short period of time by energizing the large prize opening solenoid 39b (see Figure 3). Note that the total opening time of the large prize opening is shorter in the small win state (small win game state) than in the big win state (special game state), so the game value (number of balls acquired) that the player can obtain is less in the small win state than in the big win state. Note that the large prize opening is open in both the small win state and the big win state, but the big win state may be called the first special game state and the small win state may be called the second special game state.

Here we explain the difference between a big win and a small win.

A big win is a special result that involves the operation of a condition device, and a small win is a specific result that does not involve the operation of a condition device. The condition device is activated when a big win occurs in a special pattern variable display game (a big win pattern stops displaying). The operation of the condition device means, for example, that a big win state occurs and a specific flag is set to continuously operate the special variable winning device 39 as a special electric role. The non-operation of the condition device means, for example, that the specific flag described above is not set, such as when a small win lottery is won. The "condition device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. The term "condition device" is a commonly used term in the field of pachinko games to refer to a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the continuous operation of an electric role, and is used in this specification as a term with the same meaning.

Specifically, in the case of a big win, the big win flag is set and the special variable prize device is opened, whereas in the case of a small win, the small win flag is set and the special variable prize device is opened.

The special chart 1 display 51 and the special chart 2 display 52 may be configured as separate displays or as the same display, but are set so that the special chart change display games are not executed simultaneously.

For the decorative special chart change display game on the display device 41, the special chart 1 change display game and the special chart 2 change display game may be executed on separate display devices or separate display areas, or may be executed on the same display device or display area. In this case, the decorative special chart change display game corresponding to the special chart 1 change display game and the special chart 2 change display game is not executed simultaneously. The special chart 2 change display game is executed with priority over the special chart 1 change display game, and there is a start memory for the special chart 1 change display game and the special chart 2 change display game, and when it becomes possible to execute the special chart change display game, the special chart 2 change display game is executed.

In the following explanation, when there is no distinction between the special chart 1 change display game and the special chart 2 change display game, they will simply be referred to as the special chart change display game.

In addition, although not limited thereto, the start port 1 switch 36a in the start winning port 36, the start port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the count switch (39a) use non-contact magnetic proximity sensors (hereinafter referred to as proximity switches) that have a magnetic detection coil and detect game balls by utilizing the phenomenon in which the magnetic field changes when metal approaches the coil. Also, a microswitch with mechanical contacts can be used for the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10, etc., and the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main frame opening detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12, etc.

[Game Control Device]
3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the game machine 10. The game machine 10 is equipped with a game control device 100 (main board), which is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in an integrated manner, and is composed of a CPU section 110 having a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111, an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and a data bus 140 that connects the CPU section 110, the input section 120, and the output section 130.

The CPU section 110 includes an amusement microcomputer (CPU) 111, known as an amusement chip (IC), and an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that has an oscillator such as a crystal resonator and generates the CPU's operating clock, timer interrupts, and a clock that serves as a reference for the random number generation circuit. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as DC 32V, DC 12V, or DC 5V, generated by the power supply device 400, to enable them to operate.

The power supply unit 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V DC from a 24V AC power supply and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as 12V DC or 5V DC from a voltage of 32V DC, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power outage, and a control signal generation unit 430 that has a power outage monitoring circuit and generates and outputs control signals such as a power outage monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the gaming control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power outage.

In this embodiment, the power supply unit 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generating unit 430 may be configured to be provided on a separate board or integral with the game control device 100, i.e., on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are subject to replacement when changing models, by providing the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generating unit 430 on a board separate from the power supply unit 400 or the main board, as in the embodiment, they are not subject to replacement, thereby reducing costs.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of a single large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the gaming control device 100, so that data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power outage or after the power is cut off. The control signal generating unit 430, for example, monitors the 32V voltage generated by the normal power supply unit 410, and when it drops to, for example, 17V or less, detects the occurrence of a power outage and changes the power outage monitoring signal, while outputting a reset signal after a predetermined time. It also outputs a reset signal after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time the power is turned on or the power is restored.

The game control device 100 (main board) also includes a setting key switch 93 that is turned on by the operator's rotation operation or the like to change the setting value related to the game conditions (games), and a setting value change switch 102 that can change the setting value related to the game conditions according to the operator's operation. In this embodiment, the setting value related to the game conditions (games) is the probability setting value of the jackpot probability, but other game conditions other than the jackpot probability (such as the probability of a small win or the probability of entering a special mode) can also be changed according to the probability setting value. The setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 constitute a setting change means (setting change device 42) that can change the setting (setting value) related to the game conditions. In this embodiment, the touch switch signal of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 is used as a confirmation signal for confirming the setting value, but an operable confirmation button switch (operation means, operation unit) may be provided on the game control device 100, and the signal from the confirmation button switch may be used as a confirmation signal for confirming the setting value.

The setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the gaming machine 10, and are therefore located in a position (inaccessible position) that cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. In other words, general players cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102. Note that in this embodiment, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are provided so as to be assembled on the game control device 100, but they may also be provided in a position that cannot be accessed unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened, such as on the power supply board of the power supply device 400.

When the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, if the front frame 12 (main frame) is open and the setting key switch 93 is on, the operator can change the settings (setting values) related to the game conditions such as the probability of winning or the probability of entering a special mode by operating the setting value change switch 102 (setting value change button). That is, when the power is turned on, the front frame 12 is open and the setting key switch 93 is on, which is a setting variable state in which the settings (setting values) can be changed. In the normal procedure, the operator opens the front frame 12, rotates the setting key switch 93 to the on position, and turns on the power, which is a setting variable state corresponding to the state in which the settings are being changed. The setting variable state may be notified by a sound from the speaker. Note that the setting variable state may be a state in which the glass frame 15 is open and the setting key switch 93 is on when the power is turned on, or a state in which both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are open and the setting key switch 93 is on.

In this embodiment, the setting values for the game conditions are defined in six stages: setting value 1 (setting 1), setting value 2 (setting 2), setting value 3 (setting 3), setting value 4 (setting 4), setting value 5 (setting 5), and setting value 6 (setting 6). Setting value 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player, and setting value 6 is the most favorable setting for the player. Setting values 1 and 2 are low settings, setting values 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and setting values 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the setting value change process, each time the operator operates the setting value change switch 102 (setting value change button), the setting value (setting) is changed and selected as follows: setting value 1 → setting value 2 → setting value 3 → setting value 4 → setting value 5 → setting value 6 → setting value 1 → setting value 2 → ... Note that instead of operating the setting value change button, the setting value may be changed by rotating the setting key switch 93 to a predetermined position. Also, the setting value is not limited to six stages. The selected setting value 1 to 6 is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143, which is a seven-segment display device. Note that the probability setting value display device 143 may change the display directly in conjunction with the operation of the setting value change switch 102 via an electric circuit. As described later, the selected setting value 1 to 6 may be displayed on the first special chart change display unit 51 and/or the second special chart change display unit 52 for the change display game of the collective display device 50.

When the operator touches the operating handle 24 and a touch switch signal is input to the game control device 100, the selected (changed) setting value (i.e., the setting) is confirmed and stored in the probability setting value area in the RWM (storage means), and the setting value change process ends. Note that it is also possible to configure the game control device 100 to confirm and store the setting value (i.e., the setting) regardless of the touch switch signal when the setting key switch 93 is turned off after the setting value is changed, or when a predetermined time has passed since the setting variable state is entered.

On the other hand, after the gaming machine 10 is powered on, opening the front frame 12 (main body frame) and rotating the setting key switch 93 from the OFF state to the ON state will enter the setting value confirmation mode (setting confirmation state). In the setting value confirmation mode, the setting value displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 can be confirmed. The selected setting value 1 to 6 may be displayed and confirmed on the first special chart change display section 51 and/or the second special chart change display section 52 for the change display game of the collective display device 50. The setting value confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) may be announced by a sound from the speaker.

The setting value change switch 102 (setting value change button) can also be used as a RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch). If the initialization switch is on when the power is turned on (power is restored), an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process is performed to forcibly initialize the information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. Although not limited to this, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power outage monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal, and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 is equipped with a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written at any time.

ROM 111b stores unchanging information for game control (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) in a non-volatile manner, and RAM 111c is used as a working area for CPU 111a during game control and as a storage area for various signals and random numbers. An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as ROM 111b or RAM 111c.

The ROM 111b also stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that specifies, for example, the execution time of the special chart variation display game, the performance content, and whether or not a reach state occurs. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to determine a variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table also includes a miss variation pattern table that is selected when the result is a miss, and a jackpot variation pattern table that is selected when the result is a jackpot. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables (such as a second half variation group table and a second half variation pattern selection table) for determining a second half variation pattern that is a variation pattern after a reach state is reached, and tables (such as a first half variation group table and a first half variation pattern selection table) for determining a first half variation pattern that is a variation pattern before a reach state is reached.

Here, the term "reach" (reach state) refers to a display state in which, in a gaming machine 10 having a display device with a variable display state, the display device derives and displays multiple display results at different times, and when the multiple display results become a predetermined special result mode, the gaming state becomes a gaming state (special gaming state) advantageous to the player. At a stage where some of the multiple display results have not yet been derived and displayed, the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for becoming a special result mode. In other words, the reach state refers to a display mode that does not deviate from the display conditions for becoming a special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches a stage before the display result is derived and displayed. For example, a state in which a variable display is performed using multiple variable display areas while maintaining a state in which all special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state refers to the display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and at least some of the display results of the multiple variable display areas determined before the display result is derived and displayed satisfy the conditions for a special result mode.

Therefore, for example, if the decorative special chart variable display game displayed on the display device in response to the special chart variable display game displays multiple identification information for a predetermined period of time in each of the left, center, and right variable display areas on the display device, and then stops the variable display in the order of left, right, and center to display the result state, the state in which the variable display stops in the left and right variable display areas when the conditions for a special result state are met (for example, the same identification information) is the reach state. Alternatively, when the variable display of all variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the reach state may be set to a state in which the conditions for a special result state are met in any two of the left, center, and right variable display areas (for example, the same identification information, excluding the special result state), and the remaining one variable display area may be displayed from the reach state.

The reach state includes multiple reach effects, and normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premium reach are set as reach effect types with different possibilities (different expected values) of deriving a special result mode (jackpot mode). The expectation (expected value) of a jackpot increases in the following order: no reach < normal reach < special 1 reach < special 2 reach < special 3 reach < premium reach. The reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived in the special chart variable display game (when a jackpot occurs). In other words, it may also be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that a special result mode is not derived in the special chart variable display game (when a miss occurs). Therefore, a state in which a reach state has occurred is a state with a higher possibility of a jackpot than when a reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111a executes the game control program in the ROM 111b, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the performance control device 300, generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoids and display devices, and controls the entire game machine 10. In addition, although not shown, the game microcomputer 111 is equipped with a random number generation circuit for generating a jackpot random number for determining a jackpot in the special chart variable display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining a jackpot pattern, a small jackpot pattern random number for determining a small jackpot pattern, and a variable pattern random number for determining a variable pattern in the special chart variable display game (including the execution time of the variable display game in various reaches and no reaches), and a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) for the CPU 111a and a clock that provides an update timing for the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113.

In addition, in processing related to the special chart variation display game, the CPU 111a acquires one of the multiple variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b. Specifically, the CPU 111a selects and acquires one of the multiple variation pattern tables based on the game result (jackpot or miss) of the special chart variation display game, the probability state of the special chart variation display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state), the start memory number, etc. Here, the CPU 111a serves as a variation allocation information acquisition means that acquires one of the multiple variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when executing the special chart variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, and performs control to pay out prize balls. The payout control device 200 also drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on a ball loan request signal from the card unit 600, and performs control to pay out loan balls.

The input section 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 is connected to a radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, the gate switch 34a of the normal start gate 34, the start port 1 switch 36a in the first start winning port 36, the start port 2 switch 37a in the second start winning port 37, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39, and is provided with an interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 that receives negative logic signals such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches and converts them into positive logic signals of 0V-5V.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 39a are input to the third input port 124.

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality in the sensor or switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

The second input port 123 receives a detection signal from a magnetic sensor switch 61 for detecting fraud that is provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10, a glass frame open detection switch 63 that is provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10, and a front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) that is provided on the front frame 12 (main frame) or the like. A vibration sensor switch that detects vibrations may be provided on the gaming machine, and the detection signal may be input to the second input port 123.

The second input port 123 (input port 3) also takes in the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch signal from the setting value change switch 102, and supplies them to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Furthermore, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 are configured to be input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As mentioned above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. To enable this level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation.

The data held by the third input port 124 can be read by the gaming microcontroller 111 asserting (changing to an active level) the enable signal CE2 by decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124. The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 described below.

The input unit 120 is provided with a first input port 122 that takes in the frame radio wave illegal signal, payout busy signal, status signal indicating a payout abnormality, shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, overflow switch signal indicating overflow, touch switch signal based on the input of a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, and out ball detection switch signal from the out ball detection switch and supplies them to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (it is full). The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal that is output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main frame) detecting radio waves, and the payout busy signal is a signal that indicates whether the payout control device 200 is in a state where it can accept commands. In this embodiment, the out ball detection switch (not shown) detects all game balls that have been launched into the game area and finished playing. The out ball detection switch (not shown) may detect only game balls passing through the out port 30b.

The input section 120 is also provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power outage monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply unit 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111, etc., and the Schmitt buffer 125 has the function of removing noise from these input signals. The power outage monitoring signal from the power supply unit 400 is once input to the first input port 122 and then taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In other words, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signals from the various switches mentioned above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is input directly to a reset terminal provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. The reset signal RST is also configured to be output directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test firing signal held in a port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing device.

The reset signal RST may also be configured to be output to the test firing device via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is received must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from each port of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is received is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on the communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the presentation control device 300 and on the communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the gaming control device 100 to the presentation control device 300 and the payout control device 200 via serial communication. Note that this is one-way communication that prevents signals from being input from the presentation control device 300 to the gaming control device 100.

In addition, the output unit 130 is configured to be able to mount a buffer 133 that is connected to the data bus 140 and outputs data informing the special pattern information of the variable display game and signals indicating the probability of a jackpot to a test firing test device of a certification agency (not shown) via a relay board 70. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in an amusement facility. Note that the detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a start port switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied directly to the test firing device, such as those from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, are first taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, and are then supplied to the test firing device from the data bus 140 via the buffer 133 and relay board 70 as an error signal indicating, for example, that the gaming machine is in a state where it cannot be controlled.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing device, and a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal without going through the buffer. The chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing device.

The output unit 130 is also provided with a second output port 134 for outputting opening/closing data for the solenoid (normal solenoid) 37c that is connected to the data bus 140 and opens the normal variable winning device 37, and the solenoid (large winning port solenoid) 39b that opens the special variable winning device 39.

The output unit 130 also has a third output port 135 for outputting on/off data for the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50, and a fourth output port 136 for outputting on/off data for the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the collective display device 50 is connected.

The output unit 130 is also provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10, such as jackpot information, to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is equipped with a photorelay, and can be connected to an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an internal management device for the gaming facility (hall computer)) installed in the gaming facility, so that information about the gaming machine 10 can be supplied to the external device. A launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

The output unit 130 is also provided with a sixth output port 141 (probability setting value display output port) for outputting information on the setting value (probability setting value) to the probability setting value display device 143. In this embodiment, the probability setting value display device 143 is a 7-segment display device (LED lamp), but information on the setting value (probability setting value) may be output from the sixth output port 141 to the probability setting value display device 143 via a driver (LED driver).

The output section 130 further includes a first driver (drive circuit) 138a that receives the open/close data signals of the normal solenoid 37c and the special prize opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134 and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal, a second driver 138b that outputs an on/off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, a third driver 138c that outputs an on/off drive signal of the digit line on the current draw side of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal to be supplied to an external device such as a management device from the fifth output port 137 to the external information terminal 71.

The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32V from the power supply unit 400 as a power supply voltage so that it can drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. The second driver 138b, which drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50, is supplied with DC 12V. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, is intended to draw current through the digit lines according to the display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b, which outputs 12V, feeds current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line, and the third driver 138c, which outputs a ground potential, draws current from the cathode terminal through the segment line, so that the power supply voltage flows through the LEDs selected sequentially by the dynamic drive method, causing them to light up. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs an external information signal to the external information terminal 71, is supplied with DC 12V to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, second output port 134, first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the relay board 70 side, rather than on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, i.e., the main board.

The output unit 130 is further provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and programs of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 250. The photocoupler 139 is configured to enable two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 250 via serial communication. Note that such data transmission and reception is performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111, as with a normal general-purpose microprocessor, and therefore no ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are provided.

The output unit 130 is further provided with a driver 150 that receives serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code, etc.) output from the second output port 134 and drives a status display device 152. In this embodiment, the status display device 152 is made up of multiple (four) 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot portion) displays (LED lamps), and the driver 150 is an LED driver, but is not limited to this.

The status display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board), but may be provided elsewhere. For example, the status display device 152 is a 4-digit 7-segment display (8-segment display including the dot portion) and can display the role ratio, payout rate, and number of balls dispensed. The status display device 152 is not limited to directly displaying the role ratio, payout rate, and number of balls dispensed, but may also indirectly display the number of balls dispensed, payout rate, and role ratio. In other words, it is sufficient for the status display device 152 to be able to display information relating to the role ratio, payout rate, and number of balls dispensed.

Here, the number of discharged balls is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 (also called the number of out balls), and is the sum of the number of game balls that passed through the winning hole (the number of winning balls) and the number of game balls that passed through the out hole 30b. The number of discharged balls is basically the same as the number of fired balls, which is the number of game balls fired from the ball firing device into the game area 32. The number of discharged balls can be obtained by counting (counting) the signal of the out ball detection switch. In this embodiment, the winning holes include the general winning hole 35, the start winning hole 36 (first start winning hole, start hole 1), the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning hole, start hole 2), and the special variable winning device 39 (large winning hole). The number of discharged balls is displayed as a countdown, and (100 - number of discharged balls) is displayed, and only up to 100 balls (a specified number) are counted. The number of discharged balls may be displayed as a countup from "00" to "99".

The payout rate is the ratio (proportion) of the total number of winning balls to the number of balls dispensed (or number of balls fired), and is calculated as (number of balls won / number of balls dispensed) x 100 (%). In other words, the payout rate is the number of winning balls (total number of winning balls) per 100 balls dispensed.

In this embodiment, the payout rate is easily calculated from the number of balls acquired between 0 and 100 balls discharged each time the number of balls discharged reaches 100. In other words, the number of balls discharged is only counted up to 100 (predetermined number). Each time the number of balls discharged reaches 100 (predetermined number), the payout rate is updated to the latest payout rate between the time the number of balls discharged changed from 1 to 100. As a result, the payout rate can be displayed by simply displaying the number of balls acquired (total number of prize balls) on the status display device 152.

For example, the role ratio is the percentage (%) (= so-called continuous role ratio) of the number of prize balls (number of balls acquired by each role) acquired by winning a large prize slot during a jackpot state out of the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) acquired by winning a prize slot during a specified period (e.g., from when the gaming machine 10 was turned on to the present). Note that the role ratio may be the percentage (= large prize slot ratio) of the number of prize balls acquired by winning a large prize slot (during a jackpot state and during a small prize state) out of the total number of prize balls, or it may be the percentage (= so-called role ratio (total role ratio) that is commonly used) of the number of prize balls acquired by winning a large prize slot and a normal variable prize slot 37 (second start prize slot).

[Performance control device]
Next, the configuration of the performance control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is a block diagram of the performance control system of the gaming machine 10.

The performance control device 300 is equipped with a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311, which is an amusement chip (IC) like the gaming microcomputer 111, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphics processor that performs image processing for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls the sound output to play various melodies, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 19.

Connected to the main control microcomputer 311 are a program ROM 321 consisting of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores the programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a working area, an FeRAM 323 that can retain memory contents even if power is not supplied during a power outage, and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (date, day of the week, time, etc.). Note that a RAM that provides a working area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

The main control microcomputer 311 is also connected to a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the content of the presentation, and instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 on the sound to be played, turns on decorative lamps, controls the drive of motors and solenoids, and manages the presentation time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a working area, and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. Also connected to the VDP 312 is an image ROM 325 that stores character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) 326 that is used to expand and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325.

Although not limited to this, data is sent and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

The VDP 312 inputs to the main control microcomputer 311 a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image on the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal STS for providing the timing for transmitting data. In addition, the VDP 312 also inputs to the main control microcomputer 311 interrupt signals INT0-n for notifying the processing status, such as the end of drawing to the VRAM, and a wait signal WAIT for notifying the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive commands or data.

The performance control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be sent to the display device 41 using the LVDS (low amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is displayed on the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313.

A sound ROM 327 in which sound data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The performance control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 consisting of an audio power amplifier that drives the upper speaker 19a provided in the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided in the front frame 12, and the sound generated by the sound source LSI 314 is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

The presentation control device 300 is also provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives commands sent from the game control device 100. The presentation control device 300 receives the number of reserved decorative special symbols commands, decorative special symbol commands, fluctuation commands, stop information commands, etc. sent from the game control device 100 to the presentation control device 300 as presentation control command signals (presentation commands) via the command I/F 331. The game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates on DC 5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the presentation control device 300 operates on DC 3.3V, so the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

The presentation control device 300 also includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (such as the frame decoration device 18) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the glass frame 15, and a board presentation movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls a board presentation device 44 (such as a movable role that enhances the presentation effect in cooperation with the presentation display on the display device 41) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). The board decoration device 46 may include the lamp display device 80 described above.

These control circuits 332 to 334, which drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc., are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340. In addition, a frame effect movable body control circuit may be provided to drive and control frame effect devices such as motors provided in the glass frame 15.

The performance control device 300 also has a function for detecting the on/off state of the performance button switch 25a built into the performance button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the performance button 25, and the performance role switch 47 (performance motor switch) that detects the initial position of the motor in the board performance device 44, and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, as well as a switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of the volume adjustment switch 335 provided on the performance control device 300 and inputs the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

The normal power supply section 410 of the power supply unit 400 is configured to generate a voltage of DC 32V to drive motors and solenoids, DC 12V to drive the display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, motors and LEDs, DC 5V to serve as the power supply voltage for the command I/F 331, and DC 15V to drive motors, LEDs and speakers in order to supply the desired level of DC voltage to the performance control device 300 having the configuration described above and the electronic components controlled by it.

Furthermore, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC-DC converter is provided in the performance control device 300 to generate DC 3.3V or DC 1.2V based on DC 5V. Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generating unit 430 of the power supply unit 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311, which resets the device. It is also output from the main control microcomputer 311 and supplied to the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332-334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc., which reset these. A cooling fan 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the performance control device 300, and the cooling fan 45 is driven when the performance control device 300 is powered on.

Next, the game control performed by these control circuits will be explained. The CPU 111a of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for determining whether the normal game is a hit based on the input of a game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided on the normal game start gate 34, and compares it with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether the normal game is a hit or a miss in the normal game variation display game.

Then, the normal map display displays a normal map variation display game in which the identification pattern is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, and then the normal map variation display game is displayed in which the identification pattern is displayed in a static manner. If the result of the normal map variation display game is a win, a special result state is displayed on the normal map display, and the normal power solenoid 37c is operated, and control is performed to open the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) as described above. In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means that performs conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). Note that, if the result of the normal map variation display game is a loss, control is performed to display a loss result state on the normal map display.

In addition, the start winning (start memory) is stored based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the start hole 1 switch 36a provided in the start winning hole 36, and based on the start memory, a random number value for jackpot judgment of the special chart 1 variable display game is extracted and compared with the judgment value stored in ROM 111b to judge whether the special chart 1 variable display game is a win or a miss.

In addition, a start memory is stored based on the input of a game ball detection signal from the start port 2 switch 37a provided on the normal variable winning device 37, and based on the start memory, a random number value for jackpot judgment of the special chart 2 variable display game is extracted and compared with the judgment value stored in ROM 111b to judge whether the special chart 2 variable display game is a win or a miss.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (presentation control command) including the judgment result of the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game to the presentation control device 300. Then, the special chart 1 display 51 and the special chart 2 display 52 display a special chart variable display game in which the identification pattern is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, and then the special chart variable display game is displayed in a stationary manner. In other words, the game control device 100 constitutes a game control means that controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 into the start winning area (first start winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37).

In addition, the performance control device 300 displays a decorative special chart variable display game corresponding to the special chart variable display game on the display device 41 based on a control signal from the game control device 100. Furthermore, the performance control device 300 performs processing such as setting the performance state, outputting sound from speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling the illumination of various LEDs based on a control signal from the game control device 100. In other words, the performance control device 300 constitutes a performance control means that controls the performance related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

When the result of the special chart variable display game is a win, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result state on the special chart 1 display 51 and the special chart 2 display 52 and generates a special game state. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a performs control, for example, to open the opening/closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39 using the large winning port solenoid 39b, allowing game balls to flow into the large winning port.

Then, one round (R) is defined as the opening of the large prize opening until one of the following conditions is met: either a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) enter the large prize opening, or a predetermined opening time (e.g., 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) has elapsed since the opening of the large prize opening. This is controlled (repeated) for a predetermined number of rounds (e.g., 15, 11, or 2 times) (cycle play). In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a large prize opening opening/closing control means that controls the opening and closing of the large prize opening when the stop result state becomes a special result state. Also, when the result of the special chart variation display game is a miss, control is performed to display the miss result state on the special chart 1 display 51 or the special chart 2 display 52.

The game control device 100 is also capable of generating a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends, based on the result state of the special chart variable display game. The high probability state (probability state) is a state in which the probability of a winning result in the special chart variable display game is higher than the normal probability state. Furthermore, regardless of whether the high probability state is reached based on the result state of either the special chart 1 variable display game or the special chart 2 variable display game, both the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game will be in a high probability state.

The game control device 100 can also generate a time-saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends, based on the result state of the special chart variation display game. In the time-saving state, the normal chart variation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are controlled to be in a time-saving operation state, and the normal variation winning device 37 is controlled so that the opening time per unit time is substantially longer than when the normal variation winning device 37 is in a normal operation state, resulting in a normal power support state. Note that even in a high probability state (normal probability state) other than the latent probability state, the time-saving state is overlapped and normal power support is executed.

For example, in the time-saving state, it is possible to perform a time-saving change in which the execution time (normal map change time) of the above-mentioned normal map change display game is set to a second change display time that is shorter than the normal first change display time (for example, 10,000 msec to 1,000 msec). Note that in the time-saving state, the execution time (special map change time) of the special map change display game is also shortened from normal, and a time-saving change in the special map change display game is also executed.

In addition, in the time-saving state, it is possible to control the normal map stop time that displays the results of the normal map variation display game to a second stop time (e.g., 704 msec) that is shorter than the first stop time (e.g., 1604 msec).

In addition, in the time-saving state, when the normal variable display game results in a winning result and the normal variable winning device 37 is opened, it is possible to control the opening time (normal power opening time) to be a second opening time (e.g., 1,352 msec) that is longer than the first opening time (e.g., 100 msec) in the normal state.

In addition, in the time-saving state, it is possible to set the number of times the normal variable winning device 37 opens (normal power opening number) for one winning result of the normal variable display game to a second opening number (e.g., four times) that is greater than the first opening number (e.g., two times). In addition, in the time-saving state, it is possible to set the probability of a winning result of the normal variable display game (normal probability) to a high probability that is higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operating state.

In the time-saving state, the time for converting the normal variation winning device 37 to the open state is extended more than usual by changing one or more of the normal chart variation time, normal chart stop time, normal power opening count, normal power opening time, and normal chart probability. As a result, in the time-saving state, it is easier to win the normal variation winning device 37 than in the normal game state, and the number of times the special chart variation display game is executed per unit time can be increased more than in the normal game state. It is also possible to set multiple types of time-saving states in which different things are changed. It is also possible to set the movable member 37b not to be opened in the normal operation state (normal chart probability is 0). In addition, when a hit is made, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probability of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be made different. In addition, the high probability state and the time-saving state can occur independently of each other, and both can occur simultaneously, or only one can occur.

[Control of game control device]
The control of the gaming machine for performing such a game will be described below. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly consists of a main process shown in Figures 5A and 5B, and a timer interrupt process shown in Figure 9, which is performed at a predetermined time interval (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main processing will be described. Figures 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the main processing by the game control device 100. The main processing starts when the power is turned on. In the flowchart of the processing executed by the game control device 100, the symbols (numbers) of the steps are represented as "A****".

As shown in FIG. 5A, when the game control device 100 starts the main process, it first executes a process to prohibit interrupts (A1001). It then executes a stack pointer setting process to set a stack pointer, which is the top address of an area to which values of registers, etc. are saved when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

Next, register bank 0 is specified as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a specific register (A1004). For example, if the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a launch prohibition signal and sets the launch permission signal to a prohibited state (A1005). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch prohibition signal, and the launch of game balls is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the state of input port 3 (second input port 123) (A1006). This makes it possible to read signals from the setting key switch 93, the setting value change switch 102, the glass frame open detection switch 63, and the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets a power delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value to the power delay timer, a waiting time (e.g., 3 seconds) is set for waiting until the programs of the slave control means (e.g., the payout control device 200 and the performance control device 300) that perform various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 that constitutes the master control means are started normally. This makes it possible to avoid the slave control device missing the command if the game control device 100 starts up first when the power is turned on and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (e.g., the payout control device 200 and the performance control device 300) starts up. In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a waiting means that delays the start of the master control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on and sets a predetermined waiting time to wait for the start of the slave control device (the payout control device 200, the performance control device 300, etc.).

The power delay timer also uses memory areas (RAM areas or registers not subject to validity checks) that are not subject to validity checks (checksum calculations). This eliminates the need to exclude part of the RAM area when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, preventing the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

The second input port 123 (input port 3) is configured to receive a setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and a setting value change switch signal from the setting value change switch 102, and by reading the state of the second input port 123 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 can be reliably detected. In other words, if the state of the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 is read after the standby time has elapsed, it is necessary to wait for the standby time to elapse before operating the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102, or to continue operating the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 from power-on until the standby time has elapsed. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it becomes possible to detect the operation immediately after power-on without performing such troublesome operations, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 performed when power is turned on is not accepted.

When the power delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes a process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power outage during the standby time (A1008 to A1012).

When the power outage monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first sets the number of times (e.g., two times) to read and check the power outage monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and data bus (A1008), and determines whether the power outage monitoring signal is on (A1009).

When the power outage monitoring signal is on (result of A1009 is "Y"), the game control device 100 judges whether the power outage monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks set in the processing of step A1008 (A1010). Then, when the power outage monitoring signal has not been on for the number of checks (result of A1010 is "N"), the game control device 100 returns to the processing of determining whether the power outage monitoring signal is on in step A1009.

In addition, if the power outage monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (result of A1010 is "Y"), i.e., if it is determined that a power outage has occurred, the gaming control device 100 waits until the power to the gaming machine is cut off. In this way, by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal has been continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power outage due to noise, etc., and to appropriately deal with malfunctions when the power is turned on.

In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a power outage monitoring means that monitors the occurrence of a power outage during a specified standby time. This makes it possible to respond to a power outage that occurs during the period when the start-up of the game control device 100, which serves as the main control means, is delayed, and malfunctions at power-on can be dealt with appropriately. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the contents stored at the time of the previous power outage remain retained, so there is no need to perform backup processing or the like when a power outage occurs here. Therefore, even if a power outage occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden on control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power outage monitoring signal is not on (result of A1009 is "N"), i.e., if a power outage has not occurred, the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by -1 (A1011) and determines whether the timer value is 0 or not (A1012). If the timer value is not 0 (result of A1012 is "N"), i.e., if the standby time has not ended, the game control device 100 returns to the process of setting the number of times the power outage monitoring signal is checked in step A1008.

In addition, when the timer value is 0 (result of A1012 is "Y"), i.e., when the waiting time has ended, the game control device 100 permits access to readable and writable RWM (read-write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM (A1013), and outputs off data to all output ports (setting them to a state of no output) (A1014).

Next, the gaming control device 100 sets up a serial port (a port that is pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111, and in this embodiment, is used for communication with the performance control device 300 and the payout control device 200) (A1015). Furthermore, it initializes the driver 150 that drives the status display device 152 (A1016).

Here, the game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the contents of the initial setting to the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits it to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets a duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED of the status display device 152. The control data corresponding to the duty ratio is used in the duty setting section of the driver 150 (LED driver). In order to make each LED darker with less power consumption, the duty ratio of the driver 150 may be set smaller than normal. Next, the game control device 100 sets the number of digits to be used in the status display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of digits to be used is 4. The control data corresponding to the number of digits to be used is used in the digit number setting section of the driver 150 (LED driver).

Next, the game control device 100 judges whether the value of power outage inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power outage inspection area check data (A1017). If it is normal (the result of A1017 is "Y"), it judges whether the value of power outage inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power outage inspection area check data (A1018).

Furthermore, if the value of the power outage inspection area 2 is normal (result of A1018 is "Y"), the game control device 100 executes a checksum calculation process (A1019) to calculate a checksum of a specified area in the RWM (e.g., a game control work area), and determines whether the calculated checksum matches the checksum at the time of power outage (A1020). If the checksums match (result of A1020 is "Y"), RAM 111c is normal, and RAM clear start address 2 is set (A1021).

Figure 5C is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 111c of the gaming microcomputer 111. As shown in Figure 5C, the RAM clear start address 2 is set so as to remove the probability setting value area from the RAM area to be cleared. The RAM clear start address 2 causes the RAM area to be cleared to become the clear area #2 in Figure 5C. The clear area #2 includes a random number area, a control information area, and a gaming control stack area. The random number area includes an initial value random number area that stores various initial value random numbers, and a fluctuation pattern random number area that stores fluctuation pattern random numbers. The control information area is the area from the power outage inspection area 1 to the checksum area, and includes the power outage inspection area 1, the power outage inspection area 2, the checksum area, etc. The random number area may be removed from the clear area #2. The clear area #2 does not include a status display work area that stores information to be displayed on the status display device 152, such as the ratio of roles, and a status display stack area for processing information to be displayed on the status display device 152.

In addition, in FIG. 5C, an unused area may be provided between the game control work area, which is made up of the probability setting value area, random number area, and control information area, and the game control stack area. Also, an unused area may be provided between the status display work area and the status display stack area. Also, the status display stack area may be placed at the very end of the addresses in RAM 111c, and the unused area at the very end of FIG. 5C (the bottom of FIG. 5C) may be eliminated.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the probability setting is being changed (in a variable setting state, in a change setting state) (A1022). If the probability setting is being changed (the result of A1022 is "Y"), the game control device 100 executes the processing of steps A1036-A1041 during the probability setting change. If the probability setting value change flag (A1038) is set, it can be determined that the probability setting is being changed.

When the probability setting is not being changed (result of A1022 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the front frame 12 (main frame) is in an open state (A1023). When a signal is input from the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch), it can be determined that the front frame 12 (main frame) is in an open state. Note that in step A1023, it may be determined whether the glass frame 15 is in an open state instead of the front frame 12, or it may be determined whether both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are in an open state. Note that when a signal is input from the glass frame open detection switch 63, it can be determined that the glass frame 15 is in an open state.

When the front frame 12 (main body frame) is in the open state (result of A1023 is "Y"), the game control device 100 judges whether the setting key switch 93 is on or not (A1024). When the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1024 is "Y"), the setting is in a variable setting state in which the setting (setting value) can be changed, so steps A1036-A1041 are executed to perform RAM initialization processing (RAM clear processing) in the variable setting state and processing during the setting change.

When the front frame 12 (main body frame) is not in the open state (when it is in the closed state) (result of A1023 is "N") or when the setting key switch 93 is off (result of A1024 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the setting value change switch 102 is on (A1025). When the setting value change switch 102 is not on (result of A1025 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes the normal power-on (power restoration) processing of steps A1031-A1035.

On the other hand, when the setting value change switch 102 is on (result of A1025 is "Y"), the game control device 100 executes the RAM initialization (RAM clear) process of steps A1042-A1045. Note that, since the setting value change switch 102 is operated (pressed) and turned on when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 93 in the off state, the setting value change switch 102 is used as a RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch). Note that, in reality, there is no situation in which the setting value change switch 102 is turned on when the front frame 12 is in the closed state (result of A1023 is "N"). The setting value change switch 102, which can also function as an initialization switch, constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from outside, and constitutes initialization means by which the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit.

In addition, if the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power outage inspection area is not normal (the result of A1017 is "N" or the result of A1018 is "N"), or if the checksum does not match (the result of A1020 is "N"), an abnormality has occurred in the RAM 111c, and the game control device 100 proceeds to processing to deal with the RAM abnormality from step A1026 onwards. First, the RAM clear start address 1 is set (A1026). As shown in FIG. 5C, the RAM clear start address 1 is the start address of the game control work area, so the probability setting value area is also included in the RAM area to be cleared. The RAM clear start address 1 sets the RAM area to be cleared to the clear area #1 in FIG. 5C. The clear area #1 includes the game control work area (consisting of the probability setting value area, random number area, and control information area), and the game control stack area. Note that clear area #1 does not include the status display work area that stores the information to be displayed on the status display device 152, and the status display stack area for processing the information to be displayed on the status display device 152.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the front frame 12 (main frame) is in an open state (A1027). If a signal is input from the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch), it can be determined that the front frame 12 is in an open state.

When the front frame 12 is in the open state (result of A1027 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1028). When the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1028 is "Y"), the setting is in a variable setting state in which the setting value can be changed, so RAM initialization processing (RAM clear processing) in the variable setting state of steps A1036-A1041 and processing during setting change are executed. Note that the RAM area to be cleared in the RAM initialization processing in this case is clear area #1 in Figure 5C. Therefore, the RAM abnormality can be resolved.

When the front frame 12 (main frame) is not open (closed) (result of A1027 is "N") or when the setting key switch 93 is off (result of A1028 is "N"), the game control device 100 sends a setting change instruction command to the performance control device 300 (performance control board) to prompt the player to change the setting (A1029). In addition, when the performance control device 300 receives the setting change instruction command, it displays a setting change instruction display on the display device 41 to prompt the player to change the setting. The setting change instruction display causes the player to try to change the setting and turns on the setting key switch 93 (result of A1028 is "Y"), and the RAM abnormality can be resolved by the RAM clear process (A1036) when the setting is changed.

Then, the gaming control device 100 executes a process to prohibit access to the RWM (A1030) and waits until the power to the gaming machine is cut off.

Next, we will explain the normal power-on (power restoration) processing of steps A1031-A1035.

First, the gaming control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of power recovery in the area to be initialized (A1031). The area to be initialized is the clear area #2 in FIG. 5C (random number area, control information area, gaming control stack area). Here, the control information area includes a power outage inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error and fraud monitoring. In addition, the busy signal status area that stores the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 is in a state where it can accept commands, is also cleared, and an indefinite state is set indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. After that, the gaming control device 100 checks the area that stores the gaming state in the RWM to determine whether the gaming state is a high probability state (A1032).

Here, if the game state is not a high probability state (result of A1032 is "N"), the game control device 100 skips the processing of steps A1033 and A1034 and proceeds to the processing of step A1035. Also, if the game state is a high probability state (result of A1032 is "Y"), it saves ON information in the high probability notification flag area (A1033), and saves ON (illumination) data of the high probability notification LED (third game state display unit 59, error indicator) provided in the collective display device 50, for example, in the segment area (A1034). Then, it transmits a power failure recovery command corresponding to the processing number prepared to rationally execute the special chart game processing described later to the performance control device 300 (performance control board) (A1035), and proceeds to the processing of step A1046.

Next, we will explain the RAM initialization process (RAM clear process) in the setting variable state in steps A1036-A1041 and the process during setting changes.

The game control device 100 first clears the RAM area to be cleared to 0 (A1036). If RAM 111c is normal (the result of A1020 is "Y"), the RAM area to be cleared is clear area #2 in FIG. 5C because RAM clear start address 2 is set. If RAM 111c is abnormal (the result of A1020 is "N"), the RAM clear start address 1 is set, and the RAM area to be cleared is clear area #1 in FIG. 5C. In other words, when the RAM is normal, the probability setting value area is not cleared, but when the RAM is abnormal, the probability setting value area is also cleared.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1037). Note that at this point, it is assumed that the front frame 12 is in the open state, and the initial value of the security signal control timer (described below) for outputting a security signal is saved so that the fact that the front frame 12 (main frame) has been opened can be output to an external device (such as a hall computer). Note that if the probability setting value area is cleared due to a RAM abnormality, a default value (for example, setting value 1) may be saved as the initial value in the probability setting value area.

Then, the game control device 100 sets a probability setting value change flag indicating that the setting is in a variable setting state in which the setting can be changed (i.e., the setting is being changed) (A1038). Next, the game control device 100 saves the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area as the initial data when the probability setting value is changed (A1039), loads the value of the probability setting value area, and saves it in the working probability setting value area as the initial data when the probability setting value is changed (A1040). Next, a probability setting change command indicating that the setting is in a variable setting state (probability setting is being changed) is sent to the performance control device 300 (performance control board) (A1041), and the process proceeds to step A1046. The probability setting change command allows the performance control device 300 to recognize that the setting is in a variable setting state (probability setting is being changed).

Next, we will explain the RAM initialization (RAM clear) process using the RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch, setting value change switch 102) in steps A1042-A1045.

The game control device 100 first sets the RAM clear start address 2 (A1042) and clears the RAM area to be cleared to 0 (A1043). Because the clear start address 2 has been set, the RAM area RAM to be cleared becomes clear area #2 in FIG. 5C. Therefore, the probability setting value area is not cleared in the RAM initialization (RAM clear) process by operating the RAM initialization switch (setting value change switch 102).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial values at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1044). Here, the area to be initialized is, for example, the customer waiting demo area and the area related to the setting of the presentation mode. Then, the game control device 100 transmits the command at the time of RAM initialization to the presentation control device 300 (presentation control board) (A1045), and proceeds to the processing of step A1046.

The power outage recovery command sent in step A1035 and the RAM initialization command sent in step A1045 include a machine type designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, a decorative special chart 1 reserved number command and a decorative special chart 2 reserved number command indicating the reserved number of special charts 1 and 2, and a probability information command indicating the state of the probability. In addition, depending on the state at the time of power off or power on, a recovery screen command is included if the special chart variable display game was being executed at the time of power off, a customer waiting demo command is included if the game was waiting for customers at the time of power off, and a power on command is included indicating that the power has been turned on. In addition, depending on the machine type, a presentation mode information command indicating the state of the presentation mode, a presentation count information command, and a high probability count information command indicating the number of games remaining in a high probability state are included. In addition, the RAM initialization command also includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The presentation control device 300 that has received the RAM initialization command (RAM clear command) displays a customer waiting demo on the display device 41, for example, and notifies the user of the RAM initialization (RAM clear) for 30 seconds using the LEDs and speakers of the board decoration device 46, etc.

Furthermore, the command when power is restored and the command when RAM is initialized include a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) that indicates setting value information, which is information on the setting value (probability setting value) of the gaming machine 10. The gaming control device 100 only needs to send the setting value information command to the presentation control device 300 once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter the presentation control device 300 can control the presentation by referring to the setting value information stored in itself.

After processing steps A1035, A1041, and A1045, the game control device 100 starts a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1046). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the game microcomputer 111. The clock generator includes a frequency division circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (e.g., 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the frequency-divided signal, and a signal CTC that provides a trigger for random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After executing the CTC startup process in step A1046, the game control device 100 starts and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a specified register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set.

A bit transposition pattern is a pattern that determines how the bit arrangement of an extracted random number (the arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) is rearranged in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row).

In this embodiment, by swapping the bits of the random numbers according to a bit permutation pattern, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers and increase the confidentiality of the random numbers. The bit permutation pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a number of patterns prepared in advance. It may also be possible for the user to set it arbitrarily.

Then, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a specified register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, saves it in a specified area of the RWM as the initial value (start value) of various corresponding initial value random numbers (random number that determines the big win pattern (jackpot pattern random number 1, big win pattern random number 2), random number that determines the small win pattern (small win pattern random number), random number that determines the win of the normal pattern (win random number), random number that determines the win pattern of the normal pattern (win pattern random number), etc.), and allows an interrupt (A1049). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in this embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on, so by setting this value as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, making it difficult for players to obtain random numbers illegally.

The game control device 100 then executes an initial value random number update process (A1050) to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the jackpot random number, jackpot pattern random number, and winning random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock that is equal to or faster than the CPU's operating clock, while the jackpot pattern random number and winning random number are "low-speed counters" that are updated based on a CTC output (a different CTC (CTC2) from the CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt processing) that has the same period as the timer interrupt processing, which is the processing unit of the program.

In addition, for the jackpot random number and winning random number, a so-called "initial value change method" is used, in which the starting value is changed using the respective initial random number (generated by software) each time the random number goes through one cycle. Note that each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter method of +1 or 1, or may be updated randomly in which all values within the range appear separately without overlaps until a cycle is completed. In other words, the jackpot random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, while the jackpot random number and winning random number are random numbers that are updated by both hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process of step A1050, the game control device 100 sets the number of times to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and data bus (A1051), and determines whether the power failure monitoring signal is on or not (A1052). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1052 is "N"), it returns to the initial value random number update process of step A1050. In other words, if a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the check of the power failure monitoring signal (loop process) are repeatedly performed. By allowing an interrupt (A1049) before the initial value random number update process (A1050), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed with priority, and it is possible to avoid the interrupt process being overwhelmed by the timer interrupt being put on hold by the initial value random number update process. In addition, while the settings are being changed (when the settings are variable), the processes of steps A1046, A1047, A1048, and A1050 relating to updating the initial value random number do not need to be executed.

In addition, as for the initial value random number update processing of step A1050, there is a method in which the initial value random number update processing is performed not only in the main processing but also in the timer interrupt processing. If such a method is adopted, in order to avoid the initial value random number update processing being executed in both, when performing the initial value random number update processing in the main processing, it is necessary to prohibit interrupts before updating and then canceling the interrupt. On the other hand, if the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing as in this embodiment, but only within the main processing, there is no problem in canceling the interrupt before the initial value random number update processing, which has the advantage of simplifying the main processing.

If the power outage monitoring signal is on (result of A1052 is "Y"), the game control device 100 judges whether the power outage monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks set in the processing of step A1051 (A1053). If the power outage monitoring signal has not been on for the number of checks (result of A1053 is "N"), the game control device 100 returns to step A1052 and judges whether the power outage monitoring signal is on.

In addition, if the power outage monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (the result of A1053 is "Y"), that is, if the game control device 100 determines that a power outage has occurred, it temporarily prohibits interrupts (A1054) and outputs off data to all output ports (A1055).

Then, the gaming control device 100 saves power outage inspection area check data 1 in power outage inspection area 1 (A1056), and saves power outage inspection area check data 2 in power outage inspection area 2 (A1057). Furthermore, it executes a checksum calculation process to calculate a checksum when the RWM is powered off (A1058), and further saves the calculated checksum (A1059). Finally, it executes a process to prohibit access to the RWM (A1060), and waits until the power to the gaming machine is cut off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power outage inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power interruption, it is possible to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power interruption has been correctly backed up when the power is turned back on.

From the above, in a gaming machine equipped with a master control means (gaming control device 100) that controls the overall game, and slave control means (payout control device 200, presentation control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to instructions from the master control means, the master control means is equipped with a standby means (gaming control device 100) that delays the start of the master control means when the power is turned on, and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the start of the slave control devices, and a power outage monitoring means (gaming control device 100) that monitors the occurrence of a power outage during the predetermined standby time.

The system also includes a power supply unit 400 that supplies power to various devices, and the power supply unit 400 is configured to output a power outage monitoring signal when it detects the occurrence of a power outage. The power outage monitoring means (game control device 100) is configured to determine that a power outage has occurred when it continues to receive the power outage monitoring signal for a predetermined period of time.

The main control means (game control device 100) also includes a RAM 111c capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization means (game control device 100) that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111c based on the operation of the initialization operation unit, and is adapted to read the operation state of the initialization means before the start of the standby time.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to permit access to RAM 111c after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. Fig. 6 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by a CTC circuit in a clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the timer interrupt process is started.

When timer interrupt processing begins, the game control device 100 first specifies register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in a specified register (A1302). By switching from register bank 0 used in the main processing to register bank 1 at the start of timer interrupt processing, this is equivalent to saving the registers used in the main processing. Note that when timer interrupt processing begins, interrupts are automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 executes input processing to take in inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, i.e., to read the state of each input port (A1303). Furthermore, based on the output data set in the various processes, it executes output processing to perform drive control of actuators such as the solenoid (big prize opening solenoid 39b) (A1304). Note that if a launch prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, a launch permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the launch permission signal becomes capable of being set to the permitted state.

Next, the game control device 100 executes random number update process 1 (A1305) and random number update process 2 (A1306). Random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big win pattern random number, small win pattern random number, win random number, and win pattern random number that are the subject of the initial value random number update process. Random number update process 2 is a process for updating the variable pattern random number for determining the variable pattern in the variable display game of special chart 1 and special chart 2. Note that it is not necessary to execute random number update process 1 and random number update process 2 when the probability setting is being changed (in the setting variable state). After that, the winning port switch/state monitoring process is executed (A1307) to monitor whether or not there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, start port 2 switch 37a, gate switch 34a, winning port switch 35a, and big winning port switch 39a, and to monitor errors (such as whether the front frame or glass frame is open).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a probability setting value change process to change the probability setting value (A1308). It then determines whether the probability setting is being changed (in a variable setting state) (A1309). Whether the probability setting is being changed can be determined by the probability setting value change flag (A1038). It then determines whether the probability setting is being confirmed (in a setting confirmation state) (A1310). If the probability setting value confirmation mode flag described below is set, it can be determined that the probability setting is being confirmed.

When the game control device 100 is not changing the probability setting or checking the probability setting (result of A1310 is "N"), it executes a payout command transmission process (A1311) to output the command set in the transmission buffer by various processes to the payout control device 200. Furthermore, it executes a special game process (A1312) to perform processing related to the special game change display game, and then executes a regular game process (A1313) to perform processing related to the regular game change display game. When the game control device 100 is changing the probability setting (result of A1309 is "Y") or checking the probability setting (result of A1310 is "Y"), it does not need to execute the payout command transmission process (A1311), the special game process (A1312), or the regular game process (A1313), and proceeds to the processing of step A1314.

Next, the gaming control device 100 executes a segment LED editing process (A1314) that drives the segment LEDs provided in the gaming machine 10 to display the special chart variation game and various information related to the game so as to display the desired content.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process (A1315) that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. For example, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, if an abnormality is detected, a magnet fraud occurrence flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area. Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) that checks the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (A1316). For example, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, if an abnormality is detected, a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area.

Then, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process to set signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1317). Then, it executes a status display editing output process to edit and output the output data to the status display device 152 (A1318). In the status display editing output process, the ratio of the game device, the ball output rate, the number of balls discharged, etc. may be calculated as the output data to the status display device 152. In addition, in the status display editing output process, when the power is turned on (power is restored), the checksum of the status display work area is calculated, and if it does not match the checksum at the time of power off, the status display work area and the status display stack area may be cleared. Then, the timer interrupt process is terminated. Note that when the timer interrupt process returns, the interrupt prohibition state is restored and the register bank designation is restored automatically, but depending on the CPU used, the process of allowing the interrupt or returning the register bank designation to register bank 0 may be performed after the external information editing process.

[Output processing]
Next, the output process (A1304) in the timer interrupt process will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The game control device 100 first outputs (resets) off data to the port 135 (see FIG. 3) that outputs data for the segments of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1601). Next, it combines and outputs the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 that outputs data for the large prize opening solenoid 39b (A1602).

Then, the game control device 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1603). Furthermore, it acquires the output data of the LED's digit line corresponding to the digit counter value (A1604). It then combines the acquired data with the external information data (A1605) and outputs the combined data to the fourth output port 136 for digit output and external information output (A1606). After that, it loads the output data of the segment line from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the digit counter value (A1607) and outputs the loaded data to the third output port 135 for segment output (A1608).

Next, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1609), then synthesizes the synthesized data with the launch permission output data (A1610), and finally outputs the synthesized data to the fifth output port 137 for outputting external information and launch permission signals (A1611).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the off output data for the probability setting value display (A1612). The off output data is output data for the period when the probability setting value display is not performed (blank data for turning off the light). Then, it is determined whether the probability setting value display permission flag that permits the display of the probability setting value is set (A1613). The probability setting value display permission flag is set in the probability setting value change process described below.

When the probability setting value display permission flag is set (result of A1613 is "Y"), the game control device 100 loads the probability setting value display data from the probability setting value display data area (A1614) and outputs the loaded probability setting value display data to the probability setting value display output port (sixth output port 141) (A1615). When the probability setting value display permission flag is not set (result of A1613 is "N"), the game control device 100 does not load the probability setting value display data and outputs the off output data to the probability setting value display output port (sixth output port 141) (A1615). Therefore, when the probability setting value display permission flag is set, the probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143, and when the probability setting value display permission flag is not set, the probability setting value display device 143 is turned off (blank display).

Next, data to be output to test terminal output port 1 on relay board 70, which outputs a test signal to the test firing test device, is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to test terminal output port 1 on relay board 70 (A1616). After that, data to be output to test terminal output port 2 on relay board 70, which outputs a test signal to the test firing test device, is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to test terminal output port 2 on relay board 70 (A1617).

Next, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70, which outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, and outputs the synthesized data to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 (A1618). Furthermore, it loads and synthesizes data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70, which outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, and outputs the synthesized data to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 (A1619). Then, it loads and synthesizes data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70, which outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, and outputs the synthesized data to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 (A1620), and ends the output process.

Then, the game control device 100 loads the test signal output data for the probability setting value (A1621). Here, as the test signal output data for the probability setting value, the display data itself of the probability setting value display device 143 (7-segment display device), that is, the probability setting value display data in the probability setting value display data area, is output. Note that the test signal output data may be numerical data (1 to 6) representing the setting value, or may be output data in other forms. Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A1622). If the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1622 is "Y"), the loaded data and the setting key switch on information are combined (A1623), and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 6 (A1624). On the other hand, if the setting key switch 93 is off (result of A1622 is "N"), the test signal output data for the probability setting value is output as is to the test signal output port 6 (A1624).

[Winning port switch/status monitoring process]
8 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the winning port switch/state monitoring process. The winning port switch/state monitoring process is executed in step A1307 in the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the probability setting is being changed (in a variable setting state) (A2001). If the probability setting is not being changed (the result of A2001 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the probability setting is being confirmed (in a setting confirmation state) (A2002). If the probability setting is not being confirmed (the result of A2001 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes the monitoring process from step A2003 to A2010 as usual. On the other hand, if the probability setting is being changed (the result of A2001 is "Y") or if the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A2002 is "Y"), since the glass frame 15 may be open, it is possible that a game ball can be inserted by hand into one of the winning holes, and there is no point in performing the monitoring process, etc., so the game control device 100 does not execute the monitoring process from step A2003 to A2010 and proceeds to the process of step A2011.

When the probability setting is not being changed (result of A2001 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares a prize opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the two large prize opening switches 39a in the large prize opening (special variable prize opening device 39) (A2003). Then, even if the large prize opening is not open, it monitors whether there is any illegal winning at the large prize opening and executes an illegal/winning monitoring process to detect normal winning (A2004).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning port monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other of the two large winning port switches 39a in the large winning port (special variable winning device 39) (A2005). Then, it executes a fraudulent and winning monitoring process to monitor for fraudulent winning and detect normal winning (A2006).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning port monitoring table corresponding to the start port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37 (A2007). Then, it executes a fraud & winning monitoring process to monitor for fraudulent winning and detect normal winning (A2008). Next, it prepares a winning port monitoring table for winning port switches that do not require fraud monitoring (A2009). The winning port switches that do not require fraud monitoring are the start port 1 switch 36a and the winning port switch (SW) 35a of the general winning port 35.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a win counter update process that updates the number of wins (A2010). Then, it updates a status scan counter that specifies, in order, which of the multiple switches and signals whose states are to be monitored should be the target of this monitoring (A2011). The status scan counter is updated within the range of 0 to 3.

Then, the gaming control device 100 prepares a gaming machine status monitoring table 1 for setting the status to be monitored according to the value of the status scan counter (A2012). Then, it executes a gaming machine status check process to determine the status, such as whether an error has occurred (A2013). The gaming machine status check process will be described in detail later.

By referencing the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, monitoring of the status based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to an occurrence such as a switch connector coming loose (switch abnormality 1 error) is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status based on the chute ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 (chute ball out error) is set. If the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status based on the overflow switch signal (overflow error) is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 3, monitoring of the status based on the payout abnormality status signal (payout abnormality error) is set.

Next, the gaming control device 100 prepares a gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the status to be monitored according to the value of the status scan counter (A2014). Then, it executes a gaming machine status check process to determine the status, such as whether an error has occurred (A2015).

By referencing the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 2, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, monitoring of the status based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch (glass frame open error) is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch (main frame open error, front frame open error) is set. Also, if the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status based on the frame radio wave illegal signal (frame radio wave illegal) is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 3, monitoring of the status based on the touch switch signal is set.

The game control device 100 then determines whether the value of the status scan counter is 0 (A2016). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (the result of A2016 is "N"), the game control device 100 ends the winning port switch/status monitoring process. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 that is referenced next.

In addition, if the value of the error scan counter is 0 (the result of A2016 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 prepares the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 (A2017) and executes a gaming machine status check process to determine the status, such as whether an error has occurred (A2018).

By referencing the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, monitoring of the status (switch abnormality 2 error) based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to an occurrence such as a switch connector coming loose is set. Note that the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 does not define the cases when the status scan counter is 1 to 3.

Then, the game control device 100 executes a payout busy signal check process (A2019) that sets the busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on the payout busy signal that indicates whether the payout control device 200 is able to start payout control, and ends the winning slot switch/status monitoring process.

The processing from steps A2017 to A2019 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter, which is updated at each timer interrupt, is 0, so it is executed once every four timer interrupts. In other words, if the timer interrupt occurs every 4 ms, the processing from A2017 to A2019 is executed every 16 ms.

In addition, in the fraud & winning monitoring process (A2008), the number of winnings and the number of balls acquired by each device (total number of winning balls) for the large winning port (special variable winning device 39) and the normal variable winning device 37 may be counted and stored, and the information on the number of winnings and the number of balls acquired by each device may be set as a performance command. In the winning number counter update process (A2010), the number of winnings and the number of balls acquired by each device (total number of winning balls) for the start winning port 36 and the general winning port 35 may be counted and stored, and the information on the number of winnings and the number of balls acquired by each device may be set as a performance command. In addition, in the winning port switch/status monitoring process (Figure 8), the number of out balls (number of discharged balls) may be counted and stored by the out ball detection switch, and the information on the number of out balls may be set as a performance command (number of out balls command). The ball output rate is the ratio (proportion) of the total number of winning balls (total number of balls acquired by each device) to the number of discharged balls. The ratio of the reels is, for example, the percentage (%) of the total number of winning balls that are won by winning the large prize slot (number of balls won by each reels) (= so-called consecutive reels ratio). In the status display editing output process (A1318), the reels ratio, payout rate, number of balls discharged, etc. may be calculated as output data to the status display device 152.

[Gaming machine status check process]
9 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the gaming machine state check process. The gaming machine state check process is executed in steps A2013, A2015 and A2018 in the winning port switch/state monitoring process shown in FIG.

First, the game control device 100 obtains a status monitoring table corresponding to the status scan counter (A2201). The status scan counter is set to a value ranging from 0 to 3 corresponding to the game status. The relationship between the status monitoring table and the status scan counter is as explained in the prize slot switch/status monitoring process shown in Figure 8.

Next, the game control device 100 judges whether the signal to be checked is on or not (A2202). If the signal to be checked is not on (the result of A2202 is "N"), that is, if the signal to be checked is off, it prepares a status off flag as a status flag (A2203), and obtains and prepares a status off command for the target (A2204). It then obtains a status off monitoring timer comparison value for the target (A2205). The status off flag indicates a normal state for error-related signals, and indicates a untouched state for touch switch signals.

On the other hand, if the signal being checked is on (result of A2202 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares a status on flag as a status flag (A2206), and acquires and prepares the target status on command (A2207). Furthermore, it acquires the target status on monitoring timer comparison value (A2208). The status on flag indicates an abnormal or illegal state for an error-related signal, and indicates a touched state for a touch switch signal.

When the processing of step A2205 or step A2208 is completed, the game control device 100 judges whether the value of the target signal control area matches the acquired signal state (A2209). If they match (the result of A2209 is "Y"), the game control device 100 proceeds to the processing of step A2212. If they do not match (the result of A2209 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the acquired signal state in the target signal control area (A2210) and clears the target state monitoring timer (A2211).

The gaming control device 100 then updates the target status monitoring timer by +1 (A2212). It then determines whether the updated status monitoring timer value is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (A2213). If the updated status monitoring timer value is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2213 is "N"), the gaming machine status check process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the updated status monitoring timer value is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (result of A2213 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 updates the status monitoring timer by -1 and keeps it at the timer comparison value -1 (A2214). Furthermore, it determines whether the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A2215). If they match (result of A2215 is "Y"), the gaming machine status check process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the prepared status flag does not match the value of the target status flag area (the result of A2215 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the prepared status flag in the target status flag area (A2216). Finally, it executes a presentation command setting process to set a presentation command (A2217), and ends the game machine status check process. The presentation command here is either a status off command or a status on command. If the status on command is an error-related command, it causes the presentation control device 300 to start notifying the error. In the presentation command setting process, the presentation command is written to the serial transmission buffer, and the presentation command is sent to the presentation control device 300.

[Probability setting value change process]
Next, the details of the probability setting value change process (A1308) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting value change process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the probability setting value is being changed (in a variable setting state) (A2401). If the probability setting value is not being changed (the result of A2401 is "N"), it executes a probability setting value confirmation process to confirm the probability setting value (A2402).

When the probability setting value is being changed (result of A2401 is "Y"), if the probability setting value off timer is not 0, it updates it by -1 (A2403) and determines whether the probability setting value off timer is 0 or not (A2404). When the probability setting value off timer is 0 (result of A2404 is "Y"), it sets the probability setting value display permission flag (A2405) and proceeds to processing of step A2406. When the probability setting value off timer is not 0 (result of A2404 is "N"), it does nothing and proceeds to processing of step A2406.

Then, in step A2406, the game control device 100 determines whether the probability setting value has been changed (A2406). If the probability setting value changed flag described below is set, the probability setting value has been changed. If the probability setting value has been changed (result of A2406 is "Y"), the game control device 100 executes the process of completing the setting change from step A2416 to A2421.

If the probability setting value has not been changed (result of A2406 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether there is an input from the setting value change switch 102 (A2407). If there is no input from the setting value change switch 102 (result of A2407 is "N"), the game control device 100 proceeds to processing of step A2411.

When there is an input from the setting value change switch 102 (result of A2407 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the value of the working probability setting value area by +1 within the range of 0 to 5 (A2408). In this way, each time the setting value change switch 102 is operated, the value of the working probability setting value area increases by 1. Note that if the setting value change switch 102 is operated after the value of the working probability setting value area becomes 5, the value of the working probability setting value area may be set back to 0. The values 0 to 5 in the working probability setting value area correspond to the six probability setting values 1 to 6. Note that the probability setting values are not limited to six levels.

Then, the game control device 100 saves the probability setting value display data corresponding to the working probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area (A2409). Next, it saves an initial value (e.g., 100 ms) in the probability setting value off timer area (A2410). This initial value corresponds to the off period (blank period) during which the probability setting value display device 143 is off (blank display).

In this way, when the probability setting value off timer is 0, by setting the probability setting value display permission flag, the probability setting value display data is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 as the probability setting value (working probability setting value) being changed in setting, and when the probability setting value off timer is not 0, the probability setting value display device 143 is turned off. Since the probability setting value off timer turns off the setting value change switch 102 (setting value change button) for a specified off period after it is operated, even when there is only one setting (when the setting value is only 1), it can be visually confirmed on the probability setting value display device 143 that the setting value change switch 102 has been operated.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a touch switch signal is input from the touch switch provided on the operating handle 24 (A2411). If there is no touch switch signal input (the result of A2411 is "N"), the probability setting value change process ends. If there is a touch switch signal input (the result of A2411 is "Y"), the value in the working probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the probability setting value area (A2412). The touch switch signal becomes a confirmation signal for confirming the setting value. Then, a value 0 to 5 corresponding to the confirmed probability setting value is stored in the probability setting value area.

It is also possible to configure the probability setting value to be confirmed and stored in the probability setting value area when the setting key switch 93 is turned off or a predetermined time has passed since the setting variable state was entered. Also, an operable confirmation button switch (operation means, operation unit) may be newly provided to the game control device 100, and the signal from this confirmation button switch may be used as a confirmation signal for confirming the setting value. In other words, instead of operating the touch switch, the operation of the newly provided confirmation button switch may be used as the confirmation operation.

The game control device 100 then saves the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area (A2413). This causes the confirmed probability setting value to be displayed on the probability setting value display device 143. It then sets a probability setting value changed flag indicating that the probability setting value has been changed (A2414), sends a probability setting value change command indicating that the probability setting value has been changed to the performance control device 300 (performance control board) (A2415), and terminates the probability setting value change process.

In the process of ending the setting change from step A2416 to A2421, the game control device 100 first determines whether the setting key switch 93 is off (A2416). If the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A2416 is "N"), the probability setting value change process is ended. If the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A2416 is "Y"), the RAM clear start address 3 is set (A2417), and the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A2418). The RAM area to be cleared here is the clear area #3 in FIG. 5C. The clear area #3 consists of the control information area (the area from the power outage inspection area 1 to the checksum area) and the game control stack area, and the probability setting value area and the random number area are excluded. Note that the clear area #3 is the clear area #2 excluding the random number area, and the random number updated during the setting change is not wasted. By clearing the RAM area to be cleared to 0, the information and flags used to change the settings, such as the information in the working probability setting area, the probability setting value changing flag, and the probability setting value changed flag, are cleared.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A2419). Since the setting change is ending, the initial value of the security signal control timer (described below) for outputting a security signal is saved so that the fact that the front frame 12 (main body frame) has been opened can be output to an external device (such as a hall computer). After that, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (A2420). As a result, the probability setting value at the time the setting change is ending is displayed and maintained on the probability setting value display device 143.

Next, the game control device 100 sends a probability setting change end command to the performance control device 300 (performance control board) indicating that the probability setting change has ended (A2421), returns to the main processing (FIG. 5B), and proceeds to processing in step A1049. The commands sent here are the aforementioned model designation command, number of reserved decorative special figures 1 command, number of reserved decorative special figures 2 command, probability information command, setting value information command (probability setting value information command), and probability setting change end command (RAM initialization command may be used). Depending on the model, a performance mode information command, number of performances information command, and high probability number of times information command are sent. The performance control device 300 that has received the probability setting change end command displays a customer waiting demo on the display device 41, for example, and notifies the user of RAM initialization (RAM clear) for 30 seconds using the LEDs and speakers of the board decoration device 46, etc.

[Probability setting value confirmation process]
Next, the details of the probability setting value confirmation process (A2402) in the probability setting value change process described above will be described. FIG 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting value confirmation process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a probability setting value confirmation mode (a state in which the setting value can be confirmed), which is a mode in which the probability setting value can be confirmed (A2501). If the probability setting value confirmation mode flag described below is set, it can be determined that it is in the probability setting value confirmation mode. If it is in the probability setting value confirmation mode (the result of A2501 is "Y"), it executes the processing from step A2509 onwards.

If the game control device 100 is not in the probability setting value confirmation mode (the result of A2501 is "N"), it clears the probability setting value display permission flag (A2502). Then, it determines whether or not a game is being played (A2503). For example, if a variable display game is being played or if a jackpot state is being played, it can be determined that a game is being played. If a game is being played (the result of A2503 is "Y"), it ends the probability setting value confirmation process to make it impossible to confirm the probability setting value. If a game is not being played (the result of A2503 is "N"), it determines whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A2504). If the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A2504 is "N"), it ends the probability setting value confirmation process.

When the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A2504 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value confirmation mode in progress flag (A2505). As a result, when the probability setting value is not being changed (in a variable setting state) (result of A2401 is "N"), if the setting key switch 93 is on, the game control device 100 enters a probability setting value confirmation mode (setting value confirmation possible state) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed. Next, the probability setting value display permission flag is set (A2506). As a result, the probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 based on the probability setting value display data loaded from the probability setting value display data area by the output process (Figure 7).

Next, the game control device 100 saves an initial value in the security signal control timer area so that it can output a security signal (A2507). When the set value is confirmed, a security signal is output, and it becomes possible to output to an external device (such as a hall computer) information such as that the front frame 12 has been opened. A command for checking the probability setting value is sent to the performance control device 300 (performance control board) (A2508), and the probability setting value confirmation process ends.

When the game control device 100 is in the probability setting value confirmation mode (the result of A2501 is "Y"), it determines whether the setting key switch 93 is on or not (A2509). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A2509 is "Y"), the probability setting value confirmation mode continues and the probability setting value confirmation probability setting value confirmation process is terminated.

When the setting key switch 93 is off (result of A2509 is "N"), the game control device 100 clears the probability setting value confirmation mode in progress flag (A2510). Therefore, by turning off the setting key switch 93, the probability setting value confirmation mode ends. Then, to prevent the probability setting value from being displayed on the probability setting value display device 143, the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (A2511). Next, a probability setting value confirmation end command indicating that the probability setting value confirmation has ended is sent to the performance control device 300 (performance control board) (A2512).

In the above, the setting value change switch 102 is configured to be usable as a RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch), but a RAM initialization switch may be provided separately from the setting value change switch 102. In this case, when the power is turned on (power restored), if the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch are on, the setting is variable (setting change state), if the setting key switch 93 is on and the RAM initialization switch is off, the setting is confirmed (setting value can be confirmed), if the setting key switch 93 is off and the RAM initialization switch is on, RAM initialization (RAM clear) is possible, and if the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch are off, the normal power-on (power restored) state is reached. Furthermore, the setting value (setting) may be confirmed when the setting key switch 93 is turned from on to off.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special game processing (A1312) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. Fig. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special game processing. In the special game processing, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the whole processing related to the special game variable display game is controlled, and the display of the special game is set.

The game control device 100 first executes a start port switch monitoring process (A2601) that monitors the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 that constitutes the start winning port 36 and the second start winning port, various random numbers (such as a jackpot random number) are extracted, and a game result advance determination is performed to determine the game result based on the winning in advance at a stage before the start of the special chart variable display game based on the winning. The details of the start port switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special prize opening switch monitoring process (A2602). In the special prize opening switch monitoring process, the detection of game balls by the count switch 39a provided in the special variable prize device 39 is monitored. The special prize opening switch monitoring process will be described in detail later.

Next, if the special game processing timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates it by -1 (subtracts 1) (A2603). By updating the special game processing timer by -1, the timer will be timed for the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt process. The minimum value of the special game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether the special game processing timer is 0 (A2604). If the special game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2619.

When the special game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is "Y"), i.e., when the timer is up or has already been up, the game control device 100 sets in a register a special game sequence branch table to be referenced for branching to the process corresponding to the special game processing number (A2605). Furthermore, the game control device 100 obtains the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special game processing number using the special game sequence branch table (A2606). Next, a subroutine call is made using the special game processing number to execute the game branch process according to the special game processing number (A2607).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A2607, the game control device 100 monitors the start of the special chart change display game and executes the special chart normal processing (A2608) to set the start of the special chart change display game, set the performance, and set information required for processing during the special chart change. Details of the special chart normal processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 17.

When the game processing number is "1" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a special chart change process (A2609) that sets the stop display time of the special chart and sets information required to perform processing during the special chart display. Details of the special chart change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28.

In step A2607, if the game processing number is "2", the game control device 100 executes a special chart display process (A2610) that sets a fanfare command according to the type of jackpot, sets a fanfare time according to the large prize opening pattern of each jackpot, and sets information required for fanfare/interval processing, if the result of the special chart display game is a jackpot. For example, in the special chart display process, if the result of the special chart display game is a jackpot, necessary information such as a jackpot fanfare command (presentation command), jackpot fanfare time, and probability information command (low probability) are set, and the processing number "3" related to the fanfare/interval processing is set and saved in the special chart game processing number area. If the result of the special chart display game is a small jackpot, necessary information such as a small jackpot fanfare command (presentation command) and a small jackpot fanfare time are set, and the processing number "7" related to the small jackpot fanfare processing is set and saved in the special chart game processing number area. If the result of the special chart change display game is not a big win or a small win, the processing number for the special chart normal processing is set to "0" and saved in the special chart game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "3" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes fanfare/interval processing to set the opening time of the large prize opening, update the number of times it is opened, and set information necessary for performing processing while the large prize opening is open (A2611). For example, in the fanfare/interval processing, necessary information such as the round command (presentation command) corresponding to the round of the round game being executed and the opening time of the large prize opening is set, and the processing number "4" for the processing while the large prize opening is set and saved in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "4" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a process during the opening of the large prize opening, which sets an interval command if the large prize round is not the final round, and an ending command if the large prize round is the final round, and sets information necessary for the large prize opening remaining ball processing (A2612). For example, in the process during the opening of the large prize opening, necessary information such as an interval command and an ending command as performance commands is set, and the processing number "5" for the large prize opening remaining ball processing is set and saved in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "5" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a large prize opening remaining ball process (A2613) that sets the time for the remaining balls in the large prize opening to be discharged if the large prize round is the final round, and sets the information required for the large prize end process. For example, in the large prize opening remaining ball process, if it is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the special game processing timer area, and the processing number "3" related to the fanfare/interval processing is set and saved in the special game processing number area. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the special game processing timer area, and the processing number "6" related to the large prize end process is set and saved in the special game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "6" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a jackpot end process (A2614) that sets information necessary for executing the special chart normal processing. For example, in the jackpot end process, necessary information such as the probability state after the jackpot state ends and the normal power support state (time-saving state) after the jackpot state ends is set, and these probability states and time-saving states are set as probability information commands (presentation commands), and the processing number "0" related to the special chart normal processing is set and saved in the special chart game processing number area. The probability information command includes information such as the probability state after the jackpot state ends (high probability/low probability) and the number of continued games (time-saving fluctuation number, power support number) in the normal power support state (time-saving state) after the jackpot state ends.

When the game processing number is "7" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes small win fanfare processing (A2615), which sets the opening time of the large prize opening, updates the number of times it is opened, and sets information necessary for small win processing. For example, in the small win fanfare processing, necessary information such as the small win opening time of the large prize opening is set, and the processing number "8" for small win processing is set and saved in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "8" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a small win mid-stage process that sets information necessary for small win remaining ball processing (A2616). For example, in the small win mid-stage process, necessary information such as the small win remaining ball processing time is set, and the processing number "9" for the large prize remaining ball processing is set and saved in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "9" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes small win remaining ball processing, which sets information necessary for small win end processing (A2617). For example, in the small win remaining ball processing, necessary information such as the small win ending time is set, and the processing number "10" for the special chart small win end processing is set and saved in the special chart 1 game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "10" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a small win end process (A2618) that sets the information necessary to execute the special chart normal processing.

When the processing based on the special game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares a special game 1 change control table for controlling the change of the special game 1 display 51 (A2619), and then executes a pattern change control process related to the special game 1 display 51 (A2620). Then, after preparing a special game 2 change control table for controlling the change of the special game 2 display 52 (A2621), it executes a pattern change control process related to the special game 2 display 52 (A2622). Details of the pattern change control process will be described later in FIG. 29.

[Start switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special game process will be described. FIG 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process.

The gaming control device 100 first prepares a winning monitoring table for the start winning slot 36 (starting slot 1) (A2701), executes a hard random number acquisition process (A2702), and determines whether or not there has been a winning at the start winning slot 36 (A2703). If there has been no winning at the start winning slot 36 (the result of A2703 is "N"), it executes the process from step A2709 onwards. On the other hand, if there has been a winning at the start winning slot 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it determines whether or not the special chart time reduction is in progress (normal power support state) (A2704).

When the game control device 100 determines that the special time-saving mode is not in effect (normal power support mode is in effect) (the result of A2704 is "N"), it executes the processing from step A2707 onwards. On the other hand, when the special time-saving mode is in effect (normal power support mode is in effect) (the result of A2704 is "Y"), it prepares a right-hit instruction notification command as a presentation command (A2705) and executes the presentation command setting process (A2706).

In other words, if the game is in the normal power support state (time-saving state), regardless of the probability state (high probability state/low probability state) of the variable display game, a right-hit instruction notification command is prepared and the performance command setting process is executed. In this embodiment, the ball can only be won by hitting from the left into the start winning hole 36, and can only be won by hitting from the right into the normal variable winning device 37. In addition, the game ball will not pass through the normal start gate 34 unless it is hit from the right. Therefore, in the normal power support state (time-saving state), hitting from the right is more advantageous than hitting from the left, but if the ball is won into the start winning hole 36 during the normal power support state (i.e., if it is hit from the left during the normal power support state), a right-hit instruction notification command is sent to the performance control device 300, and the performance control device 300 executes a notification (warning) instructing the player to hit from the right using the display device 41, etc.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting hold information by the start winning port 36 (start winning port 1) (A2707), and then executes the special chart start winning port switch common processing (A2708). Then, it prepares a winning monitoring table for the second start winning port (normal variable winning device 37) (A2709), executes a hard random number acquisition processing (A2710), and determines whether or not there has been a winning at the second start winning port (A2711). If there has been no winning at the second start winning port (the result of A2711 is "N"), it ends the start port switch monitoring processing.

On the other hand, if there is a winning entry into the second start winning slot (result of A2711 is "Y"), the game control device 100 judges whether the normal electric device (normal variable winning device 37) is in operation or not, that is, whether the normal variable winning device 37 is in operation and in an open state allowing the winning of a game ball (A2712). If the normal electric device is in operation (result of A2712 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2714.

On the other hand, if the normal electric device is not in operation (the result of A2712 is "N"), the game control device 100 judges whether normal power fraud is occurring (A2713). It judges that normal power fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent wins in the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraud occurrence judgment number (for example, 5). The normal variable winning device 37 does not allow game balls to win when it is closed, and game balls can only win when it is open. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, some kind of abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there are game balls that win in such a closed state, the number of such wins is counted as the number of fraudulent wins. Then, it is judged that fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent wins counted in this way is equal to or greater than a predetermined fraud occurrence judgment number (upper limit value).

If normal power fraud is not occurring (the result of A2713 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting hold information by the second start winning port (normal variable winning device 37) (A2714), then executes special chart start port switch common processing (A2715), and ends the start port switch monitoring processing. Also, if it is determined in A2713 that normal power fraud is occurring (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the start port switch monitoring processing is also ended. In other words, no further second start memories are generated.

[Special diagram start switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special drawing start port switch common processing (A2708, A2715) in the start port switch monitoring processing will be described. Figure 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special drawing start port switch common processing. The special drawing start port switch common processing is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input of the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

The game control device 100 first loads the start port signal output count, which is the number of times that information on the number of winnings on the start port switch to be monitored, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, is output to an external management device of the game machine 10 (A2901), updates the loaded value by +1 (A2902), and determines whether the output count will overflow (A2903). If the output count does not overflow (the result of A2903 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (A2904), and the process proceeds to step A2905. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (the result of A2903 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2905. In this embodiment, values from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output count area. If the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by updating by +1, and it is determined that the output count will overflow.

Next, the game control device 100 judges whether the number of reserved special charts (start memory number) to be updated corresponding to the start port switch being monitored, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, is less than the upper limit (A2905). If the number of reserved special charts to be updated is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special chart start port switch common processing is terminated. Also, if the number of reserved special charts to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of reserved special charts to be updated (the number of reserved special charts 1 or the number of reserved special charts 2) is updated by +1 (A2906), and the target start port winning flag is saved (A2907).

The game control device 100 then calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the start port switch and reserved number of special symbols to be monitored (A2908), and saves the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (A2909). Next, it extracts and prepares the jackpot pattern random number of the start port switch to be monitored (A2910), and saves it in the jackpot pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning entry has been made into the start winning entry 36 (starting entry 1) (A2912). If the winning entry has not been made into the start winning entry 36 (the result of A2912 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2915. On the other hand, if the winning entry has been made into the start winning entry 36 (the result of A2912 is "Y"), a small winning pattern random number is extracted and prepared (A2913) and saved in the small winning pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A2914).

The game control device 100 then saves the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A2915), and executes the special chart reservation information determination process (A2916). Then, it prepares a decorative special chart reservation number command corresponding to the start port switch and special chart reservation number to be monitored as a performance command (A2917), executes the performance command setting process (A2918), and ends the special chart start port switch common process.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) serves as a start memory means for extracting a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the start winning area of the start winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, and storing the predetermined number as a start memory that serves as the right to execute the variable display game, with an upper limit of the predetermined number. The start memory means (game control device 100) also stores various random number values extracted based on the winning of game balls into the first start winning port (start winning port 36) as a first start memory with an upper limit of the predetermined number, and stores various random number values extracted based on the winning of game balls into the second start winning port (normal variable winning device 37) as a second start memory with an upper limit of the predetermined number.

[Special chart reservation information determination process]
Next, the details of the special chart reserved information judgment process (A2916) in the start port switch common process will be described. Fig. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart reserved information judgment process. The special chart reserved information judgment process is a pre-reading (pre-judgment) process that judges the result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special chart variable display game based on the corresponding start memory.

First, the game control device 100 checks the start winning port winning flag saved in step A2907 to determine whether or not the winning port 36 (start winning port 1) has been won (A3001). If the winning port 36 has not been won (the result of A3001 is "N"), the game control device 100 moves on to the processing of step A3004. On the other hand, if the winning port 36 has been won (the result of A3001 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special chart time reduction is in progress (normal power support state) (A3002).

If the game control device 100 is in the special chart time-saving mode (normal power support mode) (the result of A3002 is "Y"), it ends the special chart reserved information determination process. On the other hand, if the special chart time-saving mode is not in effect (the result of A3002 is "N"), it determines whether or not a big win or a small win is in effect (A3003). If a big win or a small win is in effect (the result of A3003 is "Y"), it ends the special chart reserved information determination process.

On the other hand, if the game control device 100 is not in a jackpot or a small jackpot (the result of A3003 is "N"), it executes a jackpot determination process (A3004) to determine whether or not a jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. Then, if the determination result is a jackpot (the result of A3005 is "Y"), it sets a jackpot pattern random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch (A3006), obtains stop pattern information corresponding to the jackpot pattern random number prepared in step A2910 (A3007), and proceeds to the processing of step A3014.

If the result of the determination is not a jackpot (the result of A3005 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning symbol entered the first start port (start winning port 36) (A3008). If the winning symbol entered the start winning port 36 is not entered (the result of A3008 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets the stopping symbol information to a losing symbol (A3013) and proceeds to the processing of step A3014.

If the winning entry is in the start winning slot 36 (result of A3008 is "Y"), the game control device 100 executes a small win determination process (A3009) to determine whether or not the big win random number value matches the small win determination value. If the determination result is not a small win (result of A3010 is "N"), it sets the stop pattern information of the miss (A3013) and proceeds to the processing of step A3014. On the other hand, if the determination result is a small win (result of A3010 is "Y"), it sets a small win pattern random number check table (A3011), obtains the stop pattern information corresponding to the small win pattern random number prepared in step A143 (A3012), and proceeds to the processing of step A3014.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a pre-reading stop pattern command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop pattern information as a presentation command (A3014), and executes a presentation command setting process (A3015). Next, it executes a special chart information setting process to set special chart information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern (A3016), and executes a variation pattern setting process to set the variation mode of the special chart variation display game (A3017).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a predictive fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the first half fluctuation number indicating the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation number indicating the second half fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation mode of the special chart fluctuation display game as a presentation command (A3018), performs a presentation command setting process (A3019), and ends the special chart pending information determination process. Note that the special chart information setting process in step A3016 and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step A3017 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special chart fluctuation display game in the special chart normal processing. In the presentation command setting process, the presentation command is written to the serial transmission buffer, and the presentation command is transmitted to the presentation control device 300.

By the above processing, a look-ahead pattern command including the result of the special chart change display game based on the start memory to be looked-ahead, and a look-ahead change pattern command including information on the change pattern in the special chart change display game based on that start memory are prepared and sent to the performance control device 300. This makes it possible to inform the performance control device 300 of the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information corresponding to the start memory (whether it is a jackpot or not, and the type of change pattern) before the start timing of the special chart change display game based on the corresponding start memory, and in particular, by changing the decorative special chart start memory display displayed on the display device 41, it becomes possible to notify the player of the result-related information before the start timing of the special chart change display game.

In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a pre-determination means for determining the random number stored as a start memory in the start memory means (game control device 100) before the variable display game based on the start memory is executed (for example, determining whether or not a special result will result). Note that the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory may be determined in advance not only at the time of the start winning that generated the start memory, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is executed.

[Big prize slot switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the special prize opening switch monitoring process (A2602) in the special game process will be described. FIG 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special prize opening switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the value of the special game processing number is "4", i.e., whether the large prize opening is being processed (A3101). If the large prize opening is being processed (result of A3101 is "Y"), the game control device 100 proceeds to step A3105. If the large prize opening is not being processed (result of A3101 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the special game processing number is "5", i.e., whether the remaining balls in the large prize opening are being processed (A3102).

If the game control device 100 is processing the remaining balls in the large prize slot (the result of A3102 is "Y"), it proceeds to step A3105. Also, if the game control device 100 is not processing the remaining balls in the large prize slot (the result of A3105 is "N"), it determines whether the value of the special game processing number is "8", i.e., whether a small prize is being processed (A3103). If the game control device 100 is processing a small prize (the result of A3104 is "Y"), it proceeds to step A3105. Also, if the game control device 100 is not processing a small prize (the result of A3103 is "N"), it determines whether the value of the special game processing number is "9", i.e., whether a small prize is being processed (A3104). The special game processing number does not proceed to the next step until the special game processing timer reaches 0, so the progress of the game can be checked by the special game processing number in this way.

If the game control device 100 is not processing the remaining small win balls (the result of A3104 is "N"), it ends the large win port switch monitoring process. If it is processing the remaining small win balls (the result of A3104 is "Y"), it proceeds to step A3105. It then sets the winning counter to 0 (A3105) and determines whether there is an input to the large win port switch 1 (one of the large win port switches 39a) (A3106).

When there is no input to the large prize opening switch 1 (result of A3106 is "N"), the game control device 100 judges whether there is an input to the large prize opening switch 2 (the other large prize opening switch 39a) (A3110). When there is an input to the large prize opening switch 1 (result of A3106 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares a large prize opening count command as a presentation command (A3107) and executes the presentation command setting process (A3108). Then, it updates the prize counter by +1 (A3109) and judges whether there is an input to the large prize opening switch 2 (the other large prize opening switch 39a) (A3110).

When there is no input to the large prize opening switch 2 (result of A3110 is "N"), the game control device 100 judges whether the value of the prize counter is 0 or not (A3114). When there is an input to the large prize opening switch 2 (result of A3110 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares a large prize opening count command as a presentation command (A3111) and executes the presentation command setting process (A3112). Then, the game control device 100 increments the prize counter by +1 (A3113) and judges whether the value of the prize counter is 0 or not (A3114).

If the value of the winning counter is 0 (the result of A3114 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the large prize opening switch monitoring process. If the value of the winning counter is not 0 (the result of A3114 is "N"), it determines whether or not the remaining balls in the large prize opening are being processed (A3115). If the remaining balls in the large prize opening are being processed (the result of A3115 is "Y"), it ends the large prize opening switch monitoring process, and if the remaining balls in the large prize opening are not being processed (the result of A3115 is "N"), it determines whether or not the remaining balls in the small prize opening are being processed (A3116).

If the game control device 100 is currently processing the remaining small win balls (the result of A3116 is "Y"), it ends the large win port switch monitoring process, and if it is not currently processing the remaining small win balls (the result of A3116 is "N"), it adds the value of the winning counter (1 or 2) to the large win port count (A3117) and determines whether the large win port count has reached or exceeded the upper limit (the number of game balls that can win in one round, e.g. "9") (A3118).

If the large prize opening count number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (result of A3118 is "N"), the game control device 100 ends the large prize opening switch monitoring process. Also, if the large prize opening count number is equal to or greater than the upper limit (result of A3118 is "Y"), the game control device 100 keeps the large prize opening count number at the upper limit (A3119), clears the special game processing timer area to 0 (A3120), and determines whether a small win is being processed (A3121).

If the game control device 100 is not processing a small win (the result of A3121 is "N"), it ends the large prize opening switch monitoring process. If the game control device 100 is processing a small win (the result of A3121 is "Y"), it saves the value of the end of the small win opening operation in the large prize opening control pointer area (A3122) and ends the large prize opening switch monitoring process. This closes the large prize opening and ends one round.

[Special chart normal processing]
Next, the details of the special chart normal processing (A2608) in the special chart game processing will be described. FIG 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart normal processing.

The game control device 100 first judges whether the number of reserved special figures 2 (second start memory number) is 0 (A3201). If the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0 (the result of A3201 is "Y"), it judges whether the number of reserved special figures 1 (first start memory number) is 0 (A3205). Then, if the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (the result of A3205 is "Y"), it judges whether the customer waiting demo has started (A3209), and if the customer waiting demo has not started (the result of A3209 is "N"), it sets a customer waiting demo in progress flag in the customer waiting demo flag area to indicate that the customer waiting demo state (the state in which the customer waiting demo is in progress) (A3210).

The game control device 100 then prepares a customer waiting demo command as a presentation command (A3211), performs presentation command setting processing (A3212), and sets the processing number to "0" for special chart normal processing (A3213). On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo has already started in step A3209 (the result of A3209 is "Y"), the processing number is also set to "0" for special chart normal processing (A3213). After that, the processing number is saved in the special chart game processing number area (A3214), and the variable pattern discrimination flag area is cleared (A3215). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the large prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3216), and the special chart normal processing ends.

In this way, the customer waiting demo command is sent when the special chart 1 reserved number (first start memory number) and the special chart 2 reserved number (second start memory number) are 0, and the performance control device 300 that receives the customer waiting demo command sets the display device 41, etc. to display a customer waiting demo. Note that the game control device 100 can also be configured to send the customer waiting demo command only when the touch switch signal from the touch switch of the operation handle 24 becomes an off signal.

In addition, if the special chart 2 reserved number is not 0 (the result of A3201 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes the special chart 2 change start process (A3202), prepares a decorative special chart reserved number command (decorative special chart 2 reserved number command) corresponding to the special chart 2 reserved number as a presentation command (A3203), executes the presentation command setting process (A3204), and ends the special chart normal processing.

In addition, if the number of reserved special charts 1 is not 0 (the result of A3205 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes a special chart 1 change start process (A3206), prepares a decorative special chart reserved number command (decorative special chart 1 reserved number command) corresponding to the reserved number of special charts 1 as a presentation command (A3207), executes a presentation command setting process (A3208), and ends the normal special chart processing.

In this way, by checking the number of reserved special charts 2 before checking the number of reserved special charts 1, if the number of reserved special charts 2 is not 0, the special chart 2 variation start process (A3202) is executed. In other words, the special chart 2 variation display game is executed in priority to the special chart 1 variation display game. In other words, when the second start memory means (game control device 100) has a second start memory, the game control device 100 serves as a priority control means for executing the variation display game based on the second start memory in priority over the variation display game based on the first start memory.

[Special Chart 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special chart 1 variation start process (A3206) in the special chart normal process will be described. Figure 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart 1 variation start process. The special chart 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special chart 1 variation display game.

The game control device 100 saves the special chart 1 change flag, which indicates the type of special chart change display game to be executed (special chart 1 in this case), in the change pattern discrimination flag area (A3401). Next, it executes a jackpot flag 1 setting process, which sets miss information or jackpot information to the jackpot flag 1 to determine whether the special chart 1 change display game is a jackpot or not (A3402). The jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described in detail later.

Next, the gaming control device 100 executes a special symbol 1 stop pattern setting process related to setting the special symbol 1 stop pattern (pattern information) (A3403). The details of the special symbol 1 stop pattern setting process will be described later. Furthermore, the gaming control device 100 executes a special symbol information setting process to set the special symbol information, which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern (A3404).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special chart 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information is set for referencing various information related to the setting of the variation pattern of the special chart 1 variation display game (A3405). After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process that sets the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the special chart 1 variation display game (A3406).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a change start information setting process to set the change start information of the special chart 1 change display game (A3407), and ends the special chart 1 change start process. In the change start information setting process, a change time value corresponding to the change pattern (change pattern number) is obtained and saved in the special chart game processing timer area. Then, for the special chart 1 change display game, a change command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the change pattern number is prepared as a presentation command, and a presentation command setting process is performed.

Then, the game control device 100 sets the processing number to "1" relating to the processing during the special chart change (A3408), and saves the processing number in the special chart game processing number area (A3409).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3410) and saves a signal related to the start of the fluctuation of the special chart 1 in the test signal output data area (A3411). After that, it saves a fluctuating flag in the special chart 1 fluctuation control flag area (A3412), and sets the initial value (e.g., 100 ms) of the blinking control timer (timer for the blinking period of the special chart 1 display 51) in the special chart 1 blinking control timer area (A3413). Next, it saves an initial value (e.g., 0) in the special chart 1 variable pattern number area (A3414), and ends the special chart 1 fluctuation start process.

[Special Chart 2 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special chart 2 variation start processing (A3202) in the special chart normal processing will be described. Figure 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart 2 variation start processing. The special chart 2 variation start processing is a process performed at the start of the special chart 2 variation display game, and is the same process as the process in the special chart 1 variation start processing shown in Figure 18, but for the second start memory.

The game control device 100 first saves the special chart 2 change flag, which indicates the type of special chart change display game to be executed (special chart 2 in this case), in the change pattern discrimination flag area (A3501). Next, it executes the jackpot flag 2 setting process, which sets miss information or jackpot information to the jackpot flag 2 to determine whether the special chart 2 change display game is a jackpot or not (A3502).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special chart 2 stop pattern setting process related to setting the special chart 2 stop pattern (pattern information) (A3503). Furthermore, a special chart information setting process is executed to set the special chart information, which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern (A3504). Next, a special chart 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information is set for referencing various information related to setting the variation pattern of the special chart 2 variation display game, is prepared (A3505).

Then, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process to set the variation pattern of the special chart 2 variation display game (A3506). Then, it executes a variation start information setting process to set information on the start of variation of the special chart 2 variation display game (A3507). In the variation start information setting process, a variation time value corresponding to the variation pattern (variation pattern number) is obtained and saved in the special chart game processing timer area. Then, for the special chart 2 variation display game, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared as a presentation command, and a presentation command setting process is performed.

Next, the game control device 100 first sets the processing number to "1" relating to processing during special chart fluctuation (A3508), and saves the processing number in the special chart game processing number area (A3509).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3510) and saves a signal related to the start of the fluctuation of the special chart 2 in the test signal output data area (A3511). After that, it saves a fluctuating flag in the special chart 2 fluctuation control flag area (A3512), and sets the initial value (e.g., 100 ms) of the blinking control timer (timer for the blinking period of the special chart 2 display 52) in the special chart 2 blinking control timer area (A3513). Next, it saves an initial value (e.g., 0) in the special chart 2 variable pattern number area (A3414), and ends the special chart 2 fluctuation start process.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special chart 1 fluctuation start process will be described. Figure 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the miss information in the small win flag area (A3601) and saves the miss information in the big win flag 1 area (A3602). Next, it loads and prepares the big win random number from the special chart 1 big win random number storage area (for reserved number 1) of the RWM (A3603), and clears the special chart 1 big win random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 (A3604). Note that reserved number 1 is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special chart start memory that is the first to be consumed (here, the first of special chart 1). After that, it executes the big win determination process that determines whether or not there is a big win depending on whether or not the prepared big win random number value matches the big win determination value (A3605).

If the result of the jackpot determination process (A3605) is a jackpot (the result of A3606 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites and saves the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 area where the miss information was saved in step A3602 (A3607), and ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination process (A3605) is not a jackpot (the result of A3606 is "N"), it executes a small jackpot determination process to determine whether or not it is a small jackpot depending on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the small jackpot determination value (A3608).

If the result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is a small hit (the result of A3609 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the small hit information in the small hit flag area where the miss information was saved in step A3601 and saves it (A3610), and ends the big hit flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, if the result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is not a small hit (the result of A3609 is "N"), the big hit flag 1 setting process ends while the miss information is saved in both the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. Thus, in this embodiment, the result of the special chart 1 variable display game is one of "big hit", "small hit", and "miss".
[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special chart 2 variable start process will be described. Figure 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process. This process is the same as the process in the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in Figure 20, but is performed on the second start memory.

The game control device 100 first saves the miss information in the jackpot flag 2 area (A3701). Next, it loads and prepares the jackpot random number from the RWM's special chart 2 jackpot random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A3702), and clears the special chart 2 jackpot random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 (A3703). Note that reserved number 1 is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special chart start memory that is the first to be consumed (here, the first of the special charts 2). After that, it executes a jackpot determination process that determines whether or not there is a jackpot depending on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (A3704).

If the result of the jackpot determination process (A3704) is a jackpot (the result of A3705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites and saves the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 area where the miss information was saved in step A3701 (A3706), and ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination process (A3704) is not a jackpot (the result of A3705 is "N"), the game control device 100 ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process while leaving the miss information saved in the jackpot flag 2. Thus, in this embodiment, the result of the special chart 2 variable display game will be either a "jackpot" or a "miss".

[Big hit determination process]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination process (A3605, A3704) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot determination process. The jackpot determination process is a process common to the jackpot determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3004 of the special chart reservation information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets a table of upper limit judgment values (upper limit judgment value table) corresponding to the probability setting value (A3801). The upper limit judgment value table determines the upper limit judgment value according to the probability setting value for each of the high probability state and the low probability state. Then, a lower limit judgment value of the jackpot judgment value is set (A3802), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A3803). Note that a jackpot is when the jackpot random number matches the jackpot judgment value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit of the jackpot judgment value, and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit of the jackpot judgment value.

If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A3803 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the judgment result to miss (other than jackpot) (A3808) and ends the jackpot judgment process.

In addition, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A3803 is "N"), the game control device 100 judges whether the probability of a jackpot occurring is in a high probability state (high probability state) (A3804). If it is in a high probability state (the result of A3804 is "Y"), it uses the upper limit judgment value table to set an upper limit judgment value within the high probability range corresponding to the probability setting value (A3805). On the other hand, if it is not in a high probability state (the result of A3804 is "N"), it uses the upper limit judgment value table to set an upper limit judgment value within the low probability range corresponding to the probability setting value (A3806).

After setting the upper limit judgment value for the value of the jackpot random number, the game control device 100 judges whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (A3807). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3807 is "Y"), it sets a miss (other than a jackpot) as the judgment result (A3808). On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3807 is "N"), it sets a jackpot as the judgment result (A3809). Once the judgment result is set, the jackpot judgment process ends.

[Small hit determination process]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process (A3608) in the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described. Figure 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. In addition, the small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3009 of the special chart reservation information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets a small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (A3901). Then, it is judged whether the value of the big hit random number of the target (special chart 1) is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (A3902). A small hit is when the big hit random number matches the small hit judgment value. The small hit judgment value is a series of multiple values, and a small hit is judged to be a small hit when the big hit random number is equal to or greater than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit of the small hit judgment value, and equal to or less than the small hit upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit of the small hit judgment value.

Naturally, to avoid the result of the same special chart variable display game being both a small win and a big win, the range of small win determination values (between the small win lower limit determination value and the small win upper limit determination value) does not overlap with the range of big win determination values mentioned above (between the lower limit determination value and the upper limit determination value). Note that in this embodiment, a unique small win random number is not set, and the big win random number is also used to determine a small win, but a configuration in which a unique small win random number is set is also possible.

If the value of the jackpot random number for the target (special chart 1) is less than the small jackpot lower limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the judgment result to a miss (A3904) and ends the small jackpot judgment process.

In addition, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small jackpot lower limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is "N"), the game control device 100 judges whether the value of the jackpot random number of the target (special chart 1) is greater than the small jackpot upper limit judgment value (A3903). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the small jackpot upper limit judgment value (the result of A3903 is "Y"), it sets a miss as the judgment result (A3904). On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the small jackpot upper limit judgment value (the result of A3903 is "N"), it sets a small jackpot as the judgment result (A3905). Once the judgment result is set, the small jackpot judgment process ends.

[Big hit probability, small hit probability]
Figures 24 (A), (B), and (C) are tables illustrating the probability of a big win and the probability of a small win of the special chart variable display game, which are determined as a result of the above-mentioned big win determination process (Figure 22) and small win determination process (Figure 23), for each setting (each setting value).

The example in FIG. 24(A) shows a case where the probability of a big win and a small win differ for each setting (each setting value). The probability of a big win (low probability and high probability) and the probability of a small win increase as the setting value increases (the higher the setting value), and the larger the setting value, the easier it is for a big win to occur, which is advantageous for the player. The probability of a big win is the difference between the upper limit judgment value and the lower limit judgment value in FIG. 22 divided by the range of the value of the big win random number. The probability of a big win can be changed according to the setting value by changing the range of the value of the lower limit judgment value or the value of the big win random number in addition to the upper limit judgment value in response to the setting value. In another example, it may be configured so that only one of the probability of a big win at a low probability or the probability of a big win at a high probability increases as the setting value increases. By changing the probability of a big win and the probability of a small win according to the setting (setting value), the player can enjoy estimating the setting (setting value) from the probability of a big win and the probability of a small win, which increases the interest of the game.

In the example of Figure 24(B), the probability of a big win and a small win are set to the same for settings 1, 2, 3 (setting values 1, 2, 3) and settings 4, 5, 6 (setting values 4, 5, 6). Note that in settings 1 to 3 or settings 4 to 6, the probability of a big win and a small win increases as the setting value increases (the setting becomes higher). In the example of Figure 24(B), it is more difficult for the player to guess the setting (setting value) from the probability of a big win and a small win than in the case of Figure 24(A), which helps prevent the player from getting bored.

In the example of Figure 24 (C), the probability of a big win (when the probability is low and when the probability is high) and the probability of a small win are the same regardless of the setting (setting value). In this case, the player must estimate the setting (setting value) from other setting discrimination elements.

Other setting discrimination factors include the probability of entering a special mode (described below), the number of times that normal power support continues after a jackpot ends (described below), the number of times that the special mode continues on ST machines, the number of jackpot rounds (maximum number of rounds), the fluctuation pattern of the special chart fluctuation display game (fluctuation time value), and various times set in the special chart game processing (stop display time, fanfare time, etc.). If the probability that a specific content of these setting discrimination factors will be selected is made different for each setting value, the player can estimate the setting value from these setting discrimination factors.

[Special chart 1 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special chart 1 stop pattern setting process (A3403) in the special chart 1 variable start process will be described. Figure 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart 1 stop pattern setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the jackpot flag 1 indicates a jackpot or not (A4001), and if it indicates a jackpot (the result of A4001 is "Y"), it loads the jackpot pattern random number from the special chart 1 jackpot pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4002). Next, it sets the special chart 1 jackpot pattern table (A4003).

Next, the stop pattern number corresponding to the loaded jackpot pattern random number is obtained and saved in the special pattern 1 stop pattern number area (A4004). This process selects the type of special result (type of jackpot).

Then, the game control device 100 sets the special chart 1 jackpot stopping pattern information table (A4005), obtains the stopping pattern corresponding to the stopping pattern number, and saves it in the stopping pattern pattern area (A4006). The stopping pattern is used to set the stopping pattern on the special chart display (here, the special chart 1 display 51) and the stopping pattern on the display device 41. Next, round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopping pattern number is obtained, and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A4007).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires time-saving judgment data corresponding to the stopped symbol number and saves it in the time-saving judgment data area (A4008). The time-saving judgment data includes information on the presence or absence of a normal power support state (time-saving state) after the end of the jackpot state.

Then, the game control device 100 saves the presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stopping symbol pattern and the probability state (A4009). Then, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special symbol 1 command corresponding to the stopping symbol pattern (A4018).

The presentation mode transition information is information for transitioning the presentation mode. The presentation mode transition information here is set in the case of a jackpot (the result of A4001 is "Y") and is used in the jackpot end process. In other words, the presentation mode transition information can be used to transition the presentation mode when a jackpot is hit. As described above, the presentation mode transition information is set according to the stopping pattern of the jackpot (whether it is a special jackpot pattern/normal jackpot pattern, etc.), so the type of jackpot pattern (type of jackpot) determines the presentation mode to which the player transitions after the jackpot ends. As described above, the presentation mode transition information is set according to the probability state, so the presentation mode transition destination is also affected by whether or not the player is currently in a special high probability state (special probability state).

On the other hand, if the big win flag 1 is not a big win (the result of A4001 is "N"), the game control device 100 judges whether the small win flag is a small win or not (A4010), and if it is a small win (the result of A4011 is "Y"), it loads the small win pattern random number from the special chart 1 small win pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4011). Next, it sets the special chart 1 small win pattern table (A4012), obtains the stop pattern number corresponding to the loaded small win pattern random number, and saves it in the special chart 1 stop pattern number area (A4013).

Then, the game control device 100 obtains the stopping pattern corresponding to the stopping pattern number, saves it in the stopping pattern area (A4014), and saves the presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stopping pattern (A4015). The presentation mode transition information here is set in the case of a small win (the result of A4010 is "Y"), and the presentation mode can be transitioned in response to the small win. Then, a decorative special pattern command corresponding to the stopping pattern is prepared (A4018).

Also, if the small win flag is not a small win (the result of A4010 is "N"), the stopping pattern number at the time of the miss is saved in the special chart 1 stopping pattern number area (A4016), the missing stopping pattern pattern is saved in the stopping pattern pattern area (A4017), and a decorative special chart command corresponding to the stopping pattern pattern is prepared (A4018). Through the above processing, the stopping pattern corresponding to the result of the special chart variable display game is set.

Then, the decorative special symbol command is saved in the decorative special symbol command area (A4019), and the performance command setting process is executed (A4020). This decorative special symbol command is sent to the performance control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4021), the special symbol 1 big win symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4022), the special symbol 1 small win symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4023), and the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special chart 2 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special chart 2 stop symbol setting process (A3503) in the special chart 2 variable start process will be described. Figure 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart 2 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the jackpot flag 2 indicates a jackpot or not (A4101), and if it indicates a jackpot (the result of A4101 is "Y"), it loads the jackpot pattern random number from the special chart 2 jackpot pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4102). Next, it sets the special chart 2 jackpot pattern table (A4103). Next, it obtains the stop pattern number corresponding to the loaded jackpot pattern random number and saves it in the special chart 2 stop pattern number area (A4104). This process selects the type of special result (type of jackpot).

Then, the game control device 100 sets the special chart 2 jackpot stopping pattern information table (A4105), obtains the stopping pattern corresponding to the stopping pattern number, and saves it in the stopping pattern pattern area (A4106). The stopping pattern is used to set the stopping pattern on the special chart display (here, the special chart 2 display 52) and the stopping pattern on the display device 41. Next, round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopping pattern number is obtained, and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A4107).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires time-saving judgment data corresponding to the stopped symbol number and saves it in the time-saving judgment data area (A4108). The time-saving judgment data includes information on the presence or absence of a normal power support state (time-saving state) after the end of the jackpot state.

Then, the game control device 100 saves the presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stopping symbol pattern and the probability state (A4109). The presentation mode transition information here is set in the case of a jackpot (the result of A4101 is "Y") and is used in the jackpot end processing. Then, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special symbol 2 command corresponding to the stopping symbol pattern (A4112).

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (the result of A4101 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the stopping pattern number at the time of the miss in the special chart 2 stopping pattern number area (A4110), saves the missing stopping pattern pattern in the stopping pattern pattern area (A4111), and prepares a decorative special chart command corresponding to the stopping pattern pattern (A4112). Through the above processing, the stopping pattern corresponding to the result of the special chart variable display game is set.

Then, the special decorative symbol command is saved in the special decorative symbol command area (A4113), and the effect command setting process is executed (A4114). This special decorative symbol command is sent to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4115), the special symbol 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4116), and the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[An example of special jackpot pattern allocation]
FIG. 27 is a table illustrating the jackpot pattern distribution (jackpot breakdown) for each setting of the special chart variable display game controlled by the above-mentioned special chart game processing.

Figure 27 illustrates the jackpot symbol table that specifies the jackpot symbol numbers 1 to 6 (stop symbol numbers) that indicate the type of jackpot and their distribution rate for each setting. As shown in Figure 27, the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol numbers (type of jackpot, symbols 1 to 6) can be changed according to the setting (setting value), and the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of entering the special mode, which is advantageous to the player. The probability of entering the special mode is the ratio of the special mode symbols that have a high probability of being in a high probability state after the jackpot to all symbols. Also, the number of normal power supports after the jackpot ends increases as the setting value increases, especially for normal jackpots (those with a low probability of being in a low probability state after the jackpot), in settings 1 to 3 or settings 4 to 6. The number of normal power supports is set to the same for settings 1, 2, and 3 (setting values 1, 2, and 3) and settings 4, 5, and 6 (setting values 4, 5, and 6). In addition, ST machines can be configured so that the number of times the special state continues increases as the set value increases.

In addition, in FIG. 27, the number of rounds awarded for one jackpot (upper limit of the number of rounds, for example, 2R, 6R, 16R) does not change with respect to the set value, but it is possible to configure the number of rounds to increase as the set value increases. Also, in FIG. 27, a larger number of rounds is more likely to be awarded for a jackpot in the special chart 2 variable display game than for a jackpot in the special chart 1 variable display game, making the special chart 2 variable display game more advantageous to players than the special chart 1 variable display game.

As in FIG. 24(C), it is also possible to configure the jackpot pattern distribution (jackpot breakdown) to be the same regardless of the setting (setting value).

[Special chart change processing]
Next, the details of the special chart change process (A2609) in the special chart game process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart change process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a pattern stop command (special pattern 1 stop command or special pattern 2 stop command) corresponding to the changing pattern as a presentation command (A4701), and executes the presentation command setting process (A4702). The changing pattern can be identified from the changing pattern discrimination flag (special pattern 1 change flag or special pattern 2 change flag). The presentation control device 300, which has received the pattern stop command, stops the corresponding decorative special pattern change display game (decorative special pattern 1 change display game or decorative special pattern 2 change display game).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a display time corresponding to the stopping pattern number indicating the stopping pattern (A4703), and saves the set display time in the special game processing timer area (A4704). In the case of this embodiment, when the stopping pattern is a miss pattern, a big win pattern, or a small win pattern, the display time is set to 600 msec.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the processing number "2" relating to the processing during the special chart display (A4705) and saves the processing number in the special chart game processing number area (A4706).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the change in special chart 1 in the test signal output data area (A4707), and further saves a signal regarding the end of the change in special chart 2 in the test signal output data area (A4708).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the control timer initial value (e.g., 256 msec) in the pattern determination count signal control timer area used when outputting the pattern determination count signal related to the number of times the special pattern variation display game is executed to the external information terminal (A4709).

Then, the game control device 100 saves the stop flag related to the stop of the fluctuation in the special chart 1 display 51 in the special chart 1 fluctuation control flag area as information for controlling the special chart 1 fluctuation display game in the special chart 1 display 51 (A4710). Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves the stop flag related to the stop of the fluctuation in the special chart 2 display 52 in the special chart 2 fluctuation control flag area as information for controlling the special chart 2 fluctuation display game in the special chart 2 display 52 (A4711), and ends the special chart fluctuation processing transition setting process.

[Pattern change control process]
29 shows the pattern change control process (A2620, A2622) in the special game process described above, and the pattern change control process in the normal game process described below. The pattern change control process is a process for controlling the change of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern, etc.) and normal patterns (normal patterns) in the variable display game in the variable display section of the collective display device 50, and for setting the display data of the special patterns and normal patterns.

The game control device 100 first checks whether the variable control flag for the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special symbol, second special symbol, and normal symbol) is variable (A7501). In this embodiment, the lower address of the variable control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the variable symbol number upper limit judgment value, the address of display table 2 (for stopping), and the address of display table 1 (for variable) are defined on the variable control table prepared in steps A2619, A2621, and A7614.

When the changing flag for the symbol to be controlled is changing (result of A7502 is "Y"), the game control device 100 acquires the symbol display table (for changing) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled (A7503). In this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for changing, display table 1) is defined on the change control table prepared in steps A2619, A2621, and A7614.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the blinking control timer of the controlled object by -1 (A7504), determines whether the updated blinking control timer is 0 (A7505), and if the updated blinking control timer is not 0 (the result of A7505 is "N"), acquires display data corresponding to the value of the variable pattern number area of the controlled object (A7508). Then, it saves the acquired display data in the target segment area (A7511), and ends the pattern variable control process.

Furthermore, if the updated blink control timer is 0 (the result of A7505 is "Y"), the blink control timer initial value corresponding to the target blink timer area is saved (A7506), the variable pattern number of the controlled object is updated by +1 within the corresponding range (A7507), and display data corresponding to the value of the variable pattern number area of the controlled object is obtained (A7508). Then, the obtained display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the pattern variable control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the changing flag for the symbol to be controlled is not changing (result of A7502 is "N"), the game control device 100 acquires the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled (A7509). In this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping, display table 2) is defined on the change control table prepared in steps A2619, A2621, and A7614. Next, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area of the control target is acquired (A7510), and the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), terminating the symbol change control process.

The blinking control timer initial value saved in step A7506 is the value defined in the variable control table prepared according to the game being processed. Here, a value equivalent to 100 msec is defined as the blinking control timer initial value. This blinking control timer initial value is the interval at which the lighting pattern is updated during the variable time in the collective display device 50.

The corresponding range in step A7507 is determined by the variable pattern number upper limit judgment value defined in a variable control table prepared according to the game being processed. In step A7507, the variable pattern number is updated by +1 to 0 when the variable pattern number upper limit value is reached, and the variable pattern number is updated sequentially within the range of 0 to (variable pattern number upper limit judgment value - 1). In steps A7508 and A7511, the display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to this variable pattern number is obtained and set for display, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) a number of times equal to the variable pattern number upper limit judgment value, resulting in a repeated display cycle.

In this way, by defining the blinking control timer initial value and the variable symbol number upper limit value in the variable control table prepared according to the game to be processed, the interval at which the lighting pattern is updated on the collective display device 50 and the number of updates required for the display to complete one cycle can be set for each game.

[Fuzu Game Processing]
Next, the details of the normal game process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be described. Figure 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal game process. In the normal game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process related to the normal game change display game is controlled, and the display of the normal game is set.

The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process to monitor input from the gate switch 34a (A7601). Details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a normal power winning switch monitoring process that monitors the input from the start port 2 switch 37a (A7602).

Next, if the normal game processing timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates it by -1 (subtracts 1) (A7603). Note that the minimum value of the normal game processing timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the normal game processing timer has become 0 (A7604).

When the value of the normal game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is "Y"), i.e., when the timer has timed out or has already timed out, the game control device 100 sets in a register a normal game sequence branch table to be referenced in order to branch to the process corresponding to the normal game processing number (A7605).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 obtains the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the normal game processing number based on the set normal game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call is made based on the normal game processing number to execute the game branch processing according to the normal game processing number (A7607).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A7607, the game control device 100 monitors the start of the fluctuation of the normal map fluctuation display game, and executes the normal map normal processing (A7608) to set the start of fluctuation of the normal map fluctuation display game, set the performance, and set information necessary for performing processing during the normal map fluctuation. Details of the normal map normal processing will be described later in FIG. 32.

In addition, if the game processing number is "1" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal map change process (A7609) that sets information necessary to perform normal map display process. For example, in the normal map change process, in order to transition to the normal map display process, the game processing number is set to "2" and saved in the normal map game processing number area, and the normal map display time is saved in the normal map game processing timer area.

In addition, if the game processing number is "2" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes normal map display processing (A7610) to set the normal power release time depending on whether or not the time-saving state is in effect, and to set information necessary for normal map hit processing, if the result of the normal map change display game is a hit. For example, in the normal map display processing, if the result of the normal map change display game is a hit, the game processing number is set to "3" and saved in the normal map game processing number area to transition to normal map hit processing, while if the result is a miss, the game processing number is set to "0" and saved in the normal map game processing number area to transition to normal map normal processing.

In addition, if the game processing number is "3" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes normal winning processing to continue the normal winning processing or to set information necessary for normal remaining ball processing (A7611). For example, in the normal winning processing, after making settings to open the normal variable winning device 37 a predetermined number of times, the game processing number is set to "4" and saved in the normal game processing number area in order to move to normal remaining ball processing.

In addition, if the game processing number is "4" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal game remaining ball process that sets the information necessary to perform a normal game end process (A7612). For example, in the normal game remaining ball process, in order to move to the normal game end process, the game processing number is set to "5" and saved in the normal game processing number area, and the normal game ending time is saved in the normal game processing timer area.

In addition, if the game processing number is "5" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal hit end process (A7613) that sets information necessary for normal hit processing (A7608). For example, in the normal hit end process, in order to transition to normal hit processing, the game processing number is set to "0" and saved in the normal hit game processing number area.

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a regular symbol fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the regular symbol by the regular symbol display device 53 (A7614). Then, it executes a symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the regular symbol by the regular symbol display device 53 (A7615), and ends the regular symbol game process.

On the other hand, if the value of the normal game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A7604 is "N"), i.e., if the timer has not yet run out, the game control device 100 executes the processing from step A7614 onwards.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
31 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the gate switch monitoring process. The gate switch monitoring process is executed in step A7601 in the normal game process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first judges whether there is an input to the gate switch 34a (A7701). Then, if there is an input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "Y"), it judges whether the game state is for right-hitting (A7702). The game state for right-hitting is a big win state, a small win state, and a time-saving state (normal power support state). If it is a game state for right-hitting (the result of A7702 is "Y"), it proceeds to the processing of step A7705. If it is not a game state for right-hitting (the result of A7702 is "N"), it prepares a left-hitting instruction notification command (left-hitting instruction command) as a presentation command (A7703), and executes the presentation command setting process (A7704). The presentation control device 300 that has received the left-hitting instruction notification command executes a notification (warning) instructing the player to hit left by the display device 41, etc.

Next, the gaming control device 100 obtains the number of reserved regular figures and determines whether the number of reserved regular figures is less than the upper limit (e.g., 4) (A7705). If the number of reserved regular figures is less than the upper limit (the result of A7705 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 updates the number of reserved regular figures by +1 (A7706) and calculates the address of the winning random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved regular figures (A7707). Then, it extracts a winning random number and saves it in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (A7708), extracts a winning symbol random number and saves it in the winning symbol random number storage area (A7709), and ends the gate switch monitoring process.

On the other hand, if there is no input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "N"), or if it is determined that the number of reserved regular drawings is not less than the upper limit (the result of A7705 is "N"), the game control device 100 ends the gate switch monitoring process.

[Normal processing]
Next, the details of the normal game process (A7608) in the normal game process will be described. FIG 32 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal game process.

The game control device 100 first judges whether the number of reserved normal figures is 0 or not (A7901). If the number of reserved normal figures is not 0 (the result of A7901 is "N"), it loads a winning random number from the RWM's random number storage area for normal figures (for reserved number 1), loads a winning pattern random number from the RWM's random number storage area for normal figures (for reserved number 1), and clears the random number storage area for normal figures (for reserved number 1) and the random number storage area for normal figures (for reserved number 1) after loading to 0 (A7902). Furthermore, it judges whether the probability of a winning result in the normal figure variation display game is higher than normal in the high probability state (high probability state), that is, whether the time-saving state (normal power support state) is in place (A7903). The probability of a winning normal figure in the high probability state is 250/251, and the probability of a winning normal figure in the low probability state is 0/251.

If the game control device 100 is not in the high probability of normal play (the result of A7903 is "N"), it sets a low probability lower limit judgment value (here, 251) which is the lower limit judgment value for the low probability of normal play (A7904). If the game control device 100 is in the high probability of normal play (the result of A7903 is "Y"), it sets a high probability lower limit judgment value (here, 1) which is the lower limit judgment value for the high probability of normal play (A7905), and proceeds to processing of step A7906.

The game control device 100 judges whether the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit judgment value (here, 251) (A7906). Note that the upper limit judgment value here is common to both the normal high probability and the normal low probability. If the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7906 is "Y"), i.e., if it is a miss, the process proceeds to step A7908. If the winning random number is less than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7906 is "N"), it is judged whether the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A7907).

If the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is "Y"), that is, if it is a loss, the game control device 100 saves the loss information in the winning flag area (A7908). Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets the loss stop pattern number as the normal stop pattern number (A7909), saves the loss pattern information in the normal stop pattern information area (A7910), and proceeds to the processing of step A7914.

If the winning random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is "N"), i.e., if there is a win, the game control device 100 saves the winning information in the winning flag area (A7911), sets the winning stop pattern number corresponding to the loaded winning pattern random number (A7912), saves the winning stop pattern information corresponding to the winning stop pattern number in the normal stop pattern information area (A7913), and proceeds to the processing of step A7914. Note that there may be several types of winning stop patterns, and in this embodiment there are two.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stopping pattern number in the regular stopping pattern area (A7914), saves the stopping pattern number in the test signal output data area (A7915), shifts the regular random number storage area (A7916), clears the free area after the shift to 0 (A7917), and then updates the regular reserved number by -1 (A7918).

In other words, as the regular map change display game for the oldest regular map reserved number 1 is played, the ranks of regular map reserved numbers 2 to 4 that are reserved after regular map reserved number 1 are raised by one. This process moves the value for regular map reserved number 2 in the regular map random number storage area from that for regular map reserved number 4 to that for regular map reserved number 1 in the regular map random number storage area. Then, the value for regular map reserved number 4 in the regular map random number storage area is cleared, and the regular map reserved number is decremented by 1.

Next, the game control device 100 extracts the variation pattern random number 3 (A7919), sets the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3, and saves it in the normal game processing timer area (A7920). For example, the variation time is allocated to 500 msec with a probability of 200/256, 1500 msec with a probability of 40/256, and 3000 msec with a probability of 16/256. Then, the normal game variation processing transition setting process is executed (A7921), and the normal game normal processing is terminated. For example, in the normal game variation processing transition setting process, "1" is set as the processing number for transitioning to the normal game variation processing, and the processing number is saved in the normal game processing number area. Then, the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec), which is the initial value of the timer for the blinking period of the normal game display, is saved in the normal game blinking control timer area, and the initial value (here, 0) is saved in the normal game variation pattern number area.

In addition, if the number of reserved normal games is 0 (result of A7901 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number for transitioning to normal normal game processing (A7922) and saves the processing number in the normal game game processing number area (A7923). After that, it saves the fraud monitoring period flag in the normal game fraud monitoring period flag area (A7924) and ends normal normal game processing.

[External information editing processing]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (A1317) in the timer interruption process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the external information editing process. FIG. 33A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and FIG. 33B shows the second half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, based on the monitoring results of the payout command transmission process (A1311), the winning port switch/status monitoring process (A1307), the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1315), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1316), information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or an internal management device for the game center or a test firing test device is created and set in an output buffer.

The game control device 100 first determines whether a glass frame opening error is occurring (A9501). If a glass frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A9501 is "N"), it determines whether a main frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (A9502). If a main frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A9502 is "N"), it saves the off data of the door/frame opening signal in the external information output data area (A9503), and saves the off data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A9504).

If a glass frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9501 is "Y") or if a main frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9502 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves the on data of the door/frame opening signal in the external information output data area (A9505) and saves the on data of the game machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (A9506).

After steps A9504 and A9506, the game control device 100 updates the security signal control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (A9507), and determines whether the security signal control timer is 0 (whether the timer has timed out) (A9508). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set to a predetermined time (e.g., 256 msec) when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch (setting value change switch 102), etc., or when the setting change is completed (A1044, A2419 in the main processing). The security signal control timer then starts timing from the time the RAM is initialized or the setting change is completed. In addition, the initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the setting variable state (setting change mode) or setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) is entered by operating the setting key switch 93 or the setting value change switch 102 (A1037, A2507 in the main processing), and the security signal may be continuously output during the setting change (setting variable state) when the probability setting value changing flag is set, or during the setting confirmation state when the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set. Note that it is also possible to configure the security signal control timer to be set to 0 and the output of the security signal to end when the probability setting value changed flag is set (A2414), rather than when the probability setting value changing flag is cleared (A2418).

If the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9508 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the on data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A9509) and proceeds to processing of step A9510. In other words, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

When the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9508 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not magnet fraud is occurring (A9510). Note that it can be determined that magnet fraud is occurring when a magnet fraud occurrence flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area. When magnet fraud is not occurring (the result of A9510 is "N"), it further determines whether or not board radio wave fraud is occurring (A9511). Note that it can be determined that board radio wave fraud is occurring when a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag is saved in the board radio wave flag area.

If no board radio wave fraud is occurring (the result of A9511 is "N"), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not frame radio wave fraud is occurring (A9512). If no frame radio wave fraud is occurring (the result of A9512 is "N"), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not normal power fraud is occurring (A9513). If no normal power fraud is occurring (the result of A9513 is "N"), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not large prize slot fraud is occurring (A9514). Note that if the fraudulent prize occurrence flag for the large prize slot is saved in the fraud flag area by the fraud & prize monitoring process, it can be determined that large prize slot fraud is occurring. If no large prize slot fraud is occurring (the result of A9514 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not a switch abnormality error is occurring (A9515).

If a switch abnormality error (the aforementioned switch abnormality 1 error) such as a switch connector coming loose is occurring (the result of A9515 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 saves the off data of the gaming machine error state signal in the test signal output data area (A9516). If a switch abnormality error is occurring (the result of A9515 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 saves the on data of the gaming machine error state signal in the test signal output data area (A9518).

On the other hand, if magnet fraud is occurring (result of A9510 is "Y"), if board radio wave fraud is occurring (result of A9511 is "Y"), if frame radio wave fraud is occurring (result of A9512 is "Y"), if normal radio wave fraud is occurring (result of A9513 is "Y"), or if large prize slot fraud is occurring (result of A9514 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 saves the on data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A9517) and saves the on data of the gaming machine error state signal in the test signal output data area (A9518). Depending on the setting of the on data of the security signal, the security signal is output to an external device (such as a hall computer) as external information.

After steps A9516 and A9518, the gaming control device 100 executes a main prize ball signal editing process to set information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out (A9519). Next, the gaming control device 100 executes a start port signal editing process to edit the winning signal of the start port (A9520).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the pattern determination count control timer, which controls the output time of information related to the number of times the special pattern variable display game is executed, by -1 if it is not 0 (A9521). Note that the minimum value of the pattern determination count control timer is set to 0.

Then, the game control device 100 judges whether the value of the pattern determination count control timer is 0 or not (A9522). If the value of the pattern determination count control timer is 0 (the result of A9522 is "Y"), that is, if the timer has timed out or has already timed out, the off data of the pattern determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9523), and the external information editing process is terminated.

In addition, if the value of the pattern determination count control timer is not 0 (the result of A9522 is "N"), i.e., if the timer has not timed out, the game control device 100 saves the on data of the pattern determination count signal in the external information output data area (A9524) and ends the external information editing process.

[Display of the collective display device during setting changes]
Figure 34 is a diagram illustrating the display of each display section of the collective display device 50 when the probability setting is being changed (when the setting is in a variable setting state in which the setting can be changed), i.e., the light emission state (on/off state) of each light-emitting section (LED lamps D1-D18) of the collective display device 50.

During the probability setting change, the gaming control device 100 displays a predetermined display on the display units 51 and 52 for the special symbol variable display game of the collective display device 50, regardless of the state (such as the game state) of the gaming machine 10 at the time of power off before power on. For example, even if the jackpot symbol is displayed as stopped when the power is off before power is turned on, the gaming control device 100 can display a predetermined display on the display units 51 and 52 of the collective display device 50 during the probability setting change, regardless of the state of the collective display device 50 at the time of power off. Therefore, during the probability setting change (setting variable state), a predetermined display on the display units 51 and 52 for the special symbol variable display game, which are easily visible from the front of the gaming machine 10, can indicate that the probability setting is being changed or that the gaming machine 10 is in a state where play (such as the variable display game) is not possible.

In FIG. 34A, during the probability setting change (during the setting variable state), the first special chart change display section 51 (7-segment LED lamp D1) for the special chart 1 change display game of the collective display device 50 displays the probability setting value (here, 6) as a predetermined display. In this way, during the probability setting change, by displaying a different display (different from normal) from when the change is stopped on the first special chart change display section 51, it is possible to clearly indicate on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which it is not possible to play (for example, a change display game). Note that the numbers 1 to 6 indicating the probability setting value are not used in the stop display when the change is stopped on the first special chart change display section 51 and the second special chart change display section 52.

For example, the game control device 100 may output output data to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 based on the probability setting value display data (A2409) corresponding to the working probability setting value and the probability setting value display data (A2413) corresponding to the probability setting value, and may display the working probability setting value and the probability setting value in a lit or flashing manner on the first special chart change display unit 51 (LED lamp D1) (A1603-A1608 of the output process).

The probability setting value may be displayed as a lit or flashing display on the second special chart change display unit 52 (7-segment LED lamp D2) for the special chart 2 change display game of the collective display device 50. Also, the probability setting value may be displayed as a lit or flashing display using both the first special chart change display unit 51 and the second special chart change display unit 52.

Furthermore, the probability setting value may be displayed in a brighter light or flashing manner than normal so that it is difficult for a person who does not have the authority to change the settings to see the probability setting value at a location away from the gaming machine 10.

In FIG. 34B, while the probability setting is being changed, the first special symbol change display unit 51 (LED lamp D1) displays a predetermined display of change-in-progress information (e.g., the letter "P") indicating that the probability setting is being changed (setting variable state). In this way, by displaying a different display (different from normal) from when the change is stopped on the first special symbol change display unit 51 while the probability setting is being changed, it is possible to clearly indicate from the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is in a state where play is not possible. Note that the stop display when the change is stopped on the first special symbol change display unit 51 and the second special symbol change display unit 52 does not use the same identification information (special pattern) as the change-in-progress information display (e.g., the letter "P").

For example, when it is determined that the probability setting is being changed (result of A2401 is "Y"), the game control device 100 executes a process to generate output data for displaying the information during change to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 (a processing step is added to FIG. 10), and may display the information during change as a lit or flashing display on the first special chart change display unit 51 (output process A1603-A1608). Also, for example, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is open and the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1024 is "Y"), when the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value change flag (A1038), it may output output data to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and display the information during change as a lit or flashing display on the first special chart change display unit 51 (LED lamp D1).

In addition, the change information display may be displayed as a lit or flashing display on the second special chart change display unit 52 (7-segment LED lamp D2) for the special chart 2 change display game of the collective display device 50. Also, the change information display may be displayed as a lit or flashing display using both the first special chart change display unit 51 and the second special chart change display unit 52.

In FIG. 34C, during the probability setting change, the first special chart change display unit 51 displays the same display as the stop result (loss result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the jackpot) as a predetermined display. In this embodiment, the loss result (loss pattern) is displayed by lighting the central segment of the first special chart change display unit 51 (7-segment LED lamp D1). In this way, by displaying a predetermined display on the first special chart change display unit 51 during the probability setting change, it is possible to indicate to the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is not currently playing. In addition, the RAM area is cleared to 0 when the setting change is completed (A2418), but by displaying the loss result (loss pattern) during the probability setting change, it may be unnecessary to set the initial value (A2419) of the data to be displayed on the first special chart change display unit 51.

For example, when the game control device 100 determines that the probability setting is being changed (the result of A2401 is "Y"), it may execute a process to generate output data for displaying the losing result (losing symbol) to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 (a processing step is added to FIG. 10), and may light up the losing result display on the first special symbol change display unit 51 (output process A1603-A1608). Also, for example, when the front frame 12 (main frame) is open and the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1024 is "Y"), the game control device 100 may output output data to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 and light up the losing result display on the first special symbol change display unit 51 (LED lamp D1) when setting the probability setting value changing flag (A1038).

In addition, the display of the miss result may be lit up on the second special chart change display unit 52 (LED lamp D2) for the special chart 2 change display game of the collective display device 50. Also, the display of the miss result may be lit up using both the first special chart change display unit 51 and the second special chart change display unit 52.

In FIG. 34D, while the probability setting is being changed, the first special chart change display unit 51 (LED lamp D1) displays a predetermined display of "light off". In this way, by displaying a different display (different from normal) to that when the change is stopped on the first special chart change display unit 51 while the probability setting is being changed, it is possible to clearly indicate from the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is in a state where play is not possible. Note that the light off display is not used for the stop display when the change of the first special chart change display unit 51 and the second special chart change display unit 52 is stopped.

For example, the game control device 100 may not generate output data for the first special chart change display unit 51 to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 from the time the power is turned on (power is restored) until the probability setting value has been changed (the result of A2406 is "Y"), and may display an off display on the first special chart change display unit 51.

The second special chart change display section 52 (7-segment LED lamp D2) for the special chart 2 change display game of the collective display device 50 may be displayed as off. Also, both the first special chart change display section 51 and the second special chart change display section 52 may be displayed as off.

In the above Figures 34A to 34D, while the probability setting is being changed, the LED lamps (e.g. LED lamps D3-D18) other than the display units 51, 52 (D1, D2) for the special chart variation display game may be turned off or may be lit in a cyclical manner to display an animation.

In Figures 34E and 34F, while the probability setting is being changed, all display parts (i.e., all light-emitting parts: LED lamps D1-D18) of the collective display device 50 are lit or flashing, and a predetermined display is displayed on the collective display device 50, either all lit or all flashing. In this way, while the probability setting is being changed, by displaying a different display (different from normal) on the collective display device 50 than when the fluctuation has stopped, it is possible to clearly indicate from the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is in a state where play is not possible.

The full blinking display in FIG. 34F is achieved by repeating the full off and full on display of the collective display device 50 at a predetermined time interval.

For example, when it is determined that the probability setting is being changed (result of A2401 is "Y"), the game control device 100 may execute a process to generate output data for a full light display or full blinking display to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and display the full light display or full blinking display on the collective display device 50 (output process A1603-A1608). Also, for example, when the front frame 12 (main frame) is open and the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1024 is "Y"), when the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value change flag (A1038), it may output output data to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and display the full light display or full blinking display on the collective display device 50 (LED lamps D1-D18).

Figure 34G shows another example of the configuration of the collective display device 50 of Figures 34A-34F. In Figure 34G, performance indications related to the performance (specs) of the gaming machine 10 are displayed around the LED lamps D1-D18 of the collective display device 50. Note that the performance indications are printed, but may be displayed by emitting light from LED lamps, liquid crystal displays, etc. As performance indications, indications of the jackpot probability at low probability in setting 1 (lowest setting) and setting 6 (highest setting) 85a "1/300 and 1/200", indication of the number of prize balls 85b "3&2&10&14", indication of the upper limit of the number of rounds 85c "2, 6, 16", indication of the model (official name) 85d "CRxxxxx", and indication of the presence or absence of a limit on the special jackpot 85e (here "no limit") are displayed.

The number of prize balls displayed 85b shows the number of prize balls for the start winning hole 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the general winning hole 35, and the special variable winning device 39 in that order. The limit on the special jackpot means that the number of consecutive special jackpots is limited to a specified limit (a single jackpot can result in a specified limit number of jackpots (consecutive jackpots)).

The display 85a of the jackpot probability at low probability is only displayed for setting 1 (lowest setting) and setting 6 (highest setting), so it can be displayed to fit within the free space around the collective display device 50. The display 85a of the jackpot probability at low probability may be displayed only for setting 3 (intermediate setting), or the display 85a of the jackpot probability at low probability may be displayed for only one of setting 1 (lowest setting) and setting 6 (highest setting) (either the lowest value 1/300 or the highest value 1/200), or the range of the jackpot probability at low probability (1/300 to 1/200) may be displayed.

In addition, among the jackpot probabilities at low probability, those that cannot be displayed around the LED lamps D1-D18 of the collective display device 50 (jackpot probabilities of settings 2, 4, 5, etc.) may be displayed in an empty area of a separate member from the collective display device 50 outside the play area 32. In addition, what is displayed on the collective display device 50 may be displayed on this separate member in an overlapping manner. For example, the jackpot probabilities at low probability for settings 2, 4, 5, etc. may be displayed in the empty areas at the top right, bottom left, or top left of the play board in FIG. 2A, or on the member (guide rail 31) that divides the play area 32. Alternatively, the jackpot probabilities at low probability for settings 2, 4, 5, etc. may be displayed in an empty area within the play area (for example, on the surface of the general winning hole 35 at the bottom left). In addition, the display 85e of the presence or absence of a limit for the special jackpot displays "Limited" only when there is a limit, and nothing needs to be displayed when there is no limit. In this way, the items displayed as performance displays around the LED lamps D1-D18 of the collective display device 50 can be changed as appropriate. For example, the display 85c of the upper limit of the number of rounds at the time of a jackpot can be displayed in a separate area or on the display device 41. Some or all of the items displayed as performance displays may or may not be displayed on the collective display device 50 as necessary.

The performance control device 300 may also display on the display device 41 the jackpot probability at low probability times for settings 2, 4, 5, etc., while the setting is being changed, while the setting is being confirmed, and/or while customers are waiting. The performance control device 300 may store the jackpot probability at low probability times in memory (such as program ROM 321) in advance. The display device 41 may overlap with what is displayed on the collective display device 50. The display of the jackpot probability for each setting may be switched by operating an operation unit such as the performance button 25 or a cross key.

Figures 35 (A) and (B) show a configuration that makes it difficult to see a specified display (here, probability setting value 6) from diagonal directions other than the front of the gaming machine 10 when the specified display (here, probability setting value 6) is displayed on the first special chart change display unit 51 or the second special chart change display unit 52 of the collective display device 50 during a probability setting change. This configuration makes it possible to prevent a person who does not have the authority to change the setting from seeing the specified display (particularly the probability setting value) from diagonal directions of the gaming machine 10 during a probability setting change.

In FIG. 35(A), two recesses 51a, 51b (concave portions) are provided on the front of the all-in-one display device 50, and the first special chart change display unit 51 or the second special chart change display unit 52 is disposed in the recesses 51a, 51b, respectively. In FIG. 35(B), a ring-shaped wall portion 50a (convex portion) is provided on the front of the all-in-one display device 50, surrounding the first special chart change display unit 51 and the second special chart change display unit 52. This makes it difficult to view the display of the first special chart change display unit 51 or the second special chart change display unit 52 from an oblique direction.

[Control of the production control device]
The control (processing) that the performance control device 300 executes using the performance control program will be described below.

[Main processing (performance control device)]
First, the main processing executed by the performance control device 300 will be described in detail. Fig. 36 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main processing (main program) executed by the performance control device 300. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (performance microcomputer) when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 10. In the flowchart of the processing executed by the performance control device 300, the step symbols (numbers) are represented as "B****".

When the execution of the main process begins, the performance control device 300 first prohibits interrupts (B0001). Next, it executes initial settings for the CPU 311 and VDP 312 (B0002, B0003), and then permits interrupts (B0004). When interrupts are permitted, it becomes possible to execute command reception interrupt processing, which receives commands sent from the game control device 100.

The performance control device 300 then permits the generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41, etc. (B0005), and sets a random number seed to be used for random number generation (B0006). Then, it saves the initial value at power-on in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Next, the performance control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0008). The WDT is started by the CPU initial setting (B0002) described above, and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared after a certain period of time has passed, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

Then, the performance control device 300 executes an RTC reading process to read time information from the RTC (real-time clock) 338, which serves as a timing means (B0009).

In the RTC read process, the time information may be read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every minute), and it is not necessary to read the time information every time the process moves to step B0009. In addition, the RTC read process may be executed only once when the power is turned on to the performance control device 300 (i.e., when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 10) (the position of the RTC read process may be changed and executed, for example, between steps B0003 and B0004). The performance control device 300 may set a time timer (time measuring means) that measures time in a timer area in the RAM, and adjust the time timer to match the time of the RTC 338 when the time information is read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or when the time information is read from the RTC 338 only once when the power is turned on. The performance control device 300 may execute various processes using the time timer instead of the RTC 338. This reduces the number of times the time is read from the RTC 338, reducing the load on the CPU 311.

In the RTC reading process, a specified effect may be executed if the read time matches any of a number of specified times (first specified time, second specified time, ...), but by drawing lots for the time interval between the multiple specified times with a probability according to a set value, the player can estimate the set value from this time interval. For example, the lottery may be drawn so that the selection rate of a longer time interval decreases as the set value increases. Also, by drawing lots for the execution period for the specified effect with a probability according to the set value, the player can estimate the set value from the execution period of the specified effect. For example, the lottery may be drawn so that the selection rate of a longer execution period increases as the set value increases.

Next, the performance control device 300 executes a performance button input process (B0010) that detects the operation signal of the performance button 25 by the player (signal of the performance button switch 25a or touch panel 25b) and changes the performance content (settings) according to the detected signal. Then, it executes a hall/player setting mode process (B0011) that accepts operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LEDs and LCD by the person in charge of the game arcade (amusement store) or the player. In the hall/player setting mode process, the player can customize the performance according to the performance points described below.

Next, the performance control device 300 executes a performance point control process that adds or clears performance points (B0012). In the performance point control process, performance points are added by executing a performance or operation that is the subject of the addition of performance points, and information including performance point information, for example, is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark) at the end of a game so that the performance points can be carried over to the next game. For example, the performance control device 300 can display a QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in a hall/player setting mode process. Note that the value to be added to the performance points (addition value) is selected by lottery with a probability according to the set value, allowing the player to estimate the set value from the addition value. For example, the lottery may be performed so that the selection rate of a large addition value increases as the set value increases.

Next, the performance control device 300 executes a random number update process to update random numbers such as performance random numbers (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes a corresponding received command check process (B0014). Details of the received command check process will be described later in FIG. 37.

The performance control device 300 then executes a performance display editing process (B0015) that updates various data according to the content to be displayed on a display device (display means) such as the display device 41, and sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. The drawing data set at this time can update the image on the display device 41 without any problems as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within a frame period of 1/30 seconds (approximately 33.3 msec). Then, the performance control device 300 completes preparation for drawing in the display frame buffer and executes drawing command preparation end setting (B0016).

The performance control device 300 then determines whether it is time to switch frames (B0017). If it is not time to switch frames (the result of B0017 is "N"), the process of B0017 is repeated until it is time to switch frames, and if it is time to switch frames (the result of B0017 is "Y"), the display device 41 is instructed to draw on the screen (B0018). Since the frame period in this embodiment is 1/30 seconds, frames are switched when a periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice, for example, every 1/60 seconds (1/2 the frame period). Note that the image may not be updated every 1/60 seconds, and the interval may be increased even further.

The performance control device 300 also executes a sound control process to control the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0019).

The performance control device 300 also executes a decoration control process (B0020) that controls decoration devices (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) that are made up of LEDs or the like. In the decoration control process, for example, the lighting control of decoration devices such as LEDs is executed.

Furthermore, the performance control device 300 executes a movable body control process (B0021) that controls performance devices such as motor-driven props (board performance device 44, frame performance device) driven by motors and solenoids. In the movable body control process, for example, a prop operation performance that drives a motor is set.

Then, when the performance control device 300 finishes the above-mentioned processing of B0021, it returns to processing of B0008. Thereafter, it repeats the processing from B0008 to B0021.

[Received command check process]
Next, the details of the received command check process (B0014) in the above-mentioned main process (FIG. 36) will be described with reference to Fig. 37. Fig. 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the number of received commands to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). It then determines whether the number of received commands is not 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if no commands have been received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there are no commands to analyze, so the received command check process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the number of received commands is not 0, i.e., if a command has been received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 subtracts the number of received commands from the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area (B1103), and then copies the contents of the received command buffer in RAM to a command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem in subtracting the number of received commands before copying the contents of the buffer to the command area. Furthermore, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the performance control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 (adds 1) within the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The received command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read index 0 to 31, and here the received commands are read out in index order and copied to the command area for analysis. Note that when copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The performance control device 300 determines whether copying of the number of commands received and loaded in the processing of step B1101 has been completed (B1106), and if copying has not been completed (result of B1106 is "N"), the processing of steps B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

When the performance control device 300 receives a command sent from the game control device 100, the contents of the received command are stored in the received command buffer and at the same time the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is incremented and updated. The received command buffer can store 32 commands, but analysis of the received commands is performed in a separate command area for analysis. Then, when the contents of the received command are copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, by always securing free space in the received command buffer without directly performing analysis, it is possible to prepare for the reception of a large number of commands.

Next, when the copying is complete (result of B1106 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 loads the received command contents in the command area for analysis (B1107) and executes a received command analysis process to analyze the contents (B1108). Details of the received command analysis process will be described later in the next Figure 38. The address of the command area for analysis is also updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not analysis of the number of commands received that were loaded in the processing of step B1101 has been completed (B1110), and if analysis has not been completed (result of B1110 is "N"), the processing of steps B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When analysis has been completed (result of B1110 is "Y"), the received command check processing is terminated.

[Received command analysis process]
Next, the details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the above-mentioned received command check process (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to Fig. 38. Fig. 38 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the performance control device 300.

First, the performance control device 300 separates the upper byte of the received command into a MODE section and the lower byte into an ACTION section (ACT section) (B1201). The command sent from the game control device 100 to the performance control device 300 is composed of a MODE section (MODE command) and an ACTION section (ACTION command), and is usually sent consecutively starting from the MODE section, which indicates the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower parts of the received command are composed of the MODE section and ACTION section, in that order.

Next, the performance control device 300 judges whether the MODE section is within the normal range (B1202). That is, it judges whether the MODE section indicating the type of command is a possible value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). If the MODE section is within the normal range (the result of B1202 is "Y"), it similarly judges whether the ACTION section is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it judges whether the ACTION section indicating the content of the command (specific performance instructions, etc.) is a possible value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content). If the ACTION section is within the normal range (the result of B1203 is "Y"), it further judges whether the ACTION section for the MODE section is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it judges whether the value of the ACTION section is a possible value for the type of command specified by the MODE section. If the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), command processing according to the command system is executed in the processing from B1205 onwards.

The performance control device 300 first determines whether the value of the MODE section is within the range of the fluctuation system command (B1205). Note that a fluctuation system command is a command that instructs the fluctuation pattern of the decorative special pattern, and there is a fluctuation command (set in the fluctuation start information setting process). Then, if the MODE section represents a fluctuation system command (the result of B1205 is "Y"), the fluctuation system command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE section does not represent a variable command (result of B1205 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next judges whether the MODE section is within the range of a winning command (B1207). A winning command is a command that instructs an operation related to the performance during a winning (such as displaying a fanfare screen or a round screen), and is, for example, a big win fanfare command (set during processing during special chart display), a round command (set during processing during fanfare/interval), an interval command (set during processing during large prize opening), an ending command (set during processing during large prize opening), a small win fanfare command, a small win opening command (small win round command), a small win ending screen command (small win ending command), etc. And so on. Then, when the MODE section represents a winning command (result of B1207 is "Y"), the winning command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

If the MODE section does not represent a winning command (result of B1207 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section is within the range of a pattern command (B1209). Note that the pattern command includes the decorative special pattern 1 command (A4018) and the decorative special pattern 2 command (A4112) that correspond to the stopping pattern. Then, if the MODE section represents a pattern command (result of B1209 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes pattern command processing (B1210) and ends the received command analysis processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a pattern command (result of B1209 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section is within the range of a one-shot command (B1211). Then, if the MODE section represents a one-shot command (result of B1211 is "Y"), it executes one-shot command processing (B1212) and ends the received command analysis processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a single-shot command (result of B1211 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section is within the range of a look-ahead pattern command (B1213). Look-ahead pattern commands include the above-mentioned look-ahead stop pattern command (A3014 in FIG. 15). Then, if the MODE section represents a look-ahead pattern command (result of B1213 is "Y"), it executes look-ahead pattern command processing (B1214) and ends the received command analysis processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a look-ahead pattern command (result of B1213 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE section is within the range of a look-ahead variation command (B1215). Look-ahead variation commands include the look-ahead variation pattern command mentioned above (A3018 in FIG. 15). Then, if the MODE section represents a look-ahead variation command (result of B1215 is "Y"), it executes look-ahead variation command processing (B1216) and ends the received command analysis processing.

On the other hand, if the MODE section does not represent a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "N"), the performance control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only in test mode), and so ends the received command analysis process. Also, if the MODE section is not within the normal range (the result of B1202 is "N"), if the ACTION section is not within the normal range (the result of B1203 is "N"), or if the ACTION section is not a correct combination with the MODE section (the result of B1204 is "N"), the performance control device 300 ends the received command analysis process.

[Single command processing]
Next, the details of the one-shot command processing (B1212) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to Fig. 39. Fig. 39 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the one-shot command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first determines whether the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). If the MODE section represents a model designation command (result of B1301 is "Y"), it executes a model setting process to set the type of gaming machine (B1302) and ends the single-shot command process.

If the MODE section does not represent a model designation command (result of B1301 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE section represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). If the MODE section represents a RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is "Y"), it executes a RAM initialization setting process (B1304) to notify the user of RAM initialization, and terminates the single-shot command processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a command for when power is restored (B1305). If the MODE section represents a command for when power is restored (result of B1305 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes a power outage restoration setting process (B1306) and ends the single-shot command process.

If the MODE section does not represent a command for when power is restored (result of B1305 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a customer waiting demo command (B1307). If the MODE section represents a customer waiting demo command (result of B1307 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes customer waiting demo setting processing (B1308) and ends single-shot command processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a customer waiting demo command (result of B1307 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a decorative special chart 1 reserved number command (A2917, A3207) (B1309). Then, if the MODE section represents a decorative special chart 1 reserved number command (result of B1309 is "Y"), it executes special chart 1 reserved information setting processing (B1310) and ends single-shot command processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a decorative special chart 1 reserved number command (the result of B1309 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a decorative special chart 2 reserved number command (A2917, A3203) (B1311). Then, if the MODE section represents a decorative special chart 2 reserved number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes a special chart 2 reserved information setting process (B1312) and ends the single-shot command process.

If the MODE section does not represent a decorative special chart 2 reserved number command (the result of B1311 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a probability information command (B1313). Then, if the MODE section represents a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "Y"), it executes a probability information setting process (B1314) and ends the single-shot command process.

If the MODE section does not represent a probability information command (result of B1313 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next judges whether the MODE section represents an error/fraud command (B1315). Examples of error/fraud commands include a fraud occurrence command (set in the fraud & winning monitoring process when fraud occurs), a fraud release command (set in the fraud & winning monitoring process when fraud is released), a status off command (A2204), and a status on command (A2207). Status on commands include commands indicating the generation of a signal from the glass frame opening detection switch 63 (glass frame opening error) and the generation of a signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main frame opening detection switch) (main frame opening error, front frame opening error). The status off command also indicates that no error has occurred.

If the MODE section indicates an error/illegal command (the result of B1315 is "Y"), an error/illegal setting process is executed (B1316) to notify or cancel the error or illegality, and the single command process is terminated.

If the MODE section does not represent an error/incorrect command (result of B1315 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE section represents a command for switching performance modes (set during processing during special chart display, etc.) (B1317). Then, if the MODE section represents a command for switching performance modes (result of B1317 is "Y"), it executes a performance mode switching setting process (B1318) and ends the single-shot command processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a command for switching the presentation mode (result of B1317 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents an out ball count command (B1319). If the MODE section represents an out ball count command (result of B1319 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes the out ball count reception process (B1320) and ends the single-shot command processing.

If the MODE section does not represent an out ball count command (result of B1319 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a count command (big prize slot count command of A3107, A3111) (B1321). Then, if the MODE section represents a count command (result of B1321 is "Y"), it executes count information setting processing (B1322) and ends single-shot command processing.

When the MODE section does not represent a count command (result of B1321 is "N"), the performance control device 300 judges whether the MODE section represents a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) (B1323). The setting value information command is included in the command at the time of power recovery in step A1035 of FIG. 5B and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the processing of step A1045. Also, as described above, in conjunction with the command to end the probability setting change in step A2421, a setting value information command is transmitted from the game control device 100 when the probability setting change is ended. Then, when the MODE section represents a setting value information command (result of B1323 is "Y"), the processing at the time of receiving the setting value is executed (B1324), and the single-shot command processing is ended. In the processing at the time of receiving the setting value, the setting value (probability setting value) is stored in a storage section such as a RAM, and the necessary processing is executed.

When the MODE section does not represent a setting value information command (result of B1323 is "N"), the performance control device 300 judges whether the MODE section represents a setting change command (B1325). Examples of setting change commands include a setting change instruction command (A1029), a probability setting change command (A1041), a probability setting value change command (A2415), and a probability setting change end command (A2421). When the MODE section represents a setting change command (result of B1325 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes a setting change information setting process (B1326) and ends the single-shot command process. In the setting change information setting process, the contents of the setting change command are stored and a process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a setting change instruction command is received, the setting change information setting process displays a setting change instruction display on the display device 41 to prompt the player to change the setting. Furthermore, when a command is received indicating that the probability setting is being changed, the setting change information setting process displays a setting change in progress display on the display device 41 to inform the player that the setting is being changed.

When the MODE section does not represent a setting change command (result of B1325 is "N"), the performance control device 300 judges whether the MODE section represents a setting confirmation command (B1327). Examples of setting confirmation commands include a command for checking the probability setting value (A2508) and a command for ending the probability setting value check (A2512). When the MODE section represents a setting confirmation command (result of B1327 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes a setting confirmation information setting process (B1328) and ends the single-shot command processing. In the setting confirmation information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation command are stored and processing corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command for checking the probability setting value is received, the setting confirmation information setting process displays a setting confirmation display on the display device 41 to inform the player that the setting is being confirmed.

Next, it is determined whether the MODE section represents a command to stop a pattern (B1329). Note that the command to stop a pattern includes, for example, a command to stop a pattern of special pattern 1 and a command to stop a pattern of special pattern 2. Then, if the MODE section represents a command to stop a pattern (the result of B1329 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the command of the MODE section is a normal command (B1330).

If the command in the MODE section is a normal command (result of B1330 is "Y"), the presentation control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special symbol (B1331), sets the game status flag to the normal state after all symbols have stopped (B1332), and ends the single-shot command processing. In the processing of B1332, as an example, the game status flag is set to the normal state, but depending on the timing at which this processing is executed, the game status flag is set to a flag of "changing", "big hit", or "small hit".

On the other hand, if the MODE section does not represent a command to stop the pattern (the result of B1329 is "N"), or if the command in the MODE section is not normal (the result of B1330 is "N"), the performance control device 300 ends the single-shot command processing.

[Predictive pattern command processing]
Next, the details of the pre-reading symbol command processing (B1214) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the pre-reading symbol command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first determines whether the latest reserved information is information on special chart 1 reservation (special chart 1 start memory), for example, whether the most recently received decorative special chart reservation number command is a decorative special chart 1 reservation number command (B1601). If the latest reserved information is information on special chart 1 reservation (result of B1601 is "Y"), it saves a look-ahead pattern command (look-ahead stop pattern command) in the special chart 1 look-ahead pattern command area corresponding to the special chart 1 reservation number (B1602).

If the latest reserved information is not information on reserved special chart 1 (result of B1601 is "N"), i.e., if the most recently received decorative special chart reserved number command is a decorative special chart 2 reserved number command, the performance control device 300 saves a look-ahead pattern command (look-ahead stop pattern command) in the special chart 2 look-ahead pattern command area corresponding to the special chart 2 reserved number (B1603).

After steps B1602 and B1603, the performance control device 300 sets a look-ahead fluctuation system command reception waiting flag (B1604) indicating that it is waiting to receive a look-ahead fluctuation system command. This is because the look-ahead pattern system command and the look-ahead fluctuation system command are a set, so the look-ahead fluctuation system command is sent from the game control device 100 following the look-ahead pattern system command. Then, the look-ahead pattern system command processing is terminated.

[Look-ahead variable command processing]
Next, the details of the look-ahead variable command processing (B1216) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the look-ahead variable command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first determines whether or not it is waiting to receive a look-ahead fluctuation system command (B1701). If the above-mentioned look-ahead fluctuation system command waiting to receive flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that it is waiting to receive a look-ahead fluctuation system command. If it is not waiting to receive a look-ahead fluctuation system command (result of B1701 is "N"), it ends the look-ahead fluctuation system command processing. If it is waiting to receive a look-ahead fluctuation system command (result of B1701 is "Y"), it clears the look-ahead fluctuation system command waiting to receive flag (B1702).

Next, the performance control device 300 (sub-board) sets a look-ahead fluctuation MODE conversion table corresponding to the reserved number of the pattern (special pattern 1 or special pattern 2) of the latest reserved information (B1703), and acquires a sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE section corresponding to the MODE section of the look-ahead fluctuation command (B1704). Next, it sets a look-ahead fluctuation ACT conversion table (B1705), and acquires a sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command ACT section corresponding to the ACTION section (ACT section) of the look-ahead fluctuation command (B1706).

Next, the performance control device 300 judges whether the converted MODE section and ACT section (i.e., the sub-intra look-ahead variable command MODE section and ACT section) are both other than 0 (B1707). If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a value other than 0. If the converted MODE section and ACT section are both other than 0 (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the converted command consisting of the converted MODE section and ACT section is saved in the look-ahead variable command area (special chart 1 look-ahead variable command area or special chart 2 look-ahead variable command area) corresponding to the latest pending information and number of pending items (B1708). Then, a look-ahead command consistency check process is executed (B1709) to judge whether the combination of the converted MODE section and ACT section is normal (B1710).

The time of the first half of the fluctuation corresponding to the MODE section changes depending on the number of reserved items when the reserved items start the fluctuation display game. If there are no other reserved items when the reserved items start the fluctuation display game, the first half of the fluctuation will be longer, and if new reserved items are generated and the number of reserved items is large, the first half of the fluctuation will be shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half of the fluctuation changes, the MODE section of the received look-ahead fluctuation command is converted to the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE section so that the internal command of the performance control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

In addition, since the type of reach is not related to the number of reserved positions, the latter half of the fluctuation corresponding to the ACT section of the sub-sub look-ahead fluctuation command does not depend on the number of reserved positions. However, since there are different types of reaches of the same system, if the performance control device 300 were to use the ACT section (value of the latter half of the fluctuation) of the look-ahead fluctuation command as is without converting it, the number would increase and checking would become difficult. For example, even with normal reaches, there are types such as normal reach -1 stop miss and normal reach +1 stop miss. Therefore, by converting the ACT section indicating a reach of the same system to the same sub-sub look-ahead fluctuation command ACT section, the number can be reduced, and the burden of checking processes such as the look-ahead command consistency check process can be reduced.

Next, if at least one of the converted MODE and ACT sections (i.e., the sub-intra look-ahead variable command MODE and ACT sections) is 0 (the result of B1707 is "N"), or if the combination of the converted MODE and ACT sections is not normal (the result of B1710 is "N"), the performance control device 300 determines that there is an abnormality in the converted command and terminates the look-ahead variable command processing.

If the combination of the MODE section and the ACT section after conversion is normal (result of B1710 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 loads the pending information to be read ahead (latest pending information) from the look-ahead variable command area (B1711) and executes a look-ahead lottery process for the latest pending look-ahead performance (B1712). Examples of look-ahead performance include continuous preview performance (including chance eye look-ahead performance), look-ahead zone performance, and hold change notice. Next, it is determined whether or not the latest pending look-ahead performance (hold change notice, etc.) will occur (B1713). If the latest pending look-ahead performance will occur (result of B1713 is "Y"), point information corresponding to the selected look-ahead performance is set (B1714).

Then, the performance control device 300 determines whether the look-ahead performance (hold change notice, etc.) that will occur is a performance that will start immediately (B1715). If the look-ahead performance that will occur is a performance that will start immediately (the result of B1715 is "Y"), it sets a display corresponding to the selected look-ahead performance (B1716). Then, the look-ahead change command processing ends.

On the other hand, if the most recently reserved look-ahead performance does not occur (the result of B1713 is "N"), or if the look-ahead performance that occurs is not a performance that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is "N"), the performance control device 300 ends the look-ahead variation command processing as is.

[Pattern Command Processing]
Next, the details of the symbol-related command processing (B1210) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to Fig. 42. Fig. 42 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol-related command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 sets a special pattern type corresponding to the MODE section of the received pattern command (decorative special pattern 1 command or decorative special pattern 2 command) (B1801). The special pattern type is special pattern 1 or special pattern 2. Then, a pattern type corresponding to the combination of the MODE section and ACTION section (ACT section) of the pattern command is set and saved in a specified area such as RAM (B1802). Here, since the pattern allocation ratio differs between special pattern 1 and special pattern 2, a table is used for each MODE to set the pattern type. In this embodiment, the symbol types correspond to the losing symbols, 2R sure-win symbols (2R-A1, etc.), 2R normal jackpot symbols (2R-A2, etc.), 6R sure-win symbols (6R-A1, etc.), 6R normal jackpot symbols (6R-A2, etc.), 16R sure-win symbols (16R-A1, etc.), and 16R normal jackpot symbols (16R-A2, etc.) shown in FIG. 27.

[Variable command processing]
Next, the details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to Fig. 43. Fig. 43 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 judges whether the special symbol type (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) of the received fluctuation system command (fluctuation command) is undetermined (B1901). If the special symbol type is undetermined (the result of B1901 is "Y"), the fluctuation system command processing is terminated. If the special symbol type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received fluctuation system command and pattern command is checked (B1902), and it is judged whether the fluctuation system command and the pattern type are inconsistent (B1903). Here, inconsistency means a contradiction in the performance, such as when a fluctuation system command for a losing symbol is received but a pattern command for a winning symbol is received. If the fluctuation system command and the pattern type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y"), the fluctuation system command processing is terminated.

If the fluctuation command and the pattern type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), the performance control device 300 determines the fluctuation pattern type from the fluctuation command (fluctuation command) (B1904), and executes a fluctuation performance setting process to set the fluctuation performance, which is a performance that is fluctuating (B1905). Note that there are multiple performances for the same fluctuation command. Next, the game status flag indicating the game status (P machine status) is set to "special chart fluctuating" (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading performances of the consecutive preview performance (the remaining number of consecutive preview performances) is not 0, it is updated by -1 (B1907).

[Variable performance setting process]
Next, the details of the variable performance setting process (B1905) in the variable command process (FIG. 43) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable performance setting process executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first determines whether the fluctuation pattern type is a non-reach fluctuation (a fluctuation that does not reach a reach state) (B2001). If the fluctuation pattern type is a non-reach fluctuation (the result of B2001 is "Y"), it sets a first half preview distribution group address table corresponding to the number of performance points, model code, special chart type, performance mode, and setting value (probability setting value) (B2002), and obtains the address of the first half preview distribution group table corresponding to the MODE section of the fluctuation system command (fluctuation command) and the reserved number of special chart type (B2003). In the case of a non-reach fluctuation, the more reserved number there is, the shorter the fluctuation time will be, so the address of the table corresponding to the reserved number is obtained.

If the variation pattern type is not a no-reach variation (the result of B2001 is "N"), i.e., if it is a reach variation, the performance control device 300 sets a first half preview distribution group address table corresponding to the number of performance points, model code, special symbol type, performance mode, symbol type, and setting value (probability setting value) (B2004), and obtains the address of the first half preview distribution group table corresponding to the MODE section of the variation system command (variation command) and the variation pattern type (B2005).

After steps B2003 and B2005, the performance control device 300 performs a lottery for the notice that appears during the first half of the fluctuation (before the reach) (B2006). The probability of drawing the notice depends on the set value. Next, a second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of performance points, the model code, the special symbol type, the performance mode, the symbol type, and the set value (probability setting value) is set (B2007), the address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT part of the fluctuation system command is obtained (B2008), and a lottery for the notice that appears during the second half of the fluctuation (during the reach) is performed (B2009). The probability of drawing the notice depends on the set value. After that, the content of the fluctuation performance corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the fluctuation system command (fluctuation command) is determined (B2010). The fluctuation time and the main reach content can be determined from the fluctuation system command.

Next, the performance control device 300 determines the content of the performance (pre-notification performance) corresponding to the result of the pre-notification lottery (B2011). After that, depending on the content of the pre-notification performance and the variable performance such as a reach performance, for example, a stopping pattern setting process is executed to determine the stopping pattern of the decorative special chart variable display game (B2012). Here, the decorative stopping pattern is specifically determined, such as determining the scattering pattern in the case of a losing pattern.

Next, the performance control device 300 sets the display of variable performances such as reach performances (B2013), and sets the display of preview performances (B2014). Next, the display of the reserved reduction (reserved shift) corresponding to the special chart type is set, and for example, a display is set to reduce the reserved display corresponding to the currently changing decorative special chart (B2015). Next, an audio number that determines the performance mode (sound output mode) by the speaker's audio, and a decoration number that determines the performance mode by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B2016). The decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) has multiple decorative light-emitting parts (decorative LEDs, etc.), and emits light in a light-emitting mode (color and light-emitting timing of each LED, etc.) determined by the decoration number.

In addition to setting the audio number and decoration number based on the content of the performance, it is also possible to set them by drawing a lottery with a lottery probability according to a set value (probability setting value). In this way, the player can enjoy guessing the setting value (probability setting value) of the gaming machine 10 from the light emission mode of the decoration device, i.e., the light emission mode of the decorative light-emitting unit (LED).

Next, the performance control device 300 performs display settings for decorative special pattern changes corresponding to the special pattern type (B2017), and performs display settings for a fourth pattern change related to a fourth special pattern (fourth pattern, identification information) in addition to the aforementioned first to third special patterns that change on the display device 41 (B2018). The fourth pattern change is displayed on the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) of the aforementioned lamp display device 80 provided outside the display device 41.

[Hit command processing]
Next, the details of the winning command processing (B1208) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to Fig. 45. Fig. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first determines whether the MODE section of the received winning command represents fanfare (B2101). If the MODE section of the winning command represents fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, if the winning command is a big win fanfare command or a small win fanfare command, it executes a fanfare performance setting process to set a fanfare performance (B2102). The fanfare command includes information on the upper limit of the number of rounds for this big win. Next, the game status flag indicating the current game status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10 is set to "in fanfare" (B2103), and the winning command processing is terminated. The upper limit of the number of rounds can also be obtained from the pattern type determined from the pattern command (the decorative special pattern command corresponding to the stopped pattern pattern).

If the MODE section of the received winning command does not represent a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "N"), the performance control device 300 determines whether the MODE section of the winning command represents a round (B2104). If the MODE section represents a round (the result of B2104 is "Y"), that is, if the winning command is a round command or a small winning open command, the performance control device 300 executes a round performance setting process, sets the game status flag indicating the current game status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10 to "round in progress" (B2105, B2106), and ends the winning command processing.

If the MODE section of the received winning command does not represent a round (result of B2104 is "N"), the presentation control device 300 judges whether the MODE section of the winning command represents an interval (B2107). If the MODE section represents an interval (result of B2107 is "Y"), that is, if the winning command is an interval command, the presentation control device 300 executes an interval presentation setting process, sets the game status flag indicating the current game status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10 to "interval in progress" (B2108, B2109), and ends the winning command processing. Note that if the large prize opening is opened only once by a small win, that is, if the small win is one round, there is no interval command.

If the MODE section of the received winning command does not represent an interval (the result of B2107 is "N"), the presentation control device 300 judges whether the MODE section of the winning command represents an ending (B2110). If the MODE section represents an ending (the result of B2110 is "Y"), that is, if the winning command is an ending command or a small winning end screen command, the presentation control device 300 executes an ending presentation setting process to set an ending presentation, sets the game status flag indicating the current game status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10 to "ending" (B2111, B2112), and ends the winning command processing.

If the MODE section of the received hit command does not represent an ending (the result of B2110 is "N"), the performance control device 300 ends the hit command processing without performing any processing.

[Actions and Effects of the First Embodiment]
According to the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is provided with a gaming control means (gaming control device 100) capable of displaying a variable display game on a display unit (e.g., the first special chart variable display unit 51 or the second special chart variable display unit 52) that variably displays identification information based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., winning a prize in a start winning slot), and generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player when the stopping result of the variable display game is a special result. The setting change means (e.g., the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102) can change the setting related to the gaming conditions (or the setting related to the game) when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 10. The gaming control means (gaming control device 100) can transition to a setting variable state in which the setting can be changed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 10, and displays a predetermined display on the display unit regardless of the state of the gaming machine 10 at the time of power off before transitioning to the setting variable state (FIG. 34).

Therefore, in the setting variable state (setting change in progress), a specific display on the display unit for the special chart change display game, which is easily visible from the front of the gaming machine 10, can indicate that the setting is being changed or that the gaming machine 10 is in a state where play (for example, a change display game) is not possible. Note that if the state of the gaming machine 10 at the time of power off is maintained even in the setting variable state, and the display unit for the special chart change display game continues to show normal displays when the change stops (miss symbols, jackpot symbols, etc.), this may lead to the mistaken belief that play is possible, for example, if the front frame 12 (main body frame) is closed before the setting change is completed.

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) can display a variable display game on a light-emitting unit (e.g., LED lamps D1 and D2) that variably displays identification information based on the establishment of a starting condition. The game machine 10 includes this light-emitting unit and a display device (collective display device 50) that includes other light-emitting units different from the light-emitting unit. The game control means may cause all light-emitting units of the display device to flash when in a setting variable state in which the settings can be changed (FIG. 34F).

Therefore, in the setting variable state (settings being changed), by displaying something different from normal on the display device (collective display device 50), it is possible to clearly indicate on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is in a state where play is not possible.

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) may display information suggesting that the setting is variable on a display unit (e.g., the first special chart change display unit 51 or the second special chart change display unit 52) when in a setting variable state (setting is being changed) (Figure 34B).

Therefore, when in a setting variable state (settings being changed), by displaying something different from normal on the display section for the variable display game, it is possible to clearly indicate on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is in a state where play is not possible.

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) may turn off the display units (e.g., the first special chart change display unit 51 and the second special chart change display unit 52) in the setting variable state (during setting change) (Figure 34D).

Therefore, in the setting variable state (settings being changed), by displaying a different display from normal on the display section for the variable display game (a display different from when the variable display game stops changing), it is possible to clearly indicate on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is in a state where play is not possible.

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) may display, in a setting variable state, on the display unit (e.g., the first special chart variable display unit 51 or the second special chart variable display unit 52) a display that is the same as the stop result (miss result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the jackpot result) (Figure 34C).

Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), by displaying a specified message on the display unit for the variable display game, it is possible to indicate to the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is not currently playing a game. By displaying the stop results (miss results) of the variable display game other than special results (other than jackpot results) during setting change, it becomes unnecessary to set initial values for the data to be displayed on the display unit for the variable display game when the setting change is completed.

[Second embodiment]
The second embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 46 to 55. Note that configurations other than those described below may be similar to those of the first embodiment. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first embodiment, and duplicate descriptions are appropriately omitted.

In the second embodiment, if there is a mismatch between the part identification information (first identification information) of the detachable part (component, member) 510 and the model identification information (second identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10, the mismatch is reported as an error.

[Amusement machine parts]
46 shows a state where a detachable part 510 is attached to the gaming machine 10. The part 510 is assigned with electrically readable part identification information. For example, the part 510 may be a plate-shaped member on which model information (model logo, etc.) of the gaming machine 10 to be attached is displayed, or may be a movable role that constitutes the frame presentation device or the board presentation device 44, or a decorative member having an LED of the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46. The part 510 can be attached to the gaming machine 10 at the gaming facility for reasons such as being an obstacle when the gaming machine is brought into the gaming facility (game store), and there is a possibility that an inexperienced attendant will attach the part to the wrong model.

As shown in FIG. 46(A), for example, if part 510A for model A is attached to model A of gaming machine 10, no problem occurs. However, as shown in FIG. 46(B), for example, if part 510B for model B is attached to model A of gaming machine 10, a problem occurs, and the performance control device 300 notifies an error via speakers 19a, 19b and display device 41.

Figure 47 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment. When the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the gaming control device 10 transmits a model designation command indicating the model (type) of the gaming machine 10 to the performance control device 300 (A1035, A1045). The performance control device 300 selects and sets model identification information corresponding to the received model designation command (B1301) from a reference table (Figure 55 described below). The performance control device 300 also compares the part identification information read from the part 510 with the set model identification information. Furthermore, if the part identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) do not match, the performance control device 300 notifies the mismatch as an error.

The part 510 has an identification board 513 that holds part identification information. In the identification board 513, the part identification information is set by one or more wirings 519 (electrical wires) to which a predetermined voltage is applied. In FIG. 46, the wirings 519 are pulled up to a predetermined voltage via a pull-up resistor, but a pull-up resistor need not be provided. Note that power (voltage) to the part 510 is supplied, for example, from the performance control device 300 or the power supply device 400 when the part 510 is attached.

In FIG. 47, each of the multiple wirings 519 (multiple electric wires) is connected to a specific terminal among multiple (eight) terminals (ports) in the parallel-serial conversion unit 516. In this way, part identification information such as "01111100" can be transmitted via the parallel-serial conversion unit 516, with a specific terminal to which a specific voltage is input as a bit with a value of "1" and a terminal to which a specific voltage is not input (wire 519 is not connected) as a bit with a value of "0".

That is, the identification board 513 is assigned part identification information as parallel data by a plurality of wirings 519. Then, the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 converts the input part identification information (parallel data) into serial data and transmits it to the performance control device 300 by serial communication ( ^I2C in this case).

Figure 48 shows another example of the identification board 513. In Figure 48, the part identification information is set by the dip switch 521. Each of the multiple wirings 519 is set to a predetermined voltage or ground voltage by the dip switch 521, and information for each bit ("1" or "0") of the part identification information is input to multiple (8) terminals (ports) in the parallel-serial conversion unit 516. In the example of Figure 48, the terminal connected to the wiring 519 with the dip switch 521 turned on is set to ground voltage (bit with value "0"), and the terminal connected to the wiring 519 with the dip switch 521 turned off is set to a predetermined voltage (bit with value "1").

[Parallel-serial conversion section]
FIG. 49 shows the configuration of the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 when the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 is a normal parallel-serial conversion IC.

The parallel-serial conversion unit 516 has the configuration of a normal parallel-serial conversion IC equipped with multiple D-type flip-flops 516a (D-FF). The parallel-serial conversion unit 516 converts parallel data (e.g., "01111100") as part identification information input from terminals 0 to 7 (ports 0 to 7) into serial data, and transmits the serial data to the performance control device 300 via a connection line SDA (data line) by serial communication (I ² C communication in this case). The performance control device 300 has a master IC 300a for I ² C communication, and inputs a clock signal for the multiple D-type flip-flops 516a to the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 via a connection line SCL (timing signal line).

The multiple D-type flip-flops 516a (D-FF) form a shift register in which each bit of parallel data moves from right to left in synchronization with a clock signal. The bit data of each D-type flip-flop 516a at a certain clock timing moves to the adjacent D-type flip-flop 516a at the next clock timing. Each bit of parallel data is taken into the multiple D-type flip-flops 516a at a certain clock timing, and is sequentially output as serial data from the leftmost D-type flip-flop 516a. In other words, the output of the serial data is completed eight clocks after the parallel data is taken in.

[First Modification of Identification Board]
50 shows a first modified example of identification board 513 of part 510. In the first modified example, parallel-serial conversion unit 516 of identification board 513 is not a normal parallel-serial conversion IC, but an input ^I2C I/O expander 815 (slave IC). Input ^I2C I/O expander 815 inputs part identification information input from ports 0 to 7 to master IC 300a of performance control device 300 as data.

The ^I2C I/O expander 815 (slave IC) includes a transistor 830 connected to the connection line SDA, a filter 831 connected to the connection line SDA, a driver 832 connected to the connection line SDA, a filter 833 connected to the connection line SCL, a bus controller 834, and a reset signal generating circuit 839. It further includes a bus monitoring WDT (watchdog timer) 840 for determining whether the connection line SDA is occupied by another ^I2C I/O expander 815, and a self-occupancy WDT 841 for determining whether the ^I2C I/O expander 815 itself occupies the connection line SDA.

The connection line SDA is a connection line for transmitting and receiving data signals between the master IC 300a of the performance control device 300 and the ^I2C I/O expander 815 (slave IC), and functions as a data line. The connection line SCL is a connection line for inputting and outputting a clock signal used for data communication on the connection line SDA, and functions as a timing signal line.

The filter 831 is connected to the connection line SDA, removes noise from the data (such as a response signal or address data) input from the connection line SDA, and outputs the noise-removed data to the bus controller 834.

When outputting data (such as part identification information) from connection line SDA to master IC 300a, driver 832 applies a voltage to transistor 830 that enables transistor 830 to operate.

Transistor 830 is a field effect transistor (FET) to reduce power consumption. The gate of transistor 830 is connected to driver 832, the drain is connected to a connection line SDA to which a predetermined voltage is applied by a pull-up resistor R, and the source is grounded.

When the driver 832 outputs data (such as part identification information) from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a, the driver 832 applies a voltage to the gate of the transistor 830 that allows the transistor 830 to operate in order to pass a current between the drain and source of the transistor 830. The driver 832 then outputs the data from the connection line SDA by repeatedly changing the voltage of the connection line SDA from HIGH to LOW.

The filter 833 is connected to the connection line SCL, removes noise from the data input from the connection line SCL, and outputs the noise-removed data to the bus controller 834.

Moreover, a unique address is set in the I ² C I/O expander 815 by address setting terminals A0 to A3 provided in the I ² C I/O expander 815, and the address is input to the bus controller 834. Furthermore, an address for resetting the I ² C I/O expander 815 is also set in advance.

The unique address (8 bits) of the ^I2C I/O expander 815 is composed of a fixed address section consisting of the upper 3 bits and a variable address section consisting of the lower 5 bits. The fixed address section is preset to a specific value (e.g., "110") and cannot be changed by the ^I2C I/O expander 815.

The variable address section is composed of a 4-bit I2C ^I /O expander address corresponding to the pattern set in terminals A0 to A3 of the ^I2C I/O expander 815, and 1-bit R/W identification data indicating whether the data is a read request or a write request. In the input ^I2C I/O expander 815, "1" is normally registered in the R/W identification data in response to a read request.

The bus controller 834 judges whether the address of the data input from the connection line SDA matches the unique address set in the I ² C I/O expander 815, and if they match, outputs the data (parts identification information) from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a. A predetermined voltage is applied to predetermined ports (five in this case) among the eight ports 0 to 7 (terminals 0 to 7) in the I ² C I/O expander 815 by connecting a plurality of wirings 519. Therefore, 8-bit parts identification information (for example, "01111100") is input as parallel data to the bus controller 834 via the eight ports 0 to 7. Note that a predetermined port to which a predetermined voltage is input corresponds to a bit with a value of "1", and the other terminals (to which the wiring 519 is not connected) correspond to a bit with a value of "0".

In addition, the bus controller 834 determines whether the address of the data input from the connection line SDA matches the reset address set in the ^I2C I/O expander 815, and if they match, it takes in the data as initialization instruction data (initialization command RES) and initializes the ^I2C I/O expander 815.

When the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH eight times and the bus controller 834 outputs the eighth bit of data (parts identification information), and the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from HIGH to LOW, the master IC 300a outputs a response signal from the connection line SDA to the bus controller 834. When it is confirmed that the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH and the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from HIGH to LOW again, the master IC 300a opens the connection line SDA. In other words, the master IC 300a outputs a response signal when the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH nine times.

The reset signal generating circuit 839 is connected to a Vcc terminal connected to a connection line Vcc that supplies power to the I ² C I/O expander 815, and a RESET terminal that receives a reset signal from the outside.

When the I ² C I/O expander 815 is powered on and the voltage rises to a predetermined value, the reset signal generating circuit 839 generates a reset signal and inputs the generated reset signal to the bus controller 834 for initialization.

Therefore, when the harness is unplugged, the connection line Vcc for supplying power to the logic is temporarily disconnected, and when the harness is plugged back in, the power supply is restored and the reset signal generating circuit 839 outputs a reset signal. Note that the bundle of the connection line Vcc for supplying power to the logic, the connection line SDA, the connection line SCL, and the ground line GND is called the harness.

The bus monitor WDT 840 is used to detect that the connection line SDA is occupied by another ^I2C I/O expander 815. The bus monitor WDT 840 is connected to a reset signal generating circuit 839, and when a predetermined time has elapsed since the connection line SDA was occupied, the bus monitor WDT 840 activates its own reset signal generating circuit 839 to initialize the ^I2C I/O expander 815.

The self-occupied WDT 841 is used to detect the occupancy of the connection line SDA by itself (the ^I2C I/O expander 815). When the self-occupied WDT 841 operates continuously for a certain period of time, the self-occupied WDT 841 causes the reset signal generating circuit 839 to generate a reset signal to initialize the ^I2C I/O expander 815.

[Second Modification of Identification Board]
51 shows a second modified example of the identification board 513 of the part 510. In the second modified example, the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 of the identification board 513 is not a normal parallel-serial conversion IC, but an output ^I2C I/O expander 815 (slave IC). Also, in the second modified example, the part 510 is equipped with a performance device and can perform a performance. The performance device is, for example, a decorative device such as an LED (light-emitting unit), but may also be a movable accessory.

Based on the performance control data received from master IC 300a of performance control device 300, output ^I2C I/O expander 815 controls the output state (here, light emission state) of the performance device (here, LED, light emitting unit) provided in part 510 via output ports 0 to 15. Note that ^{I2C I} /O expander 815 uses its own unique address (8 bits) as part identification information and inputs it to master IC 300a of performance control device 300.

The output I ² C I/O expander 815 is obtained by adding to the input I ² C I/O expander 815 (FIG. 50) an output setting register 835, an output controller 836, a driver 837 connected to each port 0 to 15 (terminals 0 to 15) on the output side of the I ² C I/O expander 815, and transistors 838A to 838P connected to each port 0 to 15. For this reason, explanations of the same configuration as the input I ² C I/O expander 815 (FIG. 50) will be omitted where appropriate.

The filter 831 is connected to the connection line SDA, removes noise from the data (in this case, performance control data, response signals, etc.) input from the connection line SDA, and outputs the noise-removed data to the bus controller 834.

When outputting data (here, part identification information, a response signal, etc.) from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a, the driver 832 applies a voltage to the transistor 830 that enables the transistor 830 to operate.

When outputting data (such as part identification information or a response signal) from the connection line SDA, the driver 832 applies a voltage to the gate of the transistor 830 that allows the transistor 830 to operate in order to pass a current between the drain and source of the transistor 830. The driver 832 then outputs the data from the connection line SDA by repeatedly changing the voltage of the connection line SDA from HIGH to LOW.

The bus controller 834 judges whether the address of the data input from the connection line SDA matches the unique address set in the ^I2C I/O expander 815, and if they match, outputs data (parts identification information, response signal, etc.) from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a. The part identification information output to the master IC 300a is the unique address (8 bits) of the ^I2C I/O expander 815 as described above, or is separately set identification information different from the unique address (set via a port as in the first modified example or stored in a storage unit (memory)). It is not necessarily necessary to output the part identification information from the bus controller 834 to the master IC 300a, and the performance control device 300 may be configured to recognize the address of the transmitted data as part identification information when it receives a response signal from the bus controller 834.

In addition, when the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH eight times and the eighth bit of performance control data is acquired from the connection line SDA, the bus controller 834 outputs a response signal from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a when the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from HIGH to LOW. Furthermore, when it is confirmed that the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH and the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from HIGH to LOW again, the connection line SDA is opened. In other words, the bus controller 834 outputs a response signal when the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH nine times.

The operation mode of the I ² C I/O expander 815 and the output states of ports 0 to 15 are set in the output setting register 835. When the bus controller 834 receives initialization instruction data from the connection line SDA and the I ² C I/O expander 815 is initialized, the output setting register 835 is set to an initial state so that no current flows to any of the ports 0 to 15.

The output controller 836 actually controls the output state (here, the light emission state) of the performance devices (here, LEDs, light-emitting elements) connected to each port 0 to 15 by passing a current (output of lighting data) through the performance devices (here, LEDs, light-emitting elements) via the port driver 837 based on the data set in the output setting register 835. When the bus controller 834 takes in the performance control data from the connection line SDA, this output state is updated to the content specified in the performance control data.

In other words, the output setting register 835 is set based on the performance control data received from the master IC 300a, and when a stop condition is received, the output state of each port 0 to 15 is updated and reflected in the performance device.

When a current flows through a port, the driver 837 applies a voltage to the transistors 838A-838P connected to the port through which the current flows, allowing the transistors to operate.

The gates of transistors 838A to 838P are connected to driver 837, the drains are connected to a port terminal that connects to a connection line to which a voltage is applied to operate the performance device, and the sources are grounded.

If the voltage applied to the gates of transistors 838A-838P is equal to or greater than a predetermined value that activates transistor 838, the predetermined voltage applied to the gate from the drive power supply flows through the drain of transistor 838 to its source, which is grounded, thereby controlling the output state of the performance device (here, an LED) connected to the port terminal.

[Third Modification of Identification Board]
52 shows a third modified example of the identification board 513 of the part 510. In this third modified example, the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 of the identification board 513 is not present, and a predetermined voltage is input directly from a plurality of wires 519 to an input port 300b (ports 0 to 7) of the performance control device 300 as 8-bit part identification information (for example, "01111100"). The part identification information input to the input port 300b is taken into the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 via the data bus 340. Note that a predetermined terminal to which a predetermined voltage is input corresponds to a bit with a value of "1", and other terminals (to which wires 519 are not connected) correspond to bits with a value of "0".

Then, the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the performance control device 300 executes a process to notify an error that there is a mismatch between the part identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information).

[Main processing (performance control device)]
53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process (main program) according to the second embodiment. The main process is executed by the performance control device 300 (main control microcomputer 311) when the power to the gaming machine 10 is turned on (restored).

The main processing in the second embodiment is the same as that in Figure 36 except that a parts matching process (B5000) has been added. As the other processes are the same as those in Figure 36, the same step numbers are used and the explanation is omitted.

In the part matching process, the part identification information read from the part 510 is compared with the model identification information corresponding to the model specification command (B1301), and if the part identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) do not match, an error notification is issued to warn the user. In this embodiment, the part matching process (B5000) is executed after the received command check process (B0014).

The parts matching process (B5000) is first executed when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and is then repeatedly executed by the loop process from steps B0008 to B0021.

[Parts matching process]
Next, the details of the parts matching process (B5000) in the main process (FIG. 53) will be described with reference to Fig. 54. Fig. 54 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the parts matching process executed by the performance control device 300.

First, the performance control device 300 updates the matching time timer (timing means) by -1 if it is not 0 (B5001). The matching time timer determines the matching timing or matching time interval for reading the part identification information and matching (comparing) it with the model identification information. Then, it is determined whether the matching time timer is 0 or not (B5002). If the matching time timer is not 0 (the result of B5002 is "N"), it is not time to match, so the parts matching process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the matching time timer is 0 (result of B5002 is "Y"), it is matching time, so the performance control device 300 reads the part identification information from the part 510 (B5003). Then, it compares (matches) the part identification information (first identification information) with the model identification information (second identification information) (B5004). Note that the model identification information is set based on the model designation command as information indicating the type (model) of the gaming machine in the model setting process (B1302) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on.

The performance control device 300 stores the reference table of FIG. 55 in a memory (e.g., program ROM 321). In the reference table of FIG. 55, model designation commands are associated with model identification information. In this way, the performance control device 300 holds model identification information (second identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine.

Next, the performance control device 300 judges whether the part identification information and the model identification information match (B5005). If the part identification information and the model identification information do not match (the result of B5005 is "N"), an error notification is issued to notify that the part identification information and the model identification information do not match (B5006). In other words, it is issued to notify that the part 510 is attached to an incorrect model that is not compatible (corresponding) to the part 510. The performance control device 300 may issue an error notification (warning) by generating a sound from the speakers 19a and 19b or by displaying text on the display device 41. Here, the performance control device 300 may also refer to the reference table in FIG. 55 and, together with the error notification, notify the correct model that is compatible (corresponding) to the part 510. The correct model is a model that has the same model identification information as the part identification information of the part 510.

The performance control device 300 then sets the initial value of the matching time timer (B5007) and ends the parts matching process. Therefore, starting from when the power is turned on, the parts identification information and the model identification information are compared (matched) periodically each time the time equivalent to the initial value of the matching time timer has elapsed. The initial value of the matching time timer is, for example, a time equivalent to several minutes, but is not limited to this.

On the other hand, if the part identification information and model identification information match (the result of B5005 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 does not report an error, because the part 510 is attached to the correct model that is compatible with (corresponding to) the part 510, and sets the initial value of the matching time timer (B5007) and ends the part matching process.

When the above part matching process is performed, for example, if part 510B for model B is attached to model A of the gaming machine 10 (FIG. 46(B)), the model identification information (e.g., "01111100") and the part identification information (e.g., "01111101") do not match, and an error notification is issued. Along with the error notification, the correct model (model B) that is compatible with part 510B may be notified. On the other hand, for example, if part 510A for model A is attached to model A of the gaming machine 10 (FIG. 46(A)), the model identification information (e.g., "01111100") and the part identification information (e.g., "01111100") match, and no error notification is issued.

As a modified example, the performance control device 300 may not store the reference table of FIG. 55 in memory (e.g., program ROM 321) and may only hold model identification information (second identification information) corresponding to one type of model. In this case as well, the performance control device 300 compares the part identification information read from the part 510 with the held model identification information, and if there is a mismatch between the part identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information), an error is notified that there is a mismatch.

[Actions and Effects of the Second Embodiment]
According to the second embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game (e.g., a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of a starting condition), and a presentation control means (presentation control device 300) capable of executing presentations related to the game. The gaming machine 10 includes a removable part (part 510) to which electrically readable first identification information (part identification information) is assigned. The presentation control means holds second identification information (model identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10, reads the first identification information of the part and compares it with the second identification information, and notifies the mismatch when the first identification information (part identification information) and the second identification information (model identification information) do not match.

Therefore, even if the wrong part (part 510) is installed, an appropriate notification can be given. This makes it possible to prevent operation of a gaming machine 10 in an amusement arcade (game facility) where a part (part 510) has been installed incorrectly.

According to the second embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, the presentation control means reads the first identification information of the part (part 510) and compares it with the second identification information at least when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, and if the first identification information and the second identification information do not match, notifies the user of the mismatch. Therefore, even if the wrong part (part 510) is installed, this can be notified when the power is turned on. This makes it possible to quickly and reliably prevent the operation of a gaming machine 10 in an amusement arcade (game facility) that has had a part (part 510) installed incorrectly.

According to the second embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the presentation control means receives information about the model of the gaming machine 10 from the gaming control means, selects second identification information (model identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10 from a table (reference table), and compares the first identification information of the part (part 510) with the selected second identification information. Therefore, for various models of gaming machine 10, if an incorrect part (part 510) is installed, this can be notified. Also, the correct model to which the incorrect part should be installed can be notified.

According to the second embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, the first identification information (part identification information) of the component (part 510) can be set by one or more wirings that are pulled up to a predetermined voltage, so that the first identification information can be easily set.

According to the second embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, the first identification information can be set in the component (part 510) by a dip switch, so that the first identification information can be set easily.

[Third embodiment]
The third embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 56 to Fig. 71. Note that the configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment. The third embodiment relates to the confirmed display period of the probability setting value. Note that the confirmed display period is a period for displaying the confirmed value of the probability setting value.

[Game control device according to the third embodiment]
First, the timing of external information output at the time of changing the setting according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the game control system of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 of the third embodiment is similar to the game control device 100 of the first embodiment, but the probability setting value display device 143 attached to the game control device 100 is incorporated into the status display device 152. That is, the status display device 152 also functions as the probability setting value display device 143 of the first embodiment. In addition, a RAM initialization switch 112 (RAM clear switch) is attached to the game control device 100 of the third embodiment in addition to the setting value change switch 102 (setting value change button).

[Transition state when power is turned on]
57 is a diagram for explaining the transition state when the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment is turned on (power restored). Depending on the on/off state of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on, the gaming machine 10 transitions to one of four states (modes) as shown in FIG.

First, when the power is turned on, if the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are on, the RAM is cleared and then the system transitions to a setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value can be changed (A1036-A1041 in FIG. 5A). In this RAM clear, the clearing process of step A1036 is executed, and the clear area #2 is specified as the RAM area to be cleared by the RAM clear start address 2 set in A1021 in FIG. 5C. Note that in the third embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, in steps A1024 and A1028 in FIG. 5A, it is determined whether both the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are on. Also, unlike the first embodiment, in step A1025 in FIG. 5A, it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on, not the setting value change switch 102.

Next, when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 93 is on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, the device transitions to a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed. The transition to the setting confirmation state can be executed in steps A2504-A2508 of the probability setting value confirmation process (Figure 11) during the timer interrupt process after normal power recovery (A1031-A1035).

Also, when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 93 is off but the RAM initialization switch 112 is on, the RAM initialization process (RAM clear process) of steps A1042-1045 is executed, and as shown in FIG. 5C, clear area #2 is specified as the RAM area to be cleared by the RAM clear start address 2, and the RAM is cleared. Note that in the RAM clear, clear area #3 may be specified as the RAM area to be cleared by the RAM clear start address 3.

If the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the power is simply restored.

[Probability setting value change process]
Next, the details of the probability setting value change process (A1308) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to Fig. 58. Fig. 58 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting value change process according to the third embodiment.

The probability setting value change process of the third embodiment is the same as that of FIG. 10 in that the positions of steps A2412, A2414, and A2415 are changed and steps A2411 and A2413 are deleted. The other steps are the same as those of FIG. 10, so the same step numbers are used and the explanation is omitted.

In the processing of step A2416, if the setting key switch 93 is in the OFF state (result of A2416 is "Y"), the game control device 100 loads the value of the working probability setting value area and saves it in the probability setting value area (A2412). The setting value is confirmed by turning off the setting key switch 93, and the value 0 to 5 corresponding to the confirmed probability setting value is stored in the probability setting value area.

The game control device 100 then sets a probability setting value changed flag indicating that the probability setting value has been changed (A2414), and sends a probability setting value change command indicating that the probability setting value has been changed to the performance control device 300 (performance control board) (A2415). Thereafter, as in the first embodiment, it executes the processing of steps A2417-A2421, returns to the main processing (FIG. 5B), and proceeds to the processing of step A1049. Here, in step A2420, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display area, and the confirmed probability setting value becomes displayable on the status display device 152 in which the probability setting value display device 143 is incorporated.

[Processing when receiving setting values]
Next, the setting value reception process (B1324) in the single command process will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 59. Fig. 59 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the setting value reception process according to the third embodiment.

The performance control device 300 first determines whether the received command is a normal command (B5201). If the received command is not a normal command (result of B5201 is "N"), the setting value reception process ends.

If the received command is a normal command (result of B5201 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 obtains information indicating the current date and time (current time) from the RTC 338 (or the time timer) (B5202), and determines whether the received command is a setting value information command at the end of the setting change (B5203). The setting value information command at the end of the setting change is the setting value information command sent from the game control device 100 together with the command to end the probability setting change in step A2421 of the probability setting value change process. If the received command is not the setting value information command at the end of the setting change (result of B5203 is "N"), the setting value reception process is terminated.

If the received command is a setting value information command for the end of the setting change (result of B5203 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 associates the setting value with the current date and time (current time) and stores them in memory (B5204), and ends the processing when the setting value is received. The memory here is FeRAM 323, which can retain memory contents even when power is not supplied.

In addition, if the received command is not a setting value information command for when the setting change is completed, i.e., a setting value information command for when a power outage is restored (A1035) or a setting value information command for when the RAM is initialized (A1045) (the result of B5203 is "N"), the setting value (probability setting value) may be stored in RAM322 without being associated with the current date and time.

[Segment LED Editing Process]
Next, referring to FIG. 60, details of the segment LED editing process (A1314) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the segment LED editing process according to the third embodiment. In the segment LED editing process, settings are made regarding the driving of the segment LEDs constituting the special chart 1 reserve indicator 54, the special chart 2 reserve indicator 55, the normal chart reserve indicator 56, the first game status indicator 57, the second game status indicator 58, the third game status indicator 59, and the round indicator 60 provided in the collective display device 50. Although not shown in FIG. 60, in the segment LED editing process, when the special chart 1 indicator 51, the special chart 2 indicator 52, and the variable indicator 53 for the normal chart variable display game are controlled for light emission other than the variable display game, the light emission control (light-off control, light-on control, blinking control) of the special chart 1 indicator 51, the special chart 2 indicator 52, and the variable indicator 53 may be executed in the same manner as the light emission control of the reserve indicators 54-56. In addition, in the variable display game, the control for making the special chart 1 display 51, the special chart 2 display 52, and the variable display unit 53 emit light (blink) is executed by the pattern variable control process (Figure 29).

The game control device 100 first increments the blinking control timer by +1 (A9201) and determines whether it is time to turn on the output (A9202). If the specific bit of the blinking control timer is 1, it determines that it is time to turn on the output. In this embodiment, the specific bit is bit 5, so a blinking cycle of 128 ms can be created (see FIG. 2B).

If it is output-on timing (result of A9202 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the normal map reserved number display table 1 (A9203), and if it is not output-on timing (result of A9202 is "N"), it sets the normal map reserved number display table 2 (A9204), obtains the display data corresponding to the normal map reserved number, and saves it in the segment area of the normal map reserved indicator 56 (lamp D15, D16) (A9205). If the reserved number is 0 to 2, the display data is the same in both normal map reserved number display tables 1 and 2, so the normal map reserved indicator 56 does not blink, but if the reserved number is 3 to 4, the display data of normal map reserved number display table 1 and the display data of normal map reserved number display table 2 are different, so the normal map reserved indicator 56 blinks (see Figure 2B).

Next, the game control device 100 judges whether it is output on timing or not (A9206). If it is output on timing (the result of A9206 is "Y"), it sets special chart 1 reserved number display table 1 (A9207). If it is not output on timing (the result of A9206 is "N"), it sets special chart 1 reserved number display table 2 (A9208), and obtains the display data corresponding to the special chart 1 reserved number and saves it in the segment area of the special chart 1 reserved indicator 54 (lamp D11, D12) (A9209).

Next, the game control device 100 judges whether it is output on timing or not (A9210). If it is output on timing (the result of A9210 is "Y"), it sets special chart 2 reserved number display table 1 (A9211). If it is not output on timing (the result of A9210 is "N"), it sets special chart 2 reserved number display table 2 (A9212), obtains display data corresponding to the special chart 2 reserved number, and saves it in the segment area of the special chart 2 reserved indicator 55 (lamp D13, D14) (A9213).

Then, the game control device 100 sets a round display LED display table that specifies the display mode on the round display unit 60 (lamps D3-D7) (A9214), obtains the display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer, and saves it in the segment area of the round display unit 60 (A9215).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a game status display table 1 in which the display mode of the second game status display unit 58 (lamp D9), the third game status display unit 59 (lamp D17), etc. is specified (A9216). Furthermore, the display data corresponding to the game status display number is obtained and saved in the segment area of each game status display unit (A9217).

The game control device 100 then sets game status display table 2, which specifies the display mode of the first game status display unit 57 (lamp D8) (A9218). Furthermore, it obtains the display data corresponding to game status display number 2 and saves it in the segment area of the first game status display unit 57 (A9219). Thereafter, it ends the segment LED editing process.

[Timing chart of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed]
Next, the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described with reference to Fig. 61. Fig. 61 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed according to the third embodiment.

After the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on at time x1, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on with the RAM initialization switch 112 turned on at time x2, the state of the gaming machine 10 (gaming machine state) becomes the setting change mode (setting variable state), and the state display device 152 displays an undetermined probability setting value (undetermined value) (probability setting value display (undetermined value)). In the probability setting value display (undetermined value) of the state display device 152, the undetermined probability setting value is displayed flashing. In addition, in response to the setting change mode being set at time x2, the display device 41 displays a display of a predetermined display mode that indicates that the setting is being changed. The collective display device 50 (first display device), the lamp display device 80 (fourth pattern), and the decoration device are maintained in an off state. The decoration device has a frame decoration device 18 such as the decoration devices 18a, 18b, a board decoration device 46 such as the upper performance unit 40c, and a decoration light-emitting unit (LED). Additionally, the decorative device may be in a dimmed state rather than being turned off, or only the light-emitting parts other than the specific color may be turned off.

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x3, the gaming machine state becomes a playable state in which play can be performed, and the determined probability setting value (determined value) is displayed on the status display device 152 (second display device) (probability setting value display (determined value)). In the probability setting value display (determined value) of the status display device 152, the determined probability setting value is displayed lit. When the gaming machine state is a playable state, the setting value cannot be changed or confirmed. In addition, in response to the state becoming playable at time x3, the special pattern 1 display 51 and/or the special pattern 2 display 52 of the collective display device 50 display identification information of a losing pattern (main special pattern display), and the display device 41 displays a customer waiting demo. Note that the customer waiting display may be executed by flashing the display parts (lamp D3-D18) other than the special pattern 1 display 51 and the special pattern 2 display 52 of the collective display device 50. The lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are in normal display. In addition, when the probability setting value is determined at time x3, a sound or voice may also be used to notify the player that the probability setting value has been determined.

Time x4 is the time when a predetermined time (a predetermined period, for example, 2 to 3 seconds) has passed since time x3. When time x4 arrives, the status display device 152 (second display device) ends the probability setting value display and starts a full blinking display, repeatedly switching between a full off display and a full on display for all segments at a predetermined time interval. The full blinking display of the status display device 152 is performed using a blinking control timer used in the segment LED editing process of FIG. 60, and may be synchronized with the same blinking cycle as the blinking display of the display section of the collective display device 50 (the aforementioned customer waiting display).

Note that time x4 is not limited to when a predetermined time (e.g., 2 to 3 seconds) has passed since time x3, but may also be when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is closed or when a touch switch signal from the operating handle 24 is detected. In this way, when switching from a setting change state to a playable state in which the setting value cannot be changed, the confirmed setting value can be confirmed for a predetermined time (e.g., 2 to 3 seconds) on the status display device 152. Therefore, the confirmed setting value can be viewed without having to re-enter the setting confirmation mode after changing the setting, improving the work efficiency of the amusement facility manager.

Time x5 is the time when a predetermined time (predetermined period, for example, 0.5 sec) has passed since time x4. When time x5 arrives, the status display device 152 stops all blinking and starts displaying the performance (displaying the ratio of the features), and the ratio of the features is displayed. Note that instead of displaying information about the ratio of the features, the status display device 152 may display information about the payout rate, number of balls discharged, and base value (payout rate in normal game mode) (displaying the payout rate, displaying the number of balls discharged, displaying the base value). Note that, as described above, the ratio of the features and the payout rate (including the base value) are derived based on the number of winning balls obtained by winning, and are performance information that indicates the performance of the gaming machine. The status display device 152 can then execute a performance display that displays the performance information.

Note that the probability setting value display (undetermined value) from time x2 is displayed as a flashing display, and the probability setting value display (determined value) of the status display device 152 from time x3 is displayed as a lit display, but these flashing and lit displays may be interchanged, with the probability setting value display (undetermined value) being displayed as a lit display and the probability setting value display (determined value) being displayed as a flashing display.

[Example of display screen when changing settings]
Fig. 62 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the display device 41 (third display device) during setting change (setting change mode, setting variable state) according to the third embodiment. In Fig. 62, the display screen of the display device 41, as well as the lamp display device 80 and the upper performance unit 40c of the decorative device are also shown above the display screen.

As shown in FIG. 62 (sa), when the performance control device 300 receives a command that the probability setting is being changed (A1041), it displays a setting change in progress display 721 on the display screen of the display device 41, indicating that the setting is being changed. Also, as described above, the lamp display device 80 and the upper performance unit 40c are turned off while the setting is being changed. Note that the performance control device 300 may also notify the user that the setting is being changed by sound or voice along with the setting change in progress display 721.

In FIG. 62(l), a customer waiting demo screen 722 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 in response to the game being ready to play after the setting has been changed. When the game is ready to play, the lamp display device 80 and the upper performance unit 40c are in normal display, and a part of the upper performance unit 40c lights up or flashes in accordance with the customer waiting demo, as shown in black in FIG. 62(l). As described above, the lamp display device 80 is made up of lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) that perform a variable display (flashing) as the fourth symbol (fourth special symbol), and lamp display units 3-6 (LEDs) for notifying the start memory number of each special symbol variable display game, so that it is turned off in normal display (light off display), but a part of it may light up or flash in accordance with the customer waiting demo.

Figure 62 (su) shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the customer waiting demo ends and the special chart change display game (change display game) starts due to the special chart 2 change start process (A3202) or the special chart 1 change start process (A3206). The customer waiting demo screen 722 shown in Figure 62 (shi) is hidden, and the decorative first patterns A to C are displayed in a changeable manner in the change display area 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, center area 610C). In addition, the lamp display device 80 and the upper performance unit 40c are in a performance mode in which a part of them lights up or blinks in accordance with the special chart change display game. The reserved digestion area 640 displays the special chart change pending display 643 (start memory display, special chart digestion pending display) corresponding to the special chart change display game being executed (being digested). The reserved display unit 630 displays the first start memory and the second start memory that are on hold. For example, if the special chart change display game is started after the customer waiting demo, the pending display section 630 will have no pending first start memory or second start memory, as shown in FIG. 62 (su).

[Modification of the timing chart of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed]
Next, referring to FIG. 63, a modified example of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described. FIG. 63 is a timing chart showing a modified example of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed according to the third embodiment. In the following explanations of FIG. 63, FIG. 64, FIG. 66, and FIG. 67, explanations that overlap with FIG. 61 will be omitted as appropriate.

As mentioned above, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x3 and the gaming machine state switches from the setting change mode to a playable state, the status display device 152 starts flashing all over.

Then, at time x4', a predetermined time (predetermined period, for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed since time x3, the status display device 152 switches the display from full flashing to probability setting value display (determined value). After switching the display to the probability setting value display, the status display device 152 starts displaying the performance (display of the ratio of the game devices and the ball payout rate) at time x5', a predetermined time (predetermined period, for example, 2 to 3 sec) has elapsed, and displays the ratio of the game devices. In this way, the setting key switch 93 is turned off, and the status display device 152 is turned to a full flashing display in response to the setting change mode being changed to a playable state, so that it is possible to clearly indicate to the amusement facility manager that the setting has been determined. In addition, the setting value determined by the probability setting value display is then displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 sec), so that the amusement facility manager can check the determined setting value as it is, thereby improving work efficiency.

As in FIG. 61, after the probability setting value is displayed, all the lights may flash at time x5' for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 sec) before performance display begins.

[Second modified example of the timing chart of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed]
Next, a second modified example of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described with reference to Fig. 64. Fig. 64 is a timing chart showing a second modified example of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed according to the third embodiment.

As mentioned above, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x3 and the gaming machine state switches from the setting change mode to a playable state, the state display device 152 starts displaying the probability setting value.

Then, at time x4, which is a predetermined time (e.g., 2 to 3 seconds) after time x3, the status display device 152 switches the display from the probability setting value display to the notification display. The notification display is a display that notifies the user that the setting has been confirmed, as described later in FIG. 65. After switching the display to the notification display, at time x5, which is a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds), the status display device 152 starts displaying the performance (display of the role ratio and ball payout rate) and displays the role ratio.

In addition, at time x3, before the probability setting value display (determined value) is performed on the status display device 152, the entire display may flash or a notification display may be performed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 sec). Also, if a notification display is performed before the probability setting value display (determined value) is performed on the status display device 152 at time x3, instead of displaying a notification, the entire display may flash from time x4 to time x5 after the probability setting value display (determined value).

[Display mode when changing the setting of the status display device]
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of a display form when changing settings of the status display device 152 according to the second modified example of the third embodiment.

First, FIG. 65(a) shows the display state of the status display device 152 when the power is turned off up to time x2 in FIG. 64, and all four 7-segment displays (8 segments including the dots) of the status display device 152 are turned off.

Figure 65 (b) shows the display mode of the status display device 152 when displaying the probability setting value display (undetermined value, determined value) from time x2 to time x4, with the current probability setting value (e.g., "6") displayed in digit 3 on the left side of the status display device 152, and the seven segments other than digit 3 (digits 2, 1, and 0) turned off. Note that the current probability setting value (e.g., "6") displayed in digit 3 on the left side of the status display device 152 flashes in the probability setting value display (undetermined value) from time x2 to time x3, and is lit in the probability setting value display (determined value) from time x3 to time x4.

Figure 65 (c) shows the display mode of the status display device 152 when a notification display is being displayed from time x4 to time x5. Digits 0 to 3 of the status display device 152 display upper and lower bars indicating that the probability setting value has been determined. Note that the notification display displayed in digits 0 to 3 of the status display device 152 is not limited to being displayed using upper and lower bars, and may be displayed in a different display mode from the probability setting value and performance display.

Figure 65 (d) shows the display mode of the status display device 152 that displays performance after time x5. As shown in Figure 65 (d), the status display device 152 displays the ball payout rate (e.g., "b1.35") for the most recent predetermined number of balls discharged (e.g., 10,000 balls) as a performance display. The status display device 152 may also display the overall ball payout rate (e.g., "bL.35" shown in Figure 102) from when the gaming machine 10 is turned on to the present, the base value, and the ratio of special features, and these displays may be switched at a predetermined interval (e.g., 2 to 3 seconds).

[Third modified example of the timing chart of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed]
Next, a third modified example of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described with reference to Fig. 66. Fig. 66 is a timing chart showing a third modified example of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed according to the third embodiment.

As described above, after the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x3, when the special chart 2 change start process (A3202) or the special chart 1 change start process (A3206) is performed at time x4'', the special chart 1 display 51 or the special chart 2 display 52 of the collective display device 50 starts changing the main special chart display (display of identification information) from the losing pattern that was stopped and displayed, and the special chart change display game (change display game) starts. At the same time, on the display screen of the display device 41, the customer waiting demo ends and the decorative special chart change display game (change display game) starts. In response to the start of the special chart change display game of the collective display device 50 (first display device) and the display device 41 (third display device), the lamp display device 80 starts the special chart change display game (change display game) and the reserved number display by the fourth pattern, and the decorative device performs a performance corresponding to the performance of the special chart change display game.

Then, at time x5'', which is a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 sec) after time x4'', the status display device 152 stops all flashing and starts displaying performance (displaying the ratio of roles and payout rate). In this way, by starting all flashing and displaying performance in response to the start of the special chart variation display game without waiting for the passage of the predetermined time, information related to the game can be displayed early.

The status display device 152 is not limited to a mode in which it starts full flashing when the special chart 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) or the special chart 1 fluctuation start process (A3206) is performed, i.e., when a game ball enters the normal fluctuation winning device 37 or the start winning port 36, but may start full flashing when a game ball enters the general winning port 35 or when a game ball passes through the normal chart start gate 34. Also, as in the example in Figure 61 described above, it may start full flashing when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is closed or when a touch switch signal from the operating handle 24 is detected.

[Fourth modified example of the timing chart of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed]
Next, a fourth modified example of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described with reference to Fig. 67. Fig. 67A is a timing chart showing a fourth modified example of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed according to the third embodiment.

When the power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned on at time x2, the gaming machine state is changed to the setting change mode, and the collective display device 50, the lamp display device 80, and the decoration device of the fourth modified example start to blink all at once. At that time, the blinking period of the collective display device 50 is controlled by the segment LED editing process of FIG. 60, and the blinking period of the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are also set to be the same as the blinking period of the collective display device 50, and the blinking timing of each device is synchronized. The gaming control device 100 may send a command to the performance control device 300 to synchronize the blinking timing between the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device controlled by the performance control device 300 and the collective display device 50. In addition, when the status display device 152 blinks to display the probability setting value, the blinking of the status display device 152 may be controlled using a blinking control timer used in the segment LED editing process, and the blinking timing of the collective display device 50 and the blinking timing of the status display device 152 may be synchronized.

The all-in-one display device 50 may flash on and off using all display units (light-emitting units, LED lamps D1-D18) as shown in FIG. 34F, or it may flash on and off using only the display units 51, 52 (LED lamps D1, D2) for the special chart variation display game. Also, the all-in-one display device 50 may flash on and off using LED lamps (e.g. LED lamps D3-D18) other than the display units 51, 52 (D1, D2) for the special chart variation display game.

Then, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x3, the gaming machine state changes from the setting change mode to a playable state, and the collective display device 50, lamp display device 80, and decoration devices stop flashing. At time x3, the collective display device 50 stops displaying the identification information of the losing pattern (main special pattern display), and the lamp display device 80 and decoration devices return to normal display. In addition, the status display device 152 displays the confirmed probability setting value (confirmed value) (probability setting value display), and the setting change display on the display screen of the display device 41 ends and the customer waiting demo begins.

Next, when a predetermined time (e.g., 2 to 3 sec) has elapsed since time x3 and it becomes time x5''', the status display device 152 ends the probability setting value display (fixed value) and starts the performance display (display of the ratio of the device and the ball payout rate). In this way, in the status display device 152 according to the fourth modified example, after the probability setting value display (fixed value) is ended, the performance display (display of the ratio of the device and the ball payout rate) is immediately performed without all blinking, so that the amusement facility manager can check the ball payout rate etc. early after changing the setting. In addition, when it becomes time x5''', the collective display device 50 and the display device 41 start the special chart variable display game (variable display game), the lamp display device 80 performs the special chart variable display game (variable display game) and the reserved number display by the fourth pattern, and the decoration device displays a display corresponding to the performance of the special chart variable display game (performance corresponding display).

[Timing chart of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value when confirming the setting]
Next, the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value during the setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) will be described with reference to Fig. 68. Fig. 68 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value during the setting confirmation according to the third embodiment.

After the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on at time x11, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off at time x12 and the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the state of the gaming machine 10 (gaming machine state) becomes the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state), and the state display device 152 displays the confirmed probability setting value (confirmed value) (probability setting value display). Then, the display screen of the display device 41 displays the stop pattern as shown in FIG. 69 described later (stop pattern display). When the gaming machine state is in the setting confirmation mode, the collective display device 50, the lamp display device 80, and the decoration device are, for example, in a fully lit state with all segments and LEDs fully lit (partially lit states are also acceptable). In addition, the collective display device 50 may display the stop pattern of the identification information of the previous special chart variation display game in the setting confirmation mode. In addition, when transitioning to the setting confirmation mode, the stop pattern displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 becomes the stop pattern of the identification information of the previous special chart variation display game.

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x13, the gaming machine state changes from the setting confirmation mode to a playable state, and the status display device 152 displays a performance display (display of the ratio of game features and payout rate display). In addition, in response to the gaming machine state being changed to a playable state at time x13, the collective display device 50 displays the pattern (identification information) displayed immediately before (when the power was cut off) as the main special pattern (main special pattern display (last displayed pattern)). Then, a customer waiting demo is started on the display screen of the display device 41, and the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are displayed normally. In this way, when the setting confirmation state is switched to a playable state, the performance information can be immediately displayed as a performance display on the status display device 152 (second display device), which can improve the work efficiency of the amusement facility manager.

Although the performance display is immediately displayed on the status display device 152 at time x13, it may alternatively be made to flash fully for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 sec) before displaying the performance, as in the timing chart for when the setting is changed shown in FIG. 63. In this way, by displaying a display (full flashing display) on the status display device 152 that is different from the probability setting value and performance display between the setting confirmation mode and the playable state, the amusement facility manager can more easily and reliably grasp that the state has been switched to the playable state.

[Example of display screen when changing settings]
Fig. 69 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the display device 41 (third display device) during setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) according to the third embodiment. In Fig. 69, the display screen of the display device 41, as well as the lamp display device 80 and the upper performance unit 40c of the decorative device, are also shown above the display screen. In the following explanations of Figs. 69 and 71, explanations that overlap with Fig. 62 will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 69 (Se), the performance control device 300 fully lights up the lamp display device 80 and the upper performance unit 40c of the decorative device upon receiving a command indicating that the probability setting is being confirmed (A2508, B1327). In this way, the lamp display device 80 and the decorative device will have a different light emission mode during setting confirmation than when the setting is being changed (FIG. 62). Note that the performance control device 300 may also issue an announcement (by sound, etc.) to indicate that the setting is being confirmed when the lamp display device 80 and the upper performance unit 40c are fully lit. On the other hand, the display screen of the display device 41 displays the stopped pattern (stop result) of the identification information of the previous special chart change display game, resulting in a display mode that does not indicate that the setting is being confirmed.

In FIG. 69 (s), after the settings are confirmed and the machine is ready to play, a customer waiting demo screen 722 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. When the machine is ready to play, the lamp display device 80 and the upper performance unit 40c are displayed normally.

Figure 69 (Ta) shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the customer waiting demo ends and the special chart variable display game (variable display game) starts due to the special chart 2 variable start process (A3202) or the special chart 1 variable start process (A3206). As in Figure 62 (Su), the customer waiting demo screen 722 is hidden, the decorative first patterns A to C are displayed variably in the variable display area 620, and the lamp display device 80 and the upper performance unit 40c light up or flash in accordance with the special chart variable display game.

[Modified example of timing chart for confirmation display period of probability setting value when confirming the setting]
Next, referring to FIG. 70, a modified example of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value during setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) will be described. FIG. 70 is a timing chart showing a modified example of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value during setting confirmation according to the third embodiment. In the following description of FIG. 70, the description overlapping with FIG. 68 will be omitted as appropriate.

As described above, when the power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned on at time x12 with the RAM initialization switch 112 turned off, the gaming machine state switches to the setting confirmation mode. In the setting confirmation mode of this modified example, the display screen of the display device 41 displays a list of setting confirmation display 723 showing the setting history of the probability setting value so far, as described later in FIG. 71 (se'), and the display mode shows that the setting is being confirmed (setting confirmation display (setting history display)). In addition, the state display device 152 displays the confirmed setting value (probability setting value display (confirmed value)), and the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device start to flash all. The collective display device 50 remains in the off state. Note that the setting confirmation display is not limited to the setting history display, and may be in any display mode that shows that the setting is being confirmed, for example, by using characters or the like to display that the setting is being confirmed. In addition, the setting confirmation display may be notified by sound or voice that the setting is being confirmed.

After that, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x13, the gaming machine state changes from the setting confirmation mode to a playable state, and the display screen of the display device 41 ends the setting confirmation display (setting history display) and starts a customer waiting demo. In response to the gaming machine state being changed to a playable state at time x13, the status display device 152 displays a performance display (display of the ratio of roles and payout rate), and the collective display device 50 displays the pattern (identification information) displayed immediately before (when the power was cut off) as the main special pattern (main special pattern display (last displayed pattern)). In addition, the lamp display device 80 and the decorative devices return to normal display.

[Example of display screen when changing settings]
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a modified example of the display screen of the display device 41 during setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) according to the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 71 (Se'), the performance control device 300 displays the setting confirmation display 723 on the display screen of the display device 41 by receiving a probability setting confirmation command (A2508, B1327). The setting confirmation display 723 is a display that allows the setting history of the probability setting value to be displayed in a list, and for example, as shown in FIG. 61 (Se'), the setting history number, date, changed setting contents, etc. are displayed in a list. As explained in FIG. 59, each time the performance control device 300 receives a setting value information command at the end of the setting change (the result of B5203 is "Y"), it associates the setting value with the setting change date and time when the setting value was confirmed (the date and time when the setting change ended) and stores them in the FeRAM 323 (B5204). Therefore, the performance control device 300 reads the setting value and the setting change date and time from the FeRAM 323 to display a list of the setting history of the probability setting value on the setting confirmation display 723. The lamp display device 80 and the upper performance unit 40c of the decoration device will be fully flashing during the setting confirmation mode.

In FIG. 71 (s'), after the settings are confirmed and the machine is ready to play, a customer waiting demo screen 722 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41, and the lamp display device 80 and upper performance unit 40c are displayed normally.

Figure 71 (ta'), like Figure 62 (su) and Figure 69 (ta), shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the customer waiting demo ends and the special chart variable display game (variable display game) starts. On the display screen of the display device 41, the customer waiting demo screen 722 is hidden, the first decorative patterns A to C are displayed variably in the variable display area 620, and the lamp display device 80 and upper performance unit 40c light up or flash in accordance with the special chart variable display game.

[Actions and Effects of the Third Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment is equipped with a control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a special gaming state in which gaming value is awarded to the player when the display result of a variable display game (special chart variable display game) which variably displays identification information (identification pattern, main special chart) becomes a special result (jackpot result mode, jackpot stopping pattern, special result mode). The gaming machine 10 is provided in a gaming area 32 and includes winning areas (general winning port 35, start winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37, and large winning port of special variable winning device 39) in which gaming balls can win, a payout control means (payout control device 200) that can pay out a number of prize balls set for each winning area when a gaming ball wins in the winning area, a first display device (all-in-one display device 50) that can display information related to the game, a setting change means (setting change device 42, RAM initialization switch 112) that can change setting values related to the game conditions (setting values, probability setting values), and a second display device (status display device 152) that can display the setting values and performance information derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning (given device ratio, payout rate for the most recent predetermined number of balls discharged, overall payout rate, base value). The control means changes the display of the first display device to a predetermined display mode (e.g., off display, all blinking display) in response to the setting change means changing the setting value to a changeable setting state (setting change mode, setting variable state) in which the setting value can be changed, and is capable of displaying the confirmed setting value on the second display device for a predetermined period (predetermined time, e.g., 2 to 3 sec) in response to the setting change means changing the setting value from the setting change state to a playable state in which the setting value cannot be changed.

With this type of gaming machine 10, when switching from a setting change state to a playable state in which the setting value cannot be changed, the confirmed setting value can be confirmed on the second display device for a specified period (predetermined time), thereby improving the work efficiency of the gaming center manager.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the control means (gaming control device 100) displays the confirmed setting value on the second display device (status display device 152) in response to being changed from the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state) to the playable state until a signal related to the game (for example, a detection signal when a gaming ball that has entered the normal variable winning device 37, the start winning port 36, or the general winning port 35 is detected, a signal notifying that a gaming ball has passed through the normal starting gate 34, a signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64, or a touch switch signal from the operating handle 24) is detected. With such a gaming machine 10, performance information is displayed when a signal related to the game is detected, so the gaming center manager can check the performance information immediately after changing the setting.

The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment is equipped with a control means (gaming control device 100) capable of generating a special gaming state in which gaming value is awarded to the player when the display result of a variable display game (special chart variable display game) that variably displays identification information (identification pattern, main special chart) becomes a special result (jackpot result mode, jackpot stopping pattern, special result mode). The gaming machine 10 is provided in a gaming area 32 and is equipped with winning areas (general winning port 35, start winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37, large winning port of special variable winning device 39) in which gaming balls can win, a payout control means (payout control device 200) that can pay out a number of prize balls set for each winning area when a gaming ball wins in the winning area, a first display device (all-in-one display device 50) that can display information related to the game, setting confirmation means (setting key switch 92, RAM initialization switch 112) that can confirm setting values related to the game conditions (setting values, probability setting values), and a second display device (status display device 152) that can display the setting values and performance information derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning (given device ratio, payout rate for the most recent predetermined number of balls discharged, overall payout rate, base value). The control means can change the display of the first display device to a predetermined display mode (e.g., full lighting display, display of the stopped symbols of the identification information of the previous special chart variation display game) in response to the setting being changed by the setting confirmation means to a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting value can be confirmed, and can display performance information on the second display device in response to the setting being changed from the setting confirmation state to a playable state in which the setting value cannot be confirmed by the setting confirmation means.

With this type of gaming machine 10, when the setting confirmation state is switched to a playable state in which the setting values cannot be confirmed, performance information can be immediately displayed on the second display device, thereby improving the work efficiency of the gaming center manager.

The gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment further includes a setting change means (setting change device 42, RAM initialization switch 112) that can change the setting value (setting value, probability setting value) when the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state) is entered. In response to entering the setting confirmation state, the control means (game control device 100) changes the display of the first display device (all-in-one display device 50) to a display when the setting change state is entered (probability setting value display) or a display related to the game (for example, full lighting display). With such a gaming machine 10, the display mode of the first display device differs between the setting confirmation state and the setting change state, so that the gaming center manager can easily distinguish between the setting confirmation state and the setting change state, improving work efficiency.

The gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment also includes a third display device (display device 41) capable of displaying effects related to the variable display game (special chart variable display game), and a performance control means (performance control device 300) capable of controlling the display of effects on the third display device. The performance control means displays a history of setting changes on the third display device in response to being placed in a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode). With this gaming machine 10, even if the first display device (all-in-one display device 50) is not in a display state that indicates that it is in a setting confirmation state, the gaming center manager can see that it is in a setting confirmation state from the third display device and can check the setting history.

In response to being placed in the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode), the control means (game control device 100) changes the display mode of the first display device (collective display device 50) to a mode that displays the display results (stopping symbols, identification information) of the immediately preceding variable display game (special chart variable display game). With such a gaming machine 10, the display mode of the first display device differs between the setting confirmation state and the setting change state, allowing the gaming center manager to easily distinguish between the setting confirmation state and the setting change state, improving work efficiency. Also, since there is no need to have the first display device perform a dedicated display mode in the setting confirmation state, the processing load and data volume can be reduced accordingly.

The control means (game control device 100) immediately displays performance information (role ratio, payout rate for the most recent predetermined number of balls discharged, overall payout rate, and base value) on the second display device (status display device 152) in response to changing from the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) to the playable state. With such a gaming machine 10, the amusement center manager can immediately check the performance information by changing from the setting confirmation state to the playable state, thereby improving work efficiency.

In response to being switched from the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) to the playable state, the control means (game control device 100) changes the display of the second display device (state display device 152) to a different mode from the display when the setting confirmation state is entered (probability setting value display) or the display of performance information (role ratio, payout rate for the most recent predetermined number of discharged balls, overall payout rate, base value), and displays the performance information on the second display device after changing the display of the second display device to the different mode. With such a gaming machine 10, immediately after the playable state is entered, a display different from these displays is displayed on the second display device, making it easier for the amusement facility manager to more reliably grasp that the state has been switched to the playable state.

[Fourth embodiment]
The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 72 and 73. Note that configurations other than those described below may be similar to those of the first to third embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to third embodiments, and duplicate descriptions are appropriately omitted in the description.

Figure 72 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a game control system according to the fourth embodiment. Figure 73 is a diagram showing the addresses of the input ports in the game control device 100 according to the fourth embodiment and the signals input to each input port.

The game control system in the fourth embodiment is basically the same as that in the third embodiment (Figure 56), but there are some differences as follows:

In the third embodiment, the setting key switch 93, the setting value change switch 102, and the RAM initialization switch 112 are all connected to the same input port (input port 123) (Figure 56).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 72, in the fourth embodiment, the RAM initialization switch 112 is connected to the input port 123, and the setting value change switch 102 and the setting key switch 93 are connected to the input port 124. In other words, the RAM initialization switch 112, the setting value change switch 102, and the setting key switch 93 are connected to different input ports, which is different from the third embodiment.

As mentioned above, if the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are on when the power is turned on, the device transitions to the setting variable state (see Figure 57).

In this case, in the third embodiment, the gaming microcomputer 111 constituting the gaming control device 100 specifies the address of the input port 123 and acquires the on signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the on signal of the setting key switch 93 from the input port 123.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the gaming microcomputer 111 specifies the address of the input port 123 (81H, FIG. 73) to obtain an ON signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 from the input port 123, and specifies the address of the input port 124 (82H, FIG. 73) to obtain an ON signal of the setting key switch 93 from the input port 124.

That is, in the fourth embodiment, the input ports (122, 123, 124) from which the above-mentioned ON signals are obtained may be different from each other. For example, the gaming microcomputer 111 does not specify the address of the input port 124 (82H, FIG. 73) to obtain the ON signal of the RAM initialization switch 112, and does not specify the address of the input port 123 (81H, FIG. 73) to obtain the ON signal of the setting key switch 93.

As shown in FIG. 73, input port 122 (address: 80H (hexadecimal notation)), input port 123 (address: 81H (hexadecimal notation)), and input port 124 (address: H82 (hexadecimal notation)) have different addresses.

In addition, each input port is assigned to receive various signals (on signals, off signals). In the same input port, the various signals can be identified by the position of the bits (b0-b6). By increasing or decreasing the number of bits, it is possible to increase or decrease the number of signals that can be connected to one input port.

In addition, in the following, negative logic (for example, when the signal is off, it indicates that there is an abnormality or operation) and positive logic (when the signal is on, it indicates that there is an abnormality or operation) are mixed with respect to the presence or absence of a signal abnormality or switch operation, but it is also possible to unify the logic into either negative or positive.

For example, the frame radio wave illegal signal (b0), payout busy signal (b1), payout abnormality status signal (b2), shoot ball out switch signal (b3), overflow switch signal (b4), touch switch signal (b5), and out ball detection switch signal (b6) are input to the input port 122 (80H). Note that the various signals, including those mentioned below, are explained in the first embodiment.

When the frame radio wave error signal (b0) is on (High: 1), it indicates that a frame radio wave error has occurred, and when it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that it is normal (no abnormality).

When the payout busy signal (b1) is on (High: 1), it indicates that a payout command cannot be sent, and when it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that a payout command can be sent.

When the payout abnormality status signal (b2) is on (High: 1), it indicates that there is an abnormality in the payout, and when it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that it is normal (no abnormality).

When the shot ball out switch signal (b3) is on (High: 1), it indicates that the shot ball has run out, and when it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that the state is normal (no abnormality).

When the overflow flow switch signal (b4) is on (High: 1), it indicates an overflow state, and when it is off (Low: 0), it indicates normal (no abnormality).

When the touch switch signal (b5) is on (High: 1), it indicates that the operating handle 24 (Figure 3) is being touched, and when it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that it is not being touched.

When the out ball detection switch signal (b6) is on (High: 1), it indicates that an out ball has been detected, and when it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that an out ball has not been detected. Note that instead of a configuration for detecting out balls, a configuration for detecting launched balls may be applied.

For example, the panel radio wave sensor signal (b0), the abnormality detection signal (b1), the magnetic sensor signal (b2), the glass frame open detection switch signal (b3), the main frame open detection switch signal (b4), the RAM initialization switch signal (b5), and the power outage monitoring signal (b6) are input to the input port 123 (81H).

When the panel radio wave sensor signal (b0) is on (High: 1), it indicates normal (no abnormality), and when it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that a panel radio wave error has occurred.

When the abnormality detection signal (b1) is on (High: 1), it indicates that an abnormality has occurred related to the abnormality detection signal (first embodiment), and when it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that the condition is normal (no abnormality).

When the magnetic sensor signal (b2) is on (High: 1), it indicates that the condition is normal (no abnormality), and when it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that the magnetic sensor switch 61 (Figure 72) has detected that a magnetic error has occurred.

The glass frame open detection switch signal (b3) indicates that the glass frame open detection switch 63 (Fig. 72) has detected that the glass frame 15 (Fig. 1) is in a closed state when it is on (High: 1), and indicates that it has detected that the glass frame 15 (Fig. 1) is in an open state when it is off (Low: 0).

When the main frame open detection switch signal (b4) is on (High: 1), it indicates that the front frame open detection switch 64 (Figure 72) has detected that the main frame (front frame 12, Figure 1) is in a closed state, and when it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that it has detected that it is in an open state.

When the RAM initialization switch signal (b5) is on (High: 1), it indicates that the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (not pressed), and when it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that it is on (pressed) (a state in which settings can be changed).

When the power outage monitoring signal (b6) is on (High: 1), it indicates that the system is normal (no abnormalities), and when it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that a power outage has occurred.

For example, the gate switch signal (b0), the prize winning port switch signal (b1), the big prize winning port switch signal (b2), the start port 1 switch signal (b3), the start port 2 switch signal (b4), the setting value change switch signal (b5), and the setting key switch signal (b6) are input to the input port 124 (82H).

When the gate switch signal (b0) is on (High: 1), it indicates that the gate switch 34a (Fig. 72) has detected a game ball passing through the normal start gate 34 (Fig. 2), and when it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that it has not detected it.

When the winning port switch signal (b1) is on (High: 1), it indicates that the winning port switch 35a (Fig. 72) has detected a game ball that has entered the general winning port 35 (Fig. 2), and when it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that it has not detected it.

When the large prize opening switch signal (b2) is on (High: 1), it indicates that the large prize opening switch 39a (count switch 39a) (Figure 72) has detected a game ball that has entered the large prize opening (special variable prize opening device 39), and when it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that it has not detected it.

When the start hole 1 switch signal (b3) is on (High: 1), it indicates that the start hole 1 switch 36a has detected that a game ball has entered the start winning hole 36, and when it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that it has not detected this.

When the start port 2 switch signal (b4) is on (High: 1), it indicates that the start port 2 switch 37a has detected that a game ball has entered the normal variable winning device 37, and when it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that it has not detected this.

When the set value change switch signal (b5) is on (High: 1), it indicates that the set value change switch 102 is off (not pressed), and when it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that it is on (pressed).

When the setting key switch signal (b6) is on (High: 1), it indicates that the setting key switch 93 is in the off state (setting changes are prohibited), and when it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that it is in the on state (setting changes are permitted).

When the gaming machine 10 is powered on, if the setting key switch signal (b6) input to the input port 124 is on (Low: 0) (setting change permitted state), the RAM initialization switch signal (b5) input to the input port 123 can be turned on (Low: 0) to enter a setting change permitted transition state, and the setting value can be changed by operating the setting value change switch 102.

Of the above signals, the signals related to setting changes are the setting value change switch signal input to input port 124, the setting key switch signal input to input port 124, and the RAM initialization switch signal input to input port 123, but each signal can be input to any of input ports 122, 123, and 124.

However, if the switches are connected so that the setting value change switch signal, setting key switch signal, and RAM initialization switch signal are input to the same input port, there is a risk that a malicious player or other person could easily tamper with the same input port to change the settings fraudulently.

Therefore, it is preferable to design at least one of the setting value change switch signal (setting value change switch 102), setting key switch signal (setting key switch 93), and RAM initialization switch signal (RAM initialization switch 112) to be input to another input port.

Alternatively, it is preferable to design the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 93) and the RAM initialization switch signal (RAM initialization switch 112) to be input to different input ports.

It is also preferable to design the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 93) and the setting value change switch signal (setting value change switch 102) to be input to the same input port. This results in the RAM initialization switch 112 being connected to the same input port 123 as the front frame open detection switch 64, for example. Therefore, by implementing the game control device 100 of the fourth embodiment without wiring from the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 to the input port 124, the game machine can be operated as a game machine without a setting change function, thereby increasing the versatility of the game control device 100.

[Actions and Effects of the Fourth Embodiment]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment includes setting change means (setting key switch 93, RAM initialization switch 112, setting value change switch 102) that includes at least two switches (any two of the setting key switch 93, RAM initialization switch 112, and setting value change switch 102) and can change setting values corresponding to game settings, and includes control means (gaming microcomputer 111) that can control the game results based on the setting values. Signals from the two switches are input to the control means (gaming microcomputer 111) via different input ports (for example, input port 123 and input port 124).

The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is equipped with a setting value setting means (gaming microcomputer 111) that sets a setting value corresponding to the game setting, a setting permission/prohibition switching means (setting key switch 93) that can switch the setting value setting means (gaming microcomputer 111) between a setting change permission state and a setting change prohibition state, and a setting change permission transition means (RAM initialization switch 112) that transitions the setting value setting means (gaming microcomputer 111) to a setting change permission state when operated under the setting change permission state. The setting permission/prohibition switching means (setting key switch 93) and the setting change permission transition means (RAM initialization switch 112) are each connected to the setting value setting means (gaming microcomputer 111) via a different input port (e.g., input port 123, input port 124).

With the above configuration, the switches related to setting changes (setting permission switching means (setting key switch 93), setting change permission transition means (RAM initialization switch 112)) are connected to different input ports, preventing malicious players from fraudulently changing the settings.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment includes a setting value setting means (gaming microcomputer 111) that sets a setting value according to the setting related to the game, a setting permission switching means (setting key switch 93) that can switch the setting value setting means (gaming microcomputer 111) between a setting change permission state and a setting change prohibition state, a setting change permission transition means (RAM initialization switch 112) that transitions the setting value setting means (gaming microcomputer 111) to a setting change permission state by operating it in the setting change permission state, and a setting operation means (setting value change switch 102) that can be operated to change the setting value of the setting value setting means (gaming microcomputer 111). The setting permission switching means (setting key switch 93), setting change permission transition means (RAM initialization switch 112), and setting operation means (setting value change switch 102) are connected to the setting value setting means (gaming microcomputer 111) via input ports (input ports 122-124). At least one of the setting permission/rejection switching means (setting key switch 93), the setting change permission transition means (RAM initialization switch 112), and the setting operation means (setting value change switch 102), and the remaining ones, are connected to different input ports (e.g., input port 123, input port 124).

With the above configuration, at least one of the switches related to setting changes (setting permission/prohibition switching means (setting key switch 93), setting change permission transition means (RAM initialization switch 112), setting operation means (setting value change switch 102)) is connected to another input port, making it possible to prevent unauthorized changes to settings by malicious players, etc.

In the fourth embodiment, the setting permission switching means (setting key switch 93) and the setting operation means (setting value change switch 102) are connected to the same input port (input port 124).

With the above configuration, the setting changeable transition means (RAM initialization switch 112) is connected to the same input port 123 as the front frame open detection switch 64, for example. Therefore, by implementing the game control means (game control device 100) without wiring from the setting permission switching means and the setting operation means to the input port 124, the game machine can be operated as a game machine without the function of changing settings, thereby increasing the versatility of the game control means (game control device 100).

[Fifth embodiment]
The fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 74 and 75. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first to fourth embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for the configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to fourth embodiments, and duplicate descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The fifth embodiment relates to a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value corresponding to a setting related to a game.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines that perform setting suggestion effects that suggest setting values under certain conditions. However, there is a problem in that when a hot effect appears, the player stops shooting game balls even when reserved balls are being accumulated. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, the aim is to increase the interest of the game by performing an effect that associates the setting value suggestion and reserved balls with each other.

Figure 74 is a front view of the game board 30 according to the fifth embodiment. Figure 75 is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of reserved balls and the probability of a setting suggestion effect occurring according to the fifth embodiment (Figure 75(A)), and the relationship between the number of reserved balls, the setting value, and the probability of the red light being lit (Figure 75(B)).

As shown in FIG. 74, an LED 36b (presentation means, lighting means) is disposed in the start winning hole 36 located at the bottom of the game board 30. The game board 30 in FIG. 74 is the same as the game board 30 in FIG. 2A, except for the LED 36b. The LED 36b is configured, for example, as part of the board decoration device 46 (FIG. 4), and performs a setting suggestion presentation to suggest a setting value using lighting information (setting suggestion presentation information) sent from the presentation control device 300 (main control microcomputer 311), as described below.

LED36b is a light-emitting device that can individually drive, for example, a light-emitting element (LED) that emits red light, a light-emitting element (LED) that emits white light, and a light-emitting element (LED) that emits blue light, and causes each light-emitting element (LED) to emit light according to lighting information.

The LED 36b can be attached to the general winning hole 35 or the normal variable winning device 37, instead of the start winning hole 36, and can also be used in place of the large winning hole LED 39d.

As shown in FIG. 75 (A), the main control microcomputer 311 of the performance control device 300 stores, for example, in RAM 322 (FIG. 4), a table showing the relationship between the reserved number (first start memory number or second start memory number) and the occurrence probability of a setting suggestion performance. The table also includes the occurrence probability in the case of an overflow that is greater than the maximum start memory number (4).

The main control microcomputer 311 also has a calculation function that selects an occurrence probability from the table shown in FIG. 75 (A) based on the reserved number command (decorative special chart reserved number command) sent from the game control device 100, and determines whether or not to perform a setting suggestion performance by drawing lots with the selected occurrence probability.

Then, if the main control microcomputer 311 determines that the lottery has been won and that a setting suggestion effect will be performed, it transmits setting suggestion effect information (lighting information) to the LED 36b (board decoration device 46) via the board decoration LED control circuit 332 (Figure 4).

In FIG. 75(A), the probability of a setting suggestion effect occurring is set to be higher as the number of reserved balls increases. For example, the probability of a setting suggestion effect occurring when the number of reserved balls is zero is set to 1 in 500, the probability of a setting suggestion effect occurring when the number of reserved balls is 1 in 300, the probability of a setting suggestion effect occurring when the number of reserved balls is 1 in 2 is set to 1 in 100, the probability of a setting suggestion effect occurring when the number of reserved balls is 3 is set to 1 in 30, the probability of a setting suggestion effect occurring when the number of reserved balls is 4 is set to 1 in 10, and the probability of a setting suggestion effect occurring when the number of reserved balls overflows is set to 1 in 5. In this way, in the fifth embodiment, even if a hot effect occurs during a game, by accumulating the number of reserved balls, the fun of determining the setting value can be provided in addition to the fun of pre-reading, thereby increasing the interest in the game. In particular, if the probability of a setting suggestion effect occurring increases as the number of reserved balls increases, the motivation to accumulate the number of reserved balls can be further increased, and the interest in the game can be further increased.

The game control device 100 (Fig. 72) can transmit not only the reserved number command but also setting value information indicating the setting value to the presentation control device 300. The main control microcomputer 311 (Fig. 4) of the presentation control device 300 lights up the LED 36b a predetermined number of times (e.g., 20 times) based on the lighting information, and performs a setting suggestion presentation that suggests the setting value based on how many times it lights up in red (or another color), for example, and the setting suggestion presentation reflects the setting value and the reserved number. In other words, the probability of LED 36b lighting up in red changes depending on the setting value and the reserved number.

As shown in FIG. 75(B), the main control microcomputer 311 stores, for example, in the RAM 322 (FIG. 4), a table showing the relationship between the number of reserved balls and the set value of the red light lighting probability. Here, FIG. 75(B) sets the lighting probability on the premise that the higher the set value, as in FIG. 24(A), the higher the probability of a big win and a small win.

The main control microcomputer 311 generates lighting information (setting suggestion performance information) for LED 36b to light up 20 times, incorporating a signal for lighting up either red, white, or blue with a predetermined lighting probability for each lighting. The lighting probability for red lighting is extracted from the table in FIG. 75 (B) using the setting value information and reserved number information sent from the game control device 100. For example, if the lighting probability for red lighting is set to 20 percent, the lighting probability for white lighting and the lighting probability for blue lighting can each be set to 40 percent.

As shown in Figure 75 (B), when the number of pending messages is zero, the probability of red light turning on is 20 percent for setting values 1-3, and 40 percent for setting values 4-6. As a result, out of 20 times the red light turns on, it turns on an average of 4 times for setting values 1-3, and 8 times for setting values 4-6, and the difference in the average number of times it turns on makes it possible to suggest whether it is setting values 1-3 or 4-6.

When the number of reserved items is 1, the probability of the red light turning on is 10 percent for setting value 1-2, 20 percent for setting value 3, and 40 percent for setting value 4-6. As a result, out of 20 lights, the red light turns on an average of 2 times for setting value 1-2, 4 times for setting value 3, and 8 times for setting value 4-6, making it possible to suggest whether the setting is 1-2, 3, or 4-6 based on the difference in the average number of times the light turns on.

When the number of reserved items is 2, the probability of the red light turning on is 5 percent for setting value 1, 15 percent for setting value 2, 25 percent for setting value 3, and 40 percent for setting values 4-6. As a result, out of 20 lights, the red light turns on an average of 1 time for setting value 1, 3 times for setting value 2, 5 times for setting value 3, and 8 times for setting values 4-6, making it possible to suggest whether the setting is 1, 2, 3, or 4-6, depending on the difference in the average number of times the light turns on.

When the number of reserved items is 3, the probability of red lighting is 5 percent for setting value 1, 15 percent for setting value 2, 25 percent for setting value 3, 35 percent for setting value 4, and 40 percent for setting values 5-6. As a result, out of 20 lights, red lights will light up an average of 1 time for setting value 1, 3 times for setting value 2, 5 times for setting value 3, 7 times for setting value 4, and 8 times for setting values 5-6, and the difference in the average number of times the light is on makes it possible to suggest whether it is setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, or setting value 5-6.

When the number of reserved items is 4, the probability of red lighting is 5 percent for setting value 1, 15 percent for setting value 2, 25 percent for setting value 3, 35 percent for setting value 4, 40 percent for setting value 5, and 45 percent for setting value 6. As a result, out of 20 lights, red lights will light up on average once for setting value 1, three times for setting value 2, five times for setting value 3, seven times for setting value 4, eight times for setting value 5, and nine times for setting value 6, making it possible to suggest which of setting values 1-6 it is based on the difference in the average number of times it lights up.

As mentioned above, it is possible to make the interval between the difference in the probability of red lighting for setting values 4, 5, and 6 (5 percent) smaller than the interval between the difference in the probability of red lighting for setting values 1-4 (10 percent), so that setting value 6, which has the highest probability of a big win or small win, cannot be easily suggested.

In the above explanation, LED 36b lights up in three colors: red, white, and blue. However, it is also possible to only light up red and change the number of times it lights up depending on the set value regardless of the number of reserved balls. For example, the set value and the number of times it lights up may be related by some function, such as number of times it lights up = set value + 2, or number of times it lights up = set value x 2. More simply, it may be number of times it lights up = set value. However, since the above embodiment indirectly or directly indicates the set value, and there is a risk that players will concentrate on gaming machines 10 with a set value with a high probability of winning a jackpot, it is preferable to set the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion effect (probability of occurrence of lighting information) lower than the occurrence probability shown in FIG. 75 (A).

In the fifth embodiment, the performance control device 300 can execute a setting suggestion performance (transmission of lighting information) at a predetermined timing related to the game. For example, as shown in FIG. 74, when a game ball enters the start winning hole 36, the performance control device 300 can transmit lighting information under the occurrence probability of FIG. 75 (A) to light up the LED 36b. In more detail, the performance control device 300 receives the reserved number command (decorative special chart reserved number command) transmitted from the game control device 100, and transmits lighting information (information on setting suggestion performance) to the LED 36b under the occurrence probability of FIG. 75 (A). As a result, a setting suggestion performance can occur with a predetermined occurrence probability when the game ball enters the start hole 36, so that it naturally catches the player's eye and attracts the player's attention, thereby improving the interest of the game. In particular, when the reserved is in an overflow state, the occurrence probability of the setting suggestion performance (one in five) becomes extremely high, and the above average number of times of lighting becomes easy to understand, which can further improve the interest of the game.

Other timings include when the power supply unit 400 (Figure 4) is turned on, when the special chart change display game has been executed a predetermined number of times after power is turned on, when the special chart change display game has been executed a predetermined number of times after the first (or last) jackpot, when a miss occurs a predetermined number of times after a reach, during a small win, during a jackpot, during a jackpot ending, while a song is being played during a jackpot, during periodic effects by the RTC 338 (Figure 4), during normal character effects, and while waiting for customers. At any of these timings, lighting information may be transmitted with the probability of Figure 75 (A). The timing of these events may also be combined as appropriate.

In the fifth embodiment, in addition to LED 36b, the setting suggestion effect for the setting value may be based on the frequency of small wins, the frequency of delay effects, the frequency of specific symbols stopping in the special symbol change display game, and the frequency of specific results (specific losing stop symbols) in the special symbol change display game. Also, some setting suggestion effect may be performed on the display device 41 in accordance with the above timing.

The setting suggestion effect, which is an effect suggesting a setting value (B1323) according to the game settings, may be executed in the following manner. Another example of the setting suggestion effect is described below.

As another example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed by the display device 41 during a jackpot state (special game state), thereby increasing the interest of the game. The effect control device 300 displays a coin image (image imitating a coin) colored in each color on the display device 41 every time a game ball enters the large winning port of the special variable winning device 39, that is, every time it receives a large winning port count command (a count command of B1321). For example, the color of the coin image is red when the setting value is 1 and 6, yellow when the setting value is 2 and 5, and blue when the setting value is 3 and 4. Here, each color of the coin image corresponds to each combination of the low setting value (1, 2, 3) and the high setting value (4, 5, 6). The color of the coin image may be red when the setting value is 1, 2, 3, and yellow when the setting value is 4, 5, 6. As part of the ending effect set in the ending effect setting process (B2111), the total number of coin images displayed in the jackpot state is announced on the display device 41.

The color of the coin image may be determined by lottery. Red may be drawn with a higher probability of being selected when the setting value is 1 or 6, yellow when the setting value is 2 or 5, and blue when the setting value is 3 or 4 than other colors. For example, if 120 game balls enter the big prize slot during a jackpot state, and 60 red coin images, 30 yellow coins, and 30 blue coins are displayed, the player can guess that the setting value is 1 or 6.

As yet another example, the setting suggestion presentation may be executed by the display device 41 during a set notification period (e.g., 10 minutes) that is set every predetermined time (e.g., 1 hour), thereby increasing the interest of the game. The presentation control device 300 executes the setting suggestion presentation using the losing stop pattern (B2012) of the decorative special chart variable display game during the set notification period. The presentation control device 300 can determine whether or not it is the set notification period from the RTC 338 or a time timer.

For example, if the set value is 5, the performance control device 300 sets the losing stop pattern of the first decorative special chart variable display game in the set notification period to "1, 2, 3", the losing stop pattern of the second decorative special chart variable display game to "1, 3, 3", and the losing stop pattern of the third decorative special chart variable display game to "2, 5, 6". In this way, the performance control device 300 gradually makes the numbers of the losing stop patterns include values close to the set value over time, and at the end of the set notification period, the numbers of the losing stop patterns include the numbers corresponding to the set value. Note that the numbers of the losing stop patterns may be increased or decreased to approach the set value.

In addition, without being limited to the above, the performance control device 300 may execute the setting suggestion performance using only the losing stop pattern (B2012) of the decorative special chart variable display game of a specific predetermined number of times (e.g., the first time) during the setting notification period.

[Actions and Effects of Fifth Embodiment]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment includes a gaming control means (gaming control device 100) capable of controlling the result of the game based on a setting value corresponding to the setting related to the game, a presentation means (LED 36b, display device 41) capable of executing a presentation, and a presentation control means (presentation control device 300) capable of controlling the presentation means (LED 36b, display device 41), and is capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays identification information as a game. The gaming machine 10 includes a start storage means (gaming control device 100) capable of storing a start memory that is a right to execute the variable display game. The gaming control means (gaming control device 100) transmits setting value information indicating a setting value to the presentation control means (presentation control device 300), and the presentation control means (presentation control device 300) can cause the presentation means to execute a setting suggestion presentation that suggests a setting value based on the setting value information, and executes the setting suggestion presentation with a predetermined probability (occurrence probability), and sets the probability (occurrence probability) based on the number of start memories (reserved number).

With the above configuration, even if a hot effect appears during play, by accumulating the reserved number, in addition to the fun of pre-reading, the fun of determining the set value can be provided, which increases the interest of the game.

In the fifth embodiment, the performance control means (performance control device 300) sets the probability (occurrence probability) higher the greater the number of start memories (number of pending).

This will further increase motivation to accumulate reserved balls, making the game even more enjoyable.

In the fifth embodiment, the performance control means (performance control device 300) changes the setting suggestion performance based on the number of start memories (number of reserved) (and the setting value).

This allows for a variety of setting suggestion effects, such as setting suggestion effects that make it easy to determine the setting value and setting suggestion effects that make it difficult to determine the setting value, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the fifth embodiment, the presentation control means (presentation control device 300) can execute setting suggestion presentations at predetermined times related to the game.

This will increase the opportunities to suggest setting values, making the game more interesting.

In the fifth embodiment, the presentation means (LED36b) includes a lighting means (LED36b) capable of suggesting a setting value by a light emission mode (e.g., lighting 20 times) as a setting suggestion presentation, and the presentation control means (presentation control device 300) controls the lighting means (LED36b) based on lighting information representing the light emission mode, and is capable of generating lighting information based on the probability (occurrence probability) and transmitting it to the lighting means (LED36b).

This allows setting value suggestions to be made with a simple configuration.

In the fifth embodiment, the lighting means (LED 36b) is capable of lighting a plurality of different colors, and the lighting information is information that selects one of the plurality of colors of light each time the lighting means is turned on a plurality of times (e.g., 20 times), and the number of times a particular color (red) of light is turned on indicates the setting value.

The above configuration allows for clearer suggestions of setting values with a simple configuration.

In the fifth embodiment, the lighting means (LED 36b) is attached to the start hole (start winning hole 36) that can generate a start memory (hold) when the game ball enters it, and the performance control means (performance control device 300) can generate lighting information based on the probability (occurrence probability) when the game ball enters the start hole (start winning hole 36) and transmit it to the lighting means (LED 36b).

With the above configuration, when the game ball enters the starting hole, a setting suggestion effect can occur with a certain probability, so it naturally catches the player's eye and attracts the player's attention, increasing the player's interest in the game.

Sixth Embodiment
The sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 76 to 78. Note that configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fifth embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to fifth embodiments, and duplicate descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The sixth embodiment relates to an error code that collectively indicates the presence or absence of multiple errors.

Figure 76 shows the relationship between error priority and error code bits according to the sixth embodiment (Figure 76(A)), and the notation of error codes (binary) and error codes (hexadecimal) (Figure 76(B)). Figure 77 shows an example of the display of error codes and error contents according to the sixth embodiment, showing a case where there are two errors (left: binary notation, right: hexadecimal notation) (Figure 77(A)), a case where one error has been resolved (Figure 77(B)), and a case where all errors have been resolved (Figure 77(C)).

The sixth embodiment is characterized in that, when an error occurs in the gaming machine 10, an error code (error code 341, 342) that includes the error is displayed on the display device 41 (Figure 77).

As shown in Figures 76 (A) and (B), an error code is a collective display of coded information on the presence or absence of multiple errors that may occur in the gaming machine 10, and can be displayed in binary notation and hexadecimal notation. In hexadecimal notation, the lower bits are b0 to b3 in binary notation, and the higher bits are b4 to b7 in binary notation.

The error contents displayed in Figure 76 (A) are examples of some of the error contents that can occur on the gaming machine 10. In reality, there are many more error contents, but other error contents have been omitted to simplify the explanation. Therefore, the number of bits in the binary and hexadecimal notations will change depending on the number of error contents.

Priority information is associated with the error content displayed in Figure 76 (A). The priority information lists the priorities of the error content that the amusement facility manager or staff must resolve. Therefore, the relationship between each error content and priority is essentially unchanged.

On the other hand, the relationship between the priority (error content) and the bits (b0-b6) is arbitrary. Therefore, while the bit order and the priority (error content) match in Figure 76 (A), it is also possible to set the priority (error content) for the bits randomly.

The RAM 322 or FeRAM 323 of the performance control device 300 (Figure 4) stores table information related to Figure 76 (A). The table information also includes text information (text information 343) that indicates the content of the error.

The performance control device 300 generates error codes 341, 342 (Figure 76 (B)) based on the error command sent from the game control device 100.

Error detection for the gaming machine 10 is performed by the gaming control device 100. The gaming control device 100 performs a magnet fraud monitoring process (FIG. 6, A1315) that detects a magnetic error, which is an abnormality detected by the magnetic sensor switch 61, a board radio wave fraud monitoring process (FIG. 6, A1316) that detects a board radio wave error, which is an abnormality detected by the radio wave sensor 62, a fraud & prize management process (FIG. 8, A2004, A2006) that detects a large prize port error, which is an illegal win at the large prize port, and a fraud & prize management process (FIG. 8, A2008) that detects a normal power error, which is an illegal win at the normal variable prize device 37 (second start prize port), and transmits an error command (including a fraud command) corresponding to each error. Also, by referring to the game status monitoring table 1 (first embodiment), it detects a frame radio wave error, which is an abnormal occurrence in the frame radio wave illegal signal, a glass frame open error, which is the detection of the open state of the glass frame 15 by the glass frame open detection switch 63, a main frame open error, which is the detection of the open state of the front frame 12 (main frame) by the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch), and a switch abnormality error, which is the occurrence of an abnormality detection signal, and transmits an error command indicating the presence or absence of each error content (FIG. 9, A2204, A2207). By executing the error/illegal setting process (FIG. 39, B1316), the performance control device 300 receives the error command.

As shown in FIG. 77 (A), the performance control device 300 can display error codes 341, 342 on the display device 41. In this case, the error code 341 can be expressed in binary notation as shown on the left, and the error code 342 can be expressed in hexadecimal notation as shown on the right. In this way, by knowing in advance the correspondence between the error codes 341, 342 and the error content, the error code 341, 342 can be displayed and the error content can be immediately understood. Furthermore, by using binary notation, the presence or absence of each error and the number of errors can be immediately understood.

In addition, error code 341 (binary notation: 00010010) and error code 342 (hexadecimal notation: 12) in Figure 77 (A) indicate that a "board radio error" and a "frame radio error" have occurred simultaneously, respectively.

Also, as shown in FIG. 77(A), the performance control device 300 can display text information 343 indicating the error content adjacent to the error codes 341, 342. This text information 343 indicates the highest priority error content among the error contents corresponding to the code (presence/absence information) that is present in the error code 341, i.e., "1" in binary notation. According to FIG. 77(A), the highest priority error content here is a "board radio wave error," so the text information 343 "board radio wave error" is displayed on the display device 41. By displaying the text information 343 in this way, it is possible to immediately grasp the error content that should be resolved with priority.

The error codes 341, 342 and text information 343 are always displayed if any error occurs after the power is turned on, and the same applies during play. Even during a variable display game, the error codes 341, 342 and text information 343 may be displayed superimposed on the variable display area 610 (first variable display area) where the variable display of the large symbols among the decorative special symbols is performed, but they are not displayed superimposed on the variable display area 615 (second variable display area) where the variable display of the small symbols among the decorative special symbols is performed.

The processes for preparing the error commands (A1315, A1316, A2004, A2006, A2008, A2204, A2207) and the error/incorrect setting process (B1316) are always updated when they are executed. In other words, if the error content is updated, the error codes 341, 342 and the text information 343 are also updated.

Therefore, for example, when a "board radio error" is resolved, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), error code 341 (binary notation: 00010010) is updated to error code 341 (binary notation: 00010000), error code 342 (hexadecimal notation: 12) is updated to error code 342 (hexadecimal notation: 10), and text information 343 is updated from "board radio error" to "frame radio error."

When the "frame radio error" is resolved, all errors are resolved and error codes 341, 342 and text information 343 are not generated. At this time, all of the binary notation presence/absence information constituting error code 341 is set to "0". As a result, as shown in FIG. 77(C), the display of error codes 341, 342 and text information 343 is erased on display device 41. This makes it easy to know that all errors have been resolved.

Figure 78 shows examples of switching the display of error content according to the sixth embodiment, including an example in which a board radio error is displayed as the initial state (Figure 78 (A)), an example in which a frame radio error is displayed by operating the operation unit once (Figure 78 (B)), and an example in which a switch abnormality error is displayed by operating the operation unit once again (Figure 78 (C)). In this embodiment, the operation unit (operation means) is the performance button 25, but it may also be a cross key (not shown) or the like.

In the sixth embodiment, when the error code 341 and the text information 343 are displayed on the display device 41, the text information 343 initially displays the error content with the highest priority. In FIG. 78(A), the error code 341 indicates that, for example, a "panel radio error," a "frame radio error," or a "switch abnormality error" has occurred (see FIG. 76). Initially, the text information 343 displays "panel radio error," which has the highest priority.

The performance control device 300 can also display an underline 344 (a specified image) adjacent to the presence/absence information "1" of the error code 341 corresponding to the displayed text information 343. In FIG. 78(A), an underline 344 (specified image) is displayed indicating the presence/absence information "1" of the second bit from the right (bit: b1) of the error code 341 corresponding to the text information 343 of "board radio error". The underline 344 is displayed adjacent to and below the presence/absence information "1". This makes the correspondence between the text information 343 and the presence/absence information "1" in the error code 341 clear. Note that a specified image other than the underline 344, such as a square or circle surrounding the presence/absence information "1", may also be applied.

The performance control device 300 (main control microcomputer 311) is connected to the performance button 25 (performance button switch 25a), which is the operation unit operated by the player in variable display games and the like, via a switch input circuit 336 (Figure 4). Each time the performance control device 300 receives a signal transmitted by operating the performance button 25, it is able to switch between displaying text information 343 corresponding to the multiple presence/absence information set to yes in the error code 341. This makes it possible to grasp the contents of all errors that have occurred from the text information 343.

Therefore, when the effect button 25 is pressed once, as shown in FIG. 78 (B), "Frame radio error" is displayed as text information 343, and an underline 344 is displayed under the presence/absence information "1" in the fifth bit from the right (bit: b4) of the error code 341 corresponding to the text information 343.

When the effect button 25 is pressed once, as shown in FIG. 78(C), "Switch abnormality error" is displayed as text information 343, and an underline 344 is displayed under the presence/absence information "1" of the first bit from the left (bit: b7) of the error code 341 corresponding to the text information 343. Then, when the effect button 25 is pressed once more, the display returns to that of FIG. 78(A).

Even if an error code 341 and text information 343 are displayed during a variable display game, operations related to the presentation of the variable display game using the presentation button 25 are restricted, and priority is given to switching the text information 343 using the presentation button 25.

[Actions and Effects of the Sixth Embodiment]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment is equipped with a gaming control means (gaming control device 100) that transmits commands related to the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control device 300) that can display presentations corresponding to the commands on a display means (display device 41). When any of a number of errors that can occur in the gaming machine 10 occurs, the gaming control means (gaming control device 100) transmits an error command related to the error to the presentation control means (presentation control device 300), and the presentation control means (presentation control device 300) generates an error code (341, 342) that indicates the presence or absence of multiple errors based on the error command, and displays it on the display means (display device 41).

With the above configuration, the correspondence between the error codes 341 and 342 and the error content can be understood in advance, and the error codes 341 and 342 can be displayed, allowing the error content to be immediately understood all at once.

In the sixth embodiment, the performance control means (performance control device 300) generates an error code (341) using multiple pieces of presence/absence information (binary notation) that individually indicate the presence or absence of an error.

By using binary notation, it is possible to immediately determine whether or not there are errors and how many there are.

In the sixth embodiment, the performance control means (performance control device 300) arranges the presence/absence information in the error code based on the priority of the error.

This allows you to identify which errors should be dealt with as a priority among the error codes.

In the sixth embodiment, the performance control means (performance control device 300) has text information 343 indicating the content of the error, and displays the text information 343 relating to the error with the highest priority among the presence/absence information "1" that is present in the error code 341 on the display means (display device 41).

As a result, even if the user does not understand the correspondence between the information on the presence or absence of an error code 341 and the error content, the error content with the highest priority can be notified by the text information 343, making it easy to understand the error content.

In the sixth embodiment, the performance control means (performance control device 300) is provided with text information 343 indicating the content of the error and priority information (Figure 76 (A)) indicating the priority of the error, and among the errors marked as present in the error codes 341 and 342, the text information 343 relating to the error with the highest priority is displayed on the display means (display device 41) based on the priority information.

As a result, the highest priority error content can be notified by text information 343 without the user having to know the content of error codes 341 and 342, making it easy to understand the content of the error.

In the sixth embodiment, an operation means (effect button 25) is provided that can generate a signal in response to the player's operation, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) switches the text information 343 relating to the error that is present in the error codes 341, 342 and transmits it to the display means (display device 41) each time it receives a signal from the operation means (effect button 25).

This allows you to understand the details of all errors that have occurred through the text information 343.

In the sixth embodiment, an operation means (effect button 25) is provided that can generate a signal in response to the player's operation, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) switches the text information 343 relating to the presence/absence information "1" that is set to "present" in the error code 341 and transmits it to the display means (display device 41) each time it receives a signal from the operation means (effect button 25), and displays a predetermined image (underline 344) indicating the presence/absence information "1" relating to the text information 343 displayed on the display means (display device 41).

This clarifies the correspondence between the text information 343 and the presence/absence information "1" in the error code 341.

In the sixth embodiment, the performance control means (performance control device 300) does not generate error codes 341 and 342 if all of the multiple errors in error codes 341 and 342 are nullified.

As a result, the error codes 341, 342 and text information 343 displayed on the display means (display device 41) are erased, making it easy to know that all errors have been resolved.

[Seventh embodiment]
The seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 79 to Fig. 85. Note that configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to sixth embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to sixth embodiments, and duplicate descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The seventh embodiment relates to the attachment of the part 510, similar to the second embodiment.

Figure 79 is a diagram showing an example in which a detachable part 510 according to the seventh embodiment is attached to a gaming machine 10. The seventh embodiment is a modified example of the second embodiment. The procedure for matching the part identification information (first identification information) with the model identification information (second identification information) in the seventh embodiment is the same as in the second embodiment.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46(B), when a part 510B for model B having part identification information (first identification information) that does not match the model identification information (second identification information) of model A is attached to the gaming machine 10, the performance control device 300 issues an error notification via the speakers 19a, 19b and the display device 41.

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, when the part 510B for model B is attached to model A of the gaming machine 10, the performance control device 300 is configured to allow the board decoration device 46 (or frame decoration device 18) to be driven (here, to emit light) and to prohibit the frame decoration device 18 (or board decoration device 46) (Figure 4) from being driven (here, to emit light). That is, as shown in Figure 79, the frame decoration device 18 (decoration device 18b) decorates the gaming board 30 by turning on (emitting light) LEDs or the like, but when the part 510B for model B is attached to model A of the gaming machine 10, the lighting (emitting light) of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 is prohibited.

Specifically, when the part identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) do not match, the performance control device 300 stops driving the frame decoration LED control circuit 333 (or the board decoration LED control circuit 334) (Figure 4), thereby prohibiting the driving (light emission) of the frame decoration device 18 (or the board decoration device 46) (Figure 4).

As a result, the lighting components such as LEDs included in the frame decoration device 18 (or the lighting components such as LEDs included in the board decoration device 46) do not emit light to indicate that the unit is incorrect. This makes it easier for the amusement facility manager or attendant to understand that the unit has been installed incorrectly, allowing the cause to be eliminated smoothly. In addition, the unit will no longer be used if it is installed incorrectly, reducing the causes of failure and leading to a longer lifespan.

As shown in FIG. 79, in the seventh embodiment, a unit error can also be notified by audio information (a sound saying "unit error") using speakers 19a and 19b. Here, the output of the audio information can be stopped by operating the effect button 25 (FIG. 4). Also, notification information 345 notifying the "unit error" by text can be displayed on the display device 41. Note that this notification information 345 is displayed in priority over an image relating to initialization (for example, the text 431 saying "initializing" in FIG. 90 of the eighth embodiment described below) or an image relating to power outage recovery (A1035).

Figure 80 is a diagram showing an example of displaying notification information 345 according to the seventh embodiment on the display device 41 while displaying a losing stop pattern in a special chart variable display game. As shown in Figure 80, notification information 345 notifying a "unit error" is displayed on the display device 41 as long as a part 510B whose part identification information differs from the model identification information is attached, and this is also true during play (during the variable display game).

During the special symbol variation display game, notification information 345 is displayed superimposed on the variation display area 610 (first variation display area) where the variation display of the large symbol is performed, but is not displayed superimposed on the variation display area 615 (second variation display area) where the variation display of the small symbol is performed. This allows the player to check the progress and results of the special symbol variation display game in the variation display area 615 even if notification information 345 ("unit error") is displayed.

Figure 81 is a diagram showing an example in which the display mode of the notification information according to the seventh embodiment is changed in accordance with the movement of the movable body. The notification information 345 according to the seventh embodiment is displayed on the display device 41 even during the initial movement of the movable bodies 44c and 44d (movable parts) when the power is turned on. Details of the initial movement of the movable bodies 44c and 44d will be described in the eighth embodiment described later.

As shown in FIG. 81(A), the movable bodies 44c and 44d are positioned so that in the initial state (standby state), a portion of them slightly overlaps the front of the display device 41, but as shown in FIG. 81(B), during initial operation, the movable bodies 44c and 44d move to the center of the front of the display device 41. Therefore, the notification information 345 is displayed on the display device 41 at a position that does not overlap with the movable bodies 44c and 44d, ensuring that the notification content ("unit error") is notified reliably.

On the left side of Fig. 81(A), the notification information 345 is displayed large in the center of the display device 41, while in Fig. 81(B), the notification information 345 is displayed, for example, in the upper left of the display device 41 (or elsewhere) in a smaller size than in the display mode of Fig. 81(A). By changing the display mode of the notification information 345 in this way in response to the positions of the movable bodies 44c, 44d, it is possible to strongly call the attention of the amusement facility manager or staff.

Also, as shown on the right side of FIG. 81(A), the notification information 345 may be displayed from the beginning on the display device 41 in a position that will not overlap with the movable bodies 44c and 44d even if they are moved. At least, by arranging the notification information 345 in an area of the display device 41 that is different from the area covered by the movable bodies 44c and 44d, it is possible to alert the amusement facility manager or staff.

Figure 82 is a diagram showing an example of the part matching process according to the seventh embodiment, in which the driving (light emission) of the frame decoration device 18 is prohibited. The part matching process of the seventh embodiment is almost the same as that of the second embodiment (Figure 54), but as shown in Figure 82, a process (B5006a) is added that prohibits the driving of the frame decoration device 18 (or the board decoration device 46) after (or before) the error notification (B5006). The driving of the frame decoration device 18 is prohibited by the main control microcomputer 311 (Figure 4) stopping the output of a signal to the frame decoration device 18 or stopping the driving of the frame decoration LED control circuit 333.

Figure 83 is a diagram showing an example configuration of the identification board 513 of the part 510 according to the seventh embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 83, the identification board 513 ( ^I2C I/O expander 815) of the part 510 of the seventh embodiment is similar to the identification board 513 of the second embodiment, but the bus controller 834 includes a ROM 834a in which part identification information (first identification information) of the identification board 513 is stored.

Therefore, the bus controller 834 determines whether the address of the data input from the connection line SDA matches the unique address (address determined by ^A3 , A2, A1, A0) set in the I2C I/O expander 815, and if they match, outputs the part identification information (first identification information) stored in the ROM 834a from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a.

Figure 84 shows a reference table (Figure 84(A)) that associates model designation commands and model identification information in the seventh embodiment, and a reference table (Figure 84(B)) that shows classifications of incompatible models.

As shown in FIG. 84(A), the memory of the performance control means 300 (RAM 322, FeRAM 323 (FIG. 4), etc.) stores a table of models compatible with the gaming machine 10 and the corresponding model identification information. In FIG. 84(A), models A-D are registered as models that the gaming machine 10 can identify. For example, if the model of the gaming machine 10 is model A (which can be any of models A-D), if the part identification information of the attached part 510 does not match the model identification information of model A, the frame decoration device 18 (or board decoration device 46) will be prohibited from being driven (light emission) and an error notification will be issued.

Here, if the part identification information matches any of the model identification information for models A-D, the part 510 is determined to be a standard product that is compatible with the gaming machine 10, and if it does not match any of the information, the part 510 is determined to be a non-standard product that is not suitable for the gaming machine 10.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when the part 510B for model B is attached to the gaming machine 10 model A, the performance control device 300 can prohibit the operation of the frame decoration device 18 (or the board decoration device 46) (Figure 4).

In the past, in order to provide gaming machines at low cost, components (parts 510) were changed as part of the frame decoration device 18 (model elements). However, if the components (parts 510) were incorrect when changed at the amusement center, this could cause malfunctions. There was also a possibility that the frame decoration device 18 would be used with the wrong components.

However, in the seventh embodiment, even if the wrong unit (part 510B) is installed, it is not necessarily necessary to prohibit the operation of the frame decoration device 18 (or board decoration device 46), and it is also possible to reduce the causes of failure by allowing some of the parts 510 to be operated as long as it does not affect the progress of the game.

As shown in FIG. 84 (B), the memory of the performance control device 300 (RAM 322, FeRAM 323 (FIG. 4), etc.) stores a reference table for classifying errors into three types when the part 510 does not match the gaming machine 10. Note that the part 510 does not match the gaming machine 10 when the part identification information of the part 510 does not match the model identification information (specific model identification information) of the gaming machine 10 to which the part 510 is attached.

The parts 510 decorate the game board 30 (Figure 2), and are equipped with LEDs and movable parts that can be controlled by the performance control device 300. As shown in Figure 84 (B), the parts 510 can be classified into those equipped with only LEDs and those equipped with LEDs and movable parts, based on the corresponding part identification information.

For example, if the last two digits of the part identification number are "00" or "01", it can be determined that part 510 only has an LED. Also, if the last two digits of the part identification information are "10" or "11", it can be determined that part 510 has an LED and a movable member.

As shown in FIG. 84(A), the parts identification information is formatted so that the corresponding model A-D can be identified by the last two digits, but it may also be formatted so that the model A-D can be identified by the first two digits. In this case, it is possible to determine from the first two digits of the parts identification information whether the part 510 has only an LED, or has an LED and a movable part. In this way, by comparing parts of the parts identification information, it is possible to classify the type of the part 510.

As a result, the performance control device 300 (main control microcomputer 311) can compare the part identification information (first identification information) sent from the part 510 with the specific model identification information (second identification information) provided by the performance control device 300, and classify the part 510 into a conforming product that matches the specific model identification information and an unconformable product that does not match the specific model identification information.

If the product is compatible, part 510 can be operated without any restrictions.

On the other hand, if the product is non-compliant, it can be classified according to the reference table in Figure 84 (B) into the first category, which is a standard product equipped only with an LED, the second category, which is a standard product equipped with an LED and a movable part, or the third category, which is a non-standard product.

Regarding the first category, as long as the part 510 is a standard product, the LED of the part 510 is rated to match the gaming machine 10, and therefore the LED can be allowed to light up.

Regarding the second category, as long as the part 510 is a standard product, its LED and movable member are compatible with the gaming machine 10 and can be driven. However, if the operating mode of the movable member compatible with the gaming machine 10 differs due to differences in model, such as reciprocating motion or circular motion, there is a risk of the part 510 being damaged. Therefore, in the second category, while allowing the LED to be driven (to emit light), it is necessary to prohibit the driving of the movable member of the part 510 (movement, rotation, etc.).

Regarding the third category, if the part 510 is a non-standard product, the LED and movable parts may have different ratings from those of the gaming machine 10, and driving these may damage the circuit boards and other components of the gaming machine 10. Therefore, driving the LED and movable parts of the part 510 must be prohibited regardless of whether they are present or not.

When the part 510 is configured as part of the panel decoration device 46, the main control microcomputer 311 only needs to restrict the signals related to the part 510 among the signals transmitted to the panel decoration device 46. For example, when the part 510 belongs to the second category, the main control microcomputer 311 allows the transmission of signals related to the LED of the part 510 and prohibits the transmission of signals related to the movable members, and when the part 510 belongs to the third category, the main control microcomputer 311 prohibits the transmission of signals related to the LED and movable members of the part 510.

For example, in the case where ^{the I2C} I/O expander 815 shown in FIG. 83 drives the panel decoration device 46, if PORT1 is a port that drives the LED of the part 510 and PORT2 is a port that drives the movable member (motor) of the part 510, then the output of signals belonging to the addresses of PORT1 and PORT2 can be prohibited.

In addition, if the part 510 is configured as something independent from the panel decoration device 46, the main control microcomputer 311 allows the transmission of signals related to the LED of the part 510 and prohibits the transmission of signals related to the movable members when the part 510 belongs to the second category, and prohibits the transmission of signals related to the LED and movable members of the part 510 when the part 510 belongs to the third category.

Figure 85 is a diagram showing an example of the parts matching process according to the seventh embodiment, in which the drive mode is changed by classifying the parts 510. The parts matching process of the seventh embodiment is similar to the parts matching process of the second embodiment (Figure 54), but if the part identification information and the model identification information do not match (the result of B5005 is "N"), an error notification (B5006) is issued and an error classification process for the parts identification information is performed (B5006b). As with Figure 82, it is also possible to configure the process of step B5006a to be executed between steps B5006 and B5006b in order to prohibit the drive of the frame decoration device 18.

If the error classification process (B5006b) determines that the part identification information belongs to the first category, the LED of part 510 is allowed to be driven (B5006c).

If the error classification process (B5006b) determines that the part identification information belongs to the second category, the LED of part 510 is permitted to be driven, but the movable member of part 510 is prohibited from being driven (B5006d).

If the error classification process (B5006b) determines that the part identification information belongs to the third category, the driving of the LED and movable member of part 510 is prohibited (B5006e).

In this way, even if the installed part 510 is used incorrectly, it will not affect the progress of the game, and the causes of failure can be reduced, leading to a longer lifespan.

[Actions and Effects of the Seventh Embodiment]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment includes a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game, a performance control means (performance control device 300) capable of executing a performance related to the game, and a decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) that is driven by the performance control means (performance control device 300) to perform a light-emitting performance. The gaming machine 10 includes a removable part (part 510) to which electrically readable first identification information (part identification information) is assigned. The performance control means (performance control device 300) holds second identification information (model identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10, reads the first identification information (part identification information) of the part (part 510) and compares it with the second identification information (model identification information), and when the first identification information (part identification information) and the second identification information (model identification information) do not match, it prohibits the driving of a part of the decoration device (frame decoration device 18 or board decoration device 46).

As a result, when an incorrect part (part 510) is installed, the operation of part of the decorative device (e.g., frame decoration device 18) is prohibited, making it easy for the amusement center manager or attendant to quickly and easily determine that the installed part (part 510) is incorrect, and the cause can be smoothly eliminated by replacing the part (part 510).

In the seventh embodiment, the decoration devices (frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46) include a frame decoration device 18 that performs a light-emitting effect to decorate the frame of the gaming machine 10, and a board decoration device 46 that performs a light-emitting effect to decorate the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine, and the performance control means (performance control device 300) allows the board decoration device 46 to be operated and prohibits the frame decoration device 18 from being operated when the first identification information (parts identification information) and the second identification information (model identification information) do not match.

As a result, the amusement facility manager or attendant can easily tell that the installed part (part 510) is incorrect based on whether the frame decoration device 18 is operating or not, and the cause can be smoothly eliminated by replacing the part (part 510).

In the seventh embodiment, the parts (parts 510) are configured as part of the board decoration device 46. The performance control means (performance control device 300) can classify the parts (parts 510) into a first category that is a standard product that is compatible with the gaming machine 10 and has a light-emitting member (LED) that can be driven by the performance control means (performance control device 300), a second category that is a standard product that has a light-emitting member (LED) and a movable member that can be driven by the performance control means (performance control device 300), and a third category that is not a standard product (a non-standard product). In the first category, the performance control means (performance control device 300) allows the parts (parts 510) to be driven, and in the second category, the performance control means (performance control device 300) allows the light-emitting member (LED) of the parts (parts 510) to be driven and prohibits the movable member from being driven, and in the third category, prohibits the parts (parts 510) from being driven.

As a result, even if the installed part (part 510) is used incorrectly, it will not affect the progress of the game, and the causes of breakdowns can be reduced, leading to a longer lifespan.

The gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment includes a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game, a presentation control means (presentation control means 300) capable of executing presentations related to the game, and a decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) that performs light-emitting presentations. The gaming machine 10 includes a removable part (part 510) that is configured as a part of the decoration device and is assigned electrically readable first identification information (part identification information). The presentation control means (presentation control device 300) holds second identification information (model identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10, reads the first identification information (parts identification information) of the part (part 510) and compares it with the second identification information (model identification information), and if the first identification information (parts identification information) and the second identification information (model identification information) do not match, the part (part 510) can be classified into a first classification which is a standard product that is compatible with the gaming machine 10 and has an light-emitting member (LED) that can be driven by the presentation control means (presentation control device 300), a second classification which is a standard product that has an light-emitting member (LED) and a movable member that can be driven by the presentation control means (presentation control device 300), and a third classification which is a non-standard product (a non-standard product). The performance control means (performance control device 300) allows the actuation of the part (part 510) in the first category, allows the actuation of the light-emitting member (LED) of the part (part 510) but prohibits the actuation of the movable member in the second category, and prohibits the actuation of the part (part 510) in the third category.

As a result, even if the installed part (part 510) is used incorrectly, it will not affect the progress of the game, and the causes of breakdowns can be reduced, leading to a longer lifespan.

In the seventh embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a display device 41 that displays images related to the game, and when the first identification information (parts identification information) and the second identification information (model identification information) do not match, the presentation control means (presentation control device 300) displays notification information 345 ("unit error") indicating the mismatch on the display device 41.

This allows the error to be reliably notified to the amusement facility manager or staff by displaying the notification information 345 on the display device 41.

In the seventh embodiment, the performance control means (performance control device 300) displays a variable display game that displays identification information on the display device 41, and displays the variable display game in a manner that includes a first variable display area (variable display area 610) that displays the variable display of large symbols, and a second variable display area (variable display area 615) that is smaller than the first variable display area and displays the variable display of small symbols (615A, 615B, 615C) that are smaller than the large symbols, as display areas on the display device 41, and displays notification information 345 superimposed on the first variable display area without being superimposed on the second variable display area.

As a result, even if notification information 345 ("unit error") is displayed, the player can check the progress and results of the variable display game in the variable display area 615.

In the seventh embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is equipped with a board presentation device 44 including operable movable bodies (44c, 44d). The presentation control means (presentation control device 300) is capable of driving the movable bodies (44c, 44d) of the board presentation device 44, and when the first identification information (parts identification information) and the second identification information (model identification information) do not match, the notification information 345 is displayed on the display device 41 in an area that does not overlap with the area that is covered by the movable bodies (44c, 44d) by driving the board presentation device 44.

As a result, the notification information 345 is not hidden by the movable bodies (44c, 44d), and can therefore be viewed at all times.

In the seventh embodiment, the performance control means (performance control device 300) changes the display mode of the notification information 345 in response to the position of the movable body (44c, 44d).

This allows the display mode of the alarm information 345 to be optimized for maximum visibility in accordance with changes in the position of the movable body (44c, 44d).

In the seventh embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is equipped with sound output means (speakers (19a, 19b)) that outputs sound effects according to the gaming status. When the first identification information (parts identification information) and the second identification information (model identification information) do not match, the performance control means (performance control device 300) outputs audio information indicating the mismatch ("unit error") to the sound output means (speakers 19a, 19b).

This allows the occurrence of an error to be made known to the amusement facility manager or staff who are in a position where they cannot see the game board 30 (frame decoration device 18 or board decoration device 46) or the display device 41 displaying the notification information 345.

[Eighth embodiment]
The eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 86 to Fig. 96. Note that configurations other than those described below may be similar to those of the first to seventh embodiments. The seventh embodiment relates to an initial operation control process.

[Game board according to the eighth embodiment]
First, the game board 30 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 86. Fig. 86 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. The game board 30 according to the eighth embodiment is obtained by adding a light guide plate 251 and internal gadgets 44c and 44d (inner movable members) to the game board 30 (Fig. 2A) of the first embodiment.

The light guide plate 251 is attached to the center case 40, and reflects forward a portion of the light emitted and guided from the light emitting members (e.g., LEDs) attached to the end, causing a predetermined pattern or the like that is visible from the front (e.g., a spark-like pattern as shown in FIG. 86) to appear on the surface as is well known (see JP 2016-83463 and JP 2017-148150). The light guide plate 251 is positioned in front of the display device 41 (on the player's side).

The internal props 44c and 44d (internal movable members) are provided in the board performance device 44 and work together with the performance display on the display device 41 to enhance the performance effect.

The internal device 44c is equipped with a motor (not shown) that can position the character "Geki" on the internal device 44c in front of the display device 41 (toward the player), and a light-emitting member (e.g., an LED) that can emit light around the character "Geki" to make it stand out.

In addition, the internal device 44d is equipped with a motor (not shown) that can position the character "Heat" on the internal device 44d in front of the display screen of the display device 41 (toward the player), and a light-emitting member (e.g., an LED) that can emit light around the character "Heat" to make it stand out.

Therefore, by moving both the internal parts 44c and 44d, the word "Super Hot" is displayed in front of the display device 41 so that it is visible to the player (see Figures 86, 90, and 93). As shown in Figure 86, in the game board 30 according to the eighth embodiment, when a pattern is made to appear on the surface of the light guide plate 251 and the internal parts 44c and 44d are moved, the pattern and the internal parts 44c and 44d overlap in front of the display screen of the display device 41.

[Light guide plate control process]
Fig. 87 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a light guide plate control process according to the eighth embodiment. The light guide plate control process may be executed by the performance control device 300, for example, as part of the decoration control process (B0020) in the main process (Fig. 36).

First, the performance control device 300 determines whether or not the power is turned on (B7001). It may also determine whether or not the power has been restored after a power outage.

If the performance control device 300 determines that the power is not on (result of B7001 is "N"), it starts normal control processing according to the performance content set in the variable performance setting process (Figure 44) or the like (B7003), and ends the light guide plate control processing. On the other hand, if the performance control device 300 determines that the power is on (result of B7001 is "Y"), it determines whether or not a command for changing the probability setting has been received (B7002).

In the processing of step B7002, the command during the probability setting change is determined to have been received when the MODE section indicates the setting change system by the command during the probability setting change in the single-shot command processing (FIG. 39) (result of B1325 is "Y"). That is, the front frame 12 (main body frame, main body section) is opened (result of A1023 or A1027 in FIG. 5A is "Y"), and the setting key switch 93 of the setting change device 42 is turned on (result of A1024 or A1028 is "Y"), and the command during the probability setting change is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the performance control device 300 (A1041 in FIG. 5B). When the setting value change switch 102 of the setting change device 42 is pressed during the probability setting change, the setting value related to the game conditions is changed. In addition, information on the setting value related to the changed game conditions is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143.

Then, if the performance control device 300 determines that it has not received a command for changing the probability setting (the result of B7002 is "N"), i.e., when the power is turned on normally, it determines whether the internal reels 44c and 44d are in their initial operation (B7005).

On the other hand, if the performance control device 300 determines that it has received a command to change the probability setting (the result of B7002 is "Y"), it determines whether it has received a command to end the probability setting change (B7004).

In the processing of step B7004, the command to end the probability setting change is determined to have been received if the MODE section indicates the setting change system by the command to end the probability setting change in the single command processing (Figure 39) (result of B1325 is "Y"). In other words, the probability setting value has been changed (result of A2406 in Figure 10 is "Y"), and the setting key switch 93 is turned off (result of A2416 is "Y"), and the command to end the probability setting change is sent from the game control device 100 to the performance control device 300 (A2421).

Then, if the performance control device 300 determines that it has not received a command to end the probability setting change (the result of B7004 is "N"), i.e., if the probability setting is being changed, it ends the light guide plate control process.

On the other hand, if the performance control device 300 determines that it has received a command to end the probability setting change (the result of B7004 is "Y"), i.e., when the probability setting change has ended (after the setting has ended), it determines whether the internal reels 44c and 44d are in their initial operation (B7005).

In the processing of step B7005, the performance control device 300 determines whether the internal reels 44c and 44d are in the initial operation (B7005). Details of the initial operation of the internal reels 44c and 44d will be described later with reference to FIG. 88.

When the performance control device 300 determines that the internal reels 44c, 44d are in initial operation (the result of B7005 is "Y"), it ends the light guide plate control process. In this way, the light guide plate 251 will not emit light (initial operation) during the initial operation of the internal reels 44c, 44d. Note that during the initial operation of the internal reels 44c, 44d, the performance control device 300 may not only emit light due to the initial operation of the light guide plate 251, but also emit light due to the light-emitting performance.

On the other hand, if the performance control device 300 determines that the internal props 44c and 44d are not in initial operation (the result of B7005 is "N"), it performs initial operation control processing of the light guide plate 251 (B7006).

In the initial operation control process (B7006) of the light guide plate 251, the performance control device 300 performs control to cause all light-emitting elements attached to the ends of the light guide plate 251 to emit light as an initial operation, and to reflect the light from the light-emitting elements forward from the light guide plate 251 (initial operation control), as shown in FIG. 89, for example.

Figure 89 is a front view of the game board 30 when the light guide plate 251 according to the eighth embodiment is initially operated. The game center manager (including the hall staff) can confirm that the light guide plate 251 and the light emitting member are operating normally by visually checking the pattern raised on the surface of the light guide plate 251. When the initial operation control process (B7006) of the light guide plate 251 is completed, the performance control device 300 ends the light guide plate control process. Note that if the initial operation control condition of the external role 95a described later in Figure 88 is satisfied (the result of B7109 is "N"), as shown in Figure 89, the initial operation control of the external role 95a may be performed together with the initial operation control of the light guide plate 251. The external role 95a is a part of the frame performance device, and is a role that can be operated to protrude from above the glass frame 15 (opening portion), for example. The display screen of the display device 41 is turned off so that the pattern of the light guide plate 251 is easily visible, but it may be displayed at a lower brightness than normal, or text such as "Initializing" (for example, text 431 in FIG. 90) may be displayed on a screen based on a dark color such as black in a position that does not overlap with the pattern of the light guide plate 251 (a position visible from the front by the amusement facility manager, etc.).

[Movable body control processing]
FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the movable body control processing according to the eighth embodiment.

First, the performance control device 300 determines whether or not the power is being turned on (B7101). It may also determine whether or not the power has been restored after a power outage.

If the performance control device 300 determines that the power is not being turned on (result of B7101 is "N"), it starts normal control processing according to the performance content set in the variable performance setting process (Figure 44) etc. (B7103), and ends the movable body control process. On the other hand, if the performance control device 300 determines that the power is being turned on (result of B7101 is "Y"), it determines whether or not a command for changing the probability setting has been received (B7102).

When the performance control device 300 determines that it has received a command for changing the probability setting (result of B7102 is "Y"), it determines whether or not it has received a command to end the probability setting change (B7104). On the other hand, when the performance control device 300 determines that it has not received a command for changing the probability setting (result of B7102 is "N"), i.e., when the power is turned on normally, it determines whether or not the light guide plate 251 is in initial operation (B7105).

In the processing of step B7104, if the performance control device 300 determines that it has received a command to end the probability setting change (the result of B7104 is "Y"), i.e., when the probability setting change has ended (after the setting has ended), it determines whether or not the light guide plate 251 is in initial operation (B7105). On the other hand, if the performance control device 300 determines that it has not received a command to end the probability setting change (the result of B7104 is "N"), i.e., when the probability setting is being changed, it starts the initial operation control processing of only the internal reels 44c and 44d (B7107).

In the initial operation control process (B7107) of the internal reels 44c and 44d, for example, the motor that moves the internal reels 44c and the motor that moves the internal reels 44d of the board performance device 44 are driven, and the internal reels 44c and 44d are moved forward on the display screen of the display device 41 so that the characters "super hot" can be recognized, and then the internal reels 44c and 44d are controlled to move to their initial positions (initial operation control). Note that, for example, the initial operation control of the internal reels 44c and the initial operation control of the internal reels 44d may be executed in sequence so that the initial operation control of the internal reels 44d is executed after the initial operation control of the internal reels 44c is completed. Also, when other internal reels different from the internal reels 44c and 44d are further attached, the initial operation control of each internal reel is executed in sequence.

In addition, in the processing of step B7105, if the performance control device 300 determines that the light guide plate 251 is in the initial operation (the result of B7105 is "Y"), the processing proceeds to step B7109, where it determines whether or not a main body frame open error has occurred due to the main body frame being open (B7109). On the other hand, if the performance control device 300 determines that the light guide plate 251 is not in the initial operation (the result of B7105 is "N"), it proceeds to step B7106, where it determines whether or not a main body frame open error has occurred (B7106). For example, if a status on command indicating a main body frame open error (front frame open error) is received as an error/illegal command (B1315), it can be determined that a main body frame open error is occurring.

In the processing of step B7106, if the performance control device 300 determines that a main frame opening error has occurred (the result of B7106 is "Y"), it starts the initial operation control processing only for the internal reels 44c and 44d (B7107). On the other hand, if the performance control device 300 determines that a main frame opening error has not occurred (the result of B7106 is "N"), it starts the initial operation control processing of the internal reels 44c and 44d and the external reels 95a as shown in FIG. 90 (B7108).

Figure 90 is a front view of the game board 30 when the internal reels 44c, 44d and the external reels 95a according to the eighth embodiment are initially operated. In the processing of step B7108, the performance control device 300 performs the initial operation control processing of the internal reels 44c, 44d as well as the initial operation control processing of the external reels 95a, as shown in FIG. 90, for example. Also, as shown in FIG. 90, when the internal reels 44c, 44d move forward on the display screen of the display device 41, the word "initializing" 431 is displayed in a position that does not overlap from the front (a position that can be seen from the front by the amusement facility manager, etc.). When the initial operation control processing (B7108) of the internal reels 44c, 44d and the external reels 95a is completed, the performance control device 300 ends the movable body control processing.

In addition, in the processing of step B7109, if the performance control device 300 determines that a main frame opening error has occurred (the result of B7109 is "Y"), it ends the movable body control processing. On the other hand, if the performance control device 300 determines that a main frame opening error has not occurred (the result of B7109 is "N"), it starts the initial operation control processing only for the external role 95a (B7110). By starting the initial operation control processing of the external role 95a while the light guide plate 251 is in the initial operation (the result of B7105 is "Y"), the amusement facility manager, etc. can simultaneously check the operation of the external role 95a and the pattern of the light guide plate 251, as shown in FIG. 89. After that, the performance control device 300 ends the movable body control processing. Also, during the initial operation of the light guide plate 251 (if the result of B7105 is "Y"), only the external role 95a is initial operation (B7110), but the initial operation of the internal role 44c, 44d is not executed. During the initial operation of the light guide plate 251, the performance control device 300 may not only perform the initial operation of the internal reels 44c and 44d, but may also not perform any movement due to the performance, and may not illuminate the light-emitting members of the internal reels 44c and 44d.

[Timing chart of initial operation control process]
Next, the timing of the initial operation control process of the performance control device 300 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 91. Fig. 91 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the initial operation control process according to the eighth embodiment.

When the power is turned on in the normal state at time T71, the initial operation control process of the light guide plate 251 is started (B7006), and the light emitting members (LEDs) at the ends of the light guide plate 251 start emitting light, as shown in FIG. 89.

In addition, when the initial operation control process of the light guide plate 251 is started (the result of B7105 is "Y"), the initial operation control process of the external role 95a is started by the movable body control process (B7110), and the external role 95a moves (operates) to a position where it protrudes from above the game board 30. On the other hand, the internal roles 44c and 44d are stopped without being subjected to initial operation control, and the display screen of the display device 41 is turned off.

At time T72, the initial operation control process of the light guide plate 251 ends (result of B7105 is "N"), the light emission of the light emitting members of the light guide plate 251 ends, and the initial operation control of the internal reels 44c, 44d begins (B7108), and as shown in FIG. 90, the internal reels 44c, 44d move (operate) forward on the display screen of the display device 41. Note that the initial operation control process of the external reels 95a continues. Also, the text "Initializing" 431 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 in a position that does not overlap with the internal reels 44c, 44d (for example, the bottom right of the screen) (initialization display).

At time T73, the movement (operation) of the external reel 95a and the internal reels 44c, 44d ends, the light-emitting members of the internal reels 44c, 44d start to emit light at their respective positions, and when the light-emitting ends at time T74, the movement of the external reels 95a and the internal reels 44c, 44d starts to return to their original positions. In this way, while the internal reels 44c, 44d (movable reels) themselves are moving (operating), the light-emitting members of the internal reels 44c, 44d do not emit light (initial operation) in front of the display device 41. Note that the movement of the external reels 95a and the movement of the internal reels 44c, 44d do not have to start or end at the same time.

When the movement of the internal props 44c and 44d ends at time T75, the initialization display shown on the display screen of the display device 41 disappears and the display screen changes to the normal display (normal display). Then, at time T76, the movement of the external prop 95a ends, and the initial operation control process of the performance control device 300 ends. Note that the display screen of the display device 41 may be switched to the normal display when the movement of the external prop 95a ends at time T76.

Note that, although the initial operation control process of the internal parts 44c and 44d is performed after the initial operation control process of the light guide plate 251 is completed, the order may be reversed. In other words, the initial operation control process of the light guide plate 251 may be performed after the initial operation control process of the internal parts 44c and 44d is completed.

[Game board when a variable display game is played during normal times]
Next, referring to Fig. 92 and Fig. 93, a case where a variable display game is performed during normal operation of the performance control device 300 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. Fig. 92 is a front view of the game board 30 when the variable display game according to the eighth embodiment is being performed.

When the variable display game is played during normal times (when not in the initial operation control process, when not changing the probability setting, or when not checking the probability setting), as shown in FIG. 92, the display screen of the display device 41 of the game board 30 according to the eighth embodiment displays the first decorative symbols A to C (identification information, identification symbols, decorative special symbols) in multiple variable display areas 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, center area 610C). For example, the first decorative symbols A to C are displayed as "7↓7" in a reach state as shown in FIG. 92. In addition, the internal reels 44c and 44d are stopped in their positions (initial positions) before moving (operating), and a part of the lower part of the internal reel 44c overlaps with the upper end of the display screen of the display device 41, and a part of the upper part of the internal reel 44d overlaps with the lower end of the display screen.

Figure 93 is a front view of the game board 30 when a reach effect, which is an effect corresponding to a reach state, is performed while playing the variable display game according to the eighth embodiment.

When a reach effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 93, for example, a light-emitting effect is performed in which the lighting components around the frame decoration devices 18a, 18b and the upper speaker 19a emit light, the internal reels 44c, 44b move (operate, move) forward on the display screen of the display device 41, and the player can recognize that the words "super hot" are displayed side by side. In addition, a light-emitting effect is performed in which the light-emitting components of the internal reels 44c, 44b emit light, and an effect corresponding to the reach effect is also displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

Then, by performing a reach effect from the state shown in FIG. 92, the first decorative patterns A to C in the variable display area 610 are displayed small in the bottom right corner of the display screen as shown in FIG. 93. Note that instead of the first decorative patterns A to C in the variable display area 610, the reduced decorative pattern (small pattern) in the variable display area 615 may be displayed small in the bottom right corner of the display screen.

[Game board when a variable display game is played during the initial operation control process]
Next, a case where a variable display game is performed during the initial operation control process of the performance control device 300 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 94. Fig. 94 is a front view of the game board 30 when a reach effect is performed in the variable display game while the initial operation control process according to the eighth embodiment is being executed.

When a variable display game is played during the initial operation control process, as shown in FIG. 94, the variable display "7↓7" of the first decorative symbols A to C is displayed small in the lower right corner of the display screen of the display device 41 of the game board 30 according to the eighth embodiment, as in normal times, while the effect of the display screen corresponding to the reach effect of FIG. 93 is not displayed. For example, the display screen of the display device 41 is displayed as a black screen with no display other than the first decorative symbols A to C. Note that the display screen of the display device 41 may display an initialization display together with the variable display "7↓7" of the first decorative symbols A to C, or the entire screen may be displayed dark when the initialization display is performed.

In addition, the internal reels 44c and 44d, which are stopped in their initial positions, do not move and the light-emitting members emit light in place to create a light-emitting effect. Therefore, the player can see that part of the bottom end of the internal reel 44c and part of the top of the internal reel 44d are emitting light.

The internal reels 44c and 44d emit light even during the initial operation control process. However, unlike the light emission effect associated with the reach performance, the internal reels 44c and 44d are not emitted due to the initial operation control process until they move forward on the display screen of the display device 41. The time during which the internal reels 44c and 44d emit light due to the initial operation control process (from time T73 to time T74 shown in FIG. 91) is long enough for the arcade manager or the like to be able to confirm the light emission (e.g., 5 seconds), and is relatively short compared to the time during which the internal reels 44c and 44d emit light due to the reach performance (e.g., 30 seconds). Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the light emission effect of the light-emitting members of the internal reels 44c and 44d, the player can recognize that it is not light emission due to the initial operation control process, but is a light emission effect associated with the reach performance.

[Modification of the game board when a variable display game is played during the initial operation control process]
Next, a modified example of a case where a variable display game is performed during the initial operation control process of the performance control device 300 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 95. Fig. 95 is a modified example of a front view of the game board 30 when a reach effect is performed in the variable display game while the initial operation control process according to the eighth embodiment is being executed.

When a variable display game is played during the initial operation control process, as shown in FIG. 95, the variable display "7↓7" of the first decorative symbols A to C is displayed small in the lower right corner of the display screen of the display device 41 of the game board 30 of the modified example of the eighth embodiment, as in normal times, while the effect of the display screen corresponding to the reach effect of FIG. 93 is not displayed. For example, the display screen of the display device 41 is displayed as a black screen with no display other than the first decorative symbols A to C. Note that the display screen of the display device 41 may display an initialization display together with the variable display "7↓7" of the first decorative symbols A to C, or the entire screen may be displayed dark when the initialization display is performed.

In addition, in accordance with the reach performance, as shown in FIG. 95, a light-emitting performance is performed in which the lighting members around the frame decoration devices 18a, 18b and the upper speaker 19a emit light. On the other hand, the internal parts 44c, 44d continue to stop at the initial position, and the light-emitting members continue to be turned off. Note that the time (e.g., 5 sec) during which the lighting members around the frame decoration devices 18a, 18b and the upper speaker 19a emit light due to the initial operation control process is relatively short compared to the time (e.g., 30 sec) during which the lighting members emit light due to the reach performance, as with the internal parts 44c, 44d described in FIG. 94. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the light-emitting performance of the lighting members around the frame decoration devices 18a, 18b and the upper speaker 19a, they can recognize that it is a light-emitting performance associated with the reach performance, not a light-emitting performance due to the initial operation process.

[Modification of the game board when a variable display game is played during the initial operation control process]
Next, a second modified example of a case where a variable display game is performed during the initial operation control process of the performance control device 300 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 96. Fig. 96 is a second modified example of a front view of the game board 30 when a reach effect is performed in the variable display game while the initial operation control process according to the eighth embodiment is being executed.

When a variable display game is played during the initial operation control process, as shown in FIG. 96, the variable display "7↓7" of the decorative first symbols A to C is displayed small in the lower right corner of the display screen of the display device 41 of the game board 30 of the second modified example according to the eighth embodiment, as in normal times, and an effect corresponding to the reach effect of FIG. 93 (the original reach effect) is displayed across the entire display screen. Therefore, the player can recognize that a reach effect is being performed by visually checking the effect displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

On the other hand, the internal parts 44c and 44d remain stopped in their initial positions, and the light-emitting elements remain turned off. In addition, the lighting elements around the frame decoration devices 18a and 18b and the upper speaker 19a also remain turned off.

[Actions and Effects of Eighth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment includes a performance control means (performance control device 300) capable of displaying on the display device 41 a performance related to a variable display game (special symbol variable display game) that varies identification information (identification symbol, decorative special symbol, decorative first symbol A to C, main special symbol). The gaming machine 10 includes a movable role (internal role 44c, 44d) capable of performing a predetermined operation in front of the display device 41, and a light-emitting performance means (light guide plate 251 and its light-emitting member, or the light-emitting member of the internal role 44c, 44d) capable of performing a predetermined light-emitting performance in front of the display device 41. The performance control means can perform the initial operation of the movable role and the light-emitting performance means by turning on the power to the gaming machine 10, and does not perform the initial operation and the predetermined operation of the movable role during the initial operation of the light-emitting performance means.

With this gaming machine 10, the initial operation of the movable parts (internal parts 44c, 44d) and the light-emitting means (light guide plate 251 and its light-emitting members, or the light-emitting members of internal parts 44c, 44d) that are the multiple members that perform the game-related effects can be easily confirmed, allowing for efficient maintenance.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the light-emitting performance means (light guide plate 251 and its light-emitting member, or the light-emitting member of the internal role 44c, 44d) has a light guide plate 251 on which a predetermined pattern appears based on the irradiation of light from the end, and an irradiation means (light-emitting member of the light guide plate 251) that is arranged at the end of the light guide plate 251 so as to face the opposite side of the light guide plate 251 and can irradiate light to the light guide plate 251. The performance control means (performance control device 300) does not execute the initial operation and the predetermined operation of the movable role (internal role 44c, 44d) while the irradiation means of the light-emitting performance means is irradiating light by the initial operation. According to such a gaming machine 10, the manager of the game facility can check the initial operation of the light guide plate 251 and the movable role separately, so that maintenance can be performed efficiently.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the light-emitting means is a light source (light-emitting member) installed in the movable role (internal role 44c, 44d). With such a gaming machine 10, the operation of the movable role itself and the light-emitting operation of the light-emitting means of the movable role can be checked separately as initial operations, so that maintenance can be performed efficiently in the same manner as described above.

The gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is equipped with a performance control means (performance control device 300) capable of displaying on the display device 41 a performance related to a variable display game (special pattern variable display game) that varies identification information (identification pattern, decorative special pattern, decorative first pattern A-C, main special pattern). The gaming machine 10 is equipped with a movable role (internal role 44c, 44d) capable of performing a predetermined operation in front of the display device 41, and a light-emitting performance means (light guide plate 251 and its light-emitting member, or the light-emitting member of the internal role 44c, 44d) capable of performing a predetermined light-emitting performance in front of the display device 41. The performance control means can perform the initial operation of the movable role and the light-emitting performance means by turning on the power to the gaming machine 10, and does not perform the light-emitting performance and initial operation of the light-emitting performance means during the initial operation of the movable role.

With this gaming machine 10, the initial operation of the movable parts (internal parts 44c, 44d) and the light-emitting means (light guide plate 251 and its light-emitting members, or the light-emitting members of internal parts 44c, 44d) that are the multiple members that perform the game-related effects can be easily confirmed, allowing for efficient maintenance.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the light-emitting performance means includes a light guide plate 251 that makes a predetermined pattern appear based on the irradiation of light from the end, and an irradiation means (light-emitting member of the light guide plate 251) that is arranged at the end of the light guide plate 251 so as to face the opposite side of the light guide plate 251 and can irradiate light onto the light guide plate 251. The performance control means (performance control device 300) does not cause the irradiation means to irradiate light during the initial operation of the movable role (internal role 44c, 44d). With such a gaming machine 10, the manager of the game arcade can check the initial operation of the light guide plate 251 and the movable role separately, allowing efficient maintenance.

[Ninth embodiment]
The ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 97. Note that the configuration other than that described below may be the same as the first to eighth embodiments. The ninth embodiment relates to the presentation of the variable display game before and after power recovery.

[Timing chart of the display mode of the variable display game according to the ninth embodiment]
Figure 97 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the display mode (presentation mode) of the variable display game before and after recovery from a power outage in the ninth embodiment.

At time T81, when there are two losers and two hits in the start memory in that order, when a variable display game based on the loser is started, the special LED (special display (special display 1 display 51 or special display 2 display 52), light-emitting section) used to execute the variable display game starts to emit light (on), and the display screen of the display device 41 starts displaying the variable display using the decorative identification symbols (identification information, identification symbol, decorative special symbol, decorative first symbols A-C, main symbol). Note that a loser is a hold (start memory) where the display result (stop result) of the variable display game is a loser stop mode, and a hit hold is a hold where the display result of the variable display game is a big win result (special result).

On the other hand, the game state is not a special game state (jackpot state) but a normal game state, and the internal devices (44c, 44d) are stopped.

Then, the power is turned off at time T82 due to a power outage, and the power outage continues until time T83. When the power is turned on (restored) at time T83, the variable display game based on the pending miss is restarted, and the special symbol LED starts emitting light again (on). On the other hand, the display screen of the display device 41 displays a power outage recovery screen (start-up screen) instead of the decorative identification symbol. After that, when the power is restored, the initial operation control process of the internal reels 44c, 44d is started, and the initial operation of the internal reels 44c, 44d is performed as the first operation.

In addition, if a power outage occurs while the start memory stored in the RAM includes a start memory in which the display result of the special chart variation display game is a jackpot result (special result), the game control device 100 (start memory means) can retain the start memory with the special result by the backup power supply unit 420.

At time T84, when the variable display game based on the loss hold ends, the special chart LED is turned off (OFF). Note that the special chart LED may be illuminated (ON) when the loss stop state is reached.

Then, at time T85, when a variable display game based on a pending win is executed, the special symbol LED starts to emit light (ON). Also, on the display screen of the display device 41, when the power outage recovery screen ends, the decorative identification symbol is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the variable display game based on a pending win, and a reach performance is started. After that, the performance of the internal reels 44c and 44d corresponding to the reach performance is executed as a reach operation (second operation).

When the variable display game based on the winning reservation ends at time T86, the special symbol LED is turned off and the reach operation of the internal role 44c44d ends. The special symbol LED may be illuminated (turned on) when the jackpot result mode (special result mode) is reached. Then, the decorative identification symbol on the display screen of the display device 41 stops displaying the variable, and the jackpot result mode (special result mode), such as "777", is displayed. After a fanfare performance (not shown) from time T86 to time T87, the jackpot performance (jackpot screen, jackpot round performance) begins at time T87.

When the jackpot performance starts at time T87, the game state becomes jackpot (jackpot state, special game state), and the performance of the internal parts 44c and 44d corresponding to the jackpot performance is executed as a jackpot operation (third operation). In this way, in all of the first operation, second operation, and third operation, the internal parts 44c and 44d, which are the same movable parts, operate.

When a variable display game based on a winning reservation is executed, if the initial operation (first operation) of the internal reels 44c, 44d is incomplete, the reach operation (second operation) may be skipped and the jackpot operation (third operation) may be executed after the first operation.

In addition, when the power is turned on (power restored) at time T83, the variable display game based on the pending miss may be restarted without being resumed, and may be restarted from the beginning. By restarting from the beginning in this way, even if the variable display game based on the pending miss has a short variable time (non-reach variable), there is enough time to complete the initial operation (first operation) of the internal reels 44c, 44d during the variable display game, and the reach operation (second operation) may be executed after the initial operation without being skipped.

The same movable part (internal parts 44c, 44d) may be operated in both the initial operation (first operation) and the reach operation (second operation), so that the movable part does not execute the jackpot operation (third operation). The jackpot operation (third operation) may also be executed by another movable part (a movable part other than the internal parts 44c, 44d (e.g., external part 95a)). Even in such a case, the initial operation of the movable part is executed during the variable display game based on the miss reserve, so that the reach operation by the movable part can be started immediately during the reach performance of the variable display game based on the win reserve, which improves the interest of the game.

[Actions and Effects of the Ninth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment can generate a special game state (during a big win, big win game state) in which a player is awarded a game value when the display result of the variable display game (special pattern variable display game) that varies the identification information (identification pattern, decorative special pattern, decorative identification pattern, decorative first pattern A to C, main special pattern) becomes a special result (big win result state). The gaming machine 10 includes a movable role (internal role 44c, 44d) that performs a game performance, a start memory means (game control device 100) that can store a start memory (reserved) that becomes the execution right of the variable display game based on the establishment of a start condition (for example, winning at the start winning hole), and a performance control means (performance control device 300) that can execute the control of the movable role and the control of displaying a start memory display (reserved display during special pattern variation 643, reserved display 633) corresponding to the start memory. The start storage means holds the start storage which results in a special result when a power outage occurs in a state where the start storage means stores a start storage which results in a special result as a display result of the variable display game. The performance control means operates the movable role with a first operation (initial operation) after the power outage is restored when a power outage (power off) occurs in a state where the start storage means stores a start storage which results in a special result as a display result of the variable display game, operates the movable role with a second operation (reach operation) in the variable display game executed after the first operation, operates the movable role with a third operation (jackpot operation) in the special game state executed after the second operation, and operates the same movable role in any of the first operation, the second operation, and the third operation.

With this type of gaming machine 10, after the power is restored (recovery), the first action (initial action) is performed by the movable role (internal role 44c, 44d), so that the performance of the movable role can immediately begin with the second action (action during reach) or the third action (action during jackpot), thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, when a power outage (power off) occurs in a state in which the start memory (reserved) stored in the start memory means (game control device 100) contains a start memory in which the display result of the variable display game (special chart variable display game) is a special result (jackpot result mode), the performance control means (performance control device 300) operates the movable role (internal role 44c, 44d) with a first operation (initial operation) after the power outage is restored, and operates the movable role with a second operation (reach operation) in the variable display game executed after the first operation, and operates the same movable role in both the first operation and the second operation. According to such a gaming machine 10, after the power outage is restored (power is restored), the first operation (initial operation) is performed by the movable role (internal role 44c, 44d), so that the performance of the movable role can be immediately started by the second operation (reach operation), which similarly improves the interest of the game.

[Tenth embodiment]
The tenth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 98 and 99. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as the first to ninth embodiments. The tenth embodiment relates to the display of identification information (decorative special symbols, decorative identification symbols) when a jackpot occurs.

[Example of a display screen of the display device according to the tenth embodiment]
Figure 98 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the display device 41 when identification information (identification pattern, decorative special pattern, decorative identification pattern, decorative first patterns A to C, and main special pattern) is displayed in each display mode in the tenth embodiment.

First, FIG. 98(a) shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the game state is the normal game state, i.e., during the first period, and the stopping result (display result) of the variable display game (special variable display game) is the jackpot result mode (special result mode), i.e., the first display mode. The decorative first patterns A to C (left pattern 611a, right pattern 611b, center pattern 611c) in the variable display area 610 (left area 610A (left variable display area 610A), right area 610B (right variable display area 610B), center area 610C (center variable display area 610C)) are stopped in the jackpot result mode, for example, "777", and the words "! Jackpot!" are displayed at the top of the display screen.

In the first display mode, the first decorative patterns A to C each display the character (Torataro) and the character's name "Torataro" in addition to the identification information (pattern) "7."

When the variable display game is stopped, the start memory (pending) corresponding to the variable display game is consumed, and the special pattern variable pending display 643 (start memory display, special pattern consumption pending display) in the pending consumption area 640 (specific display section, variable pending display area) is hidden. Also, the pending display section 630 (start memory display section) and the pending display 633 (pending, start memory) are hidden, but the pending display section 630 may be displayed. Also, the performance control device 300 may use the decorative first patterns A to C of the first display mode to perform a performance in which the jackpot pattern (for example, "777") stops by making the character (Torataro, etc.) perform a predetermined action when the game is temporarily stopped.

Next, FIG. 98(b) shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the game state is a specific game state (probability change state, probability change state, time-saving state), i.e., during the second period, and the stopping result (display result) of the variable display game (special chart variable display game) is a jackpot result state (special result state), i.e., the second display state. The decorative first patterns A to C (left pattern 611a, right pattern 611b, middle pattern 611c) in the variable display area 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, middle area 610C) are stopped in a jackpot result state, for example, "777", and the words "! Jackpot!" are displayed at the top of the display screen. When the game state is a specific game state, for example, a right hit instruction notification 691, which is a notification instructing the player to hit right, may be displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. Also, as in the first display state, the special chart variable pending display 643 and the like are not displayed.

In the second display mode, the first decorative patterns A to C each display only the identification information (pattern) "7" large, and no characters or letters of the character's name are displayed.

Figure 98 (c) shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the game state is the special game state (jackpot state), i.e., during the third period. The display screen shows the round effect as an action related to the effect during the jackpot. In the upper left corner of the display screen, the round number display 676 showing the current number of jackpot rounds is displayed, for example, as "8 ROUND".

In addition, as the identification information (pattern) of the third display mode, only one identification information (stop pattern 611d) of the stop result (display result) of the variable display game (special variable display game) when the jackpot result mode is reached is displayed in the variable display area 610D (stop pattern display area 610D) in the lower left corner of the display screen (for example, "7"). Therefore, the player can check which pattern has become the jackpot during the round by visually checking the identification information (stop pattern 611d) of the third display mode. As a result, the player can easily recognize the type of the specific game state (probability state, probability variable state, time-saving state) to which the player will transition after the end of the round from the pattern type (probability variable jackpot pattern or normal jackpot pattern) during the round, which can improve the interest of the game. Note that the identification information (stop pattern 611d) of the third display mode may be displayed in a display mode that is approximately the same as the first display mode or the second display mode. Also, not only during a round, but also during the ending, the identification information (symbol) of the third display mode may be displayed on the display screen. Furthermore, the identification information of the third display mode may be rotated on an axis while retaining the original symbol (e.g., "7"). Also, the identification information of the third display mode may be rotated on an axis while retaining the original symbol (e.g., "7") in accordance with the presentation during the round.

In addition, in either the case where a jackpot state (special result) is reached in the first display mode or the case where a jackpot state is reached in the second display mode, the presentation control device 300 can display the identification information (stopping pattern 611d) in the third display mode during the jackpot game state (special game state (round or fanfare presentation, ending presentation)). Therefore, the player can check the stopping pattern 611d every time the special game state is reached, making it easier for the player to grasp in advance the advantageous state (specific game state, special benefit) that will occur after the special game state ends.

The identification information (design) may also be configured to have one or more common elements in all of the first to third display modes, such as all of the numbers in the design being displayed in red.

[Screen transition diagram of the display screen of the display device according to the tenth embodiment]
Figure 99 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the tenth embodiment, and is an example of the screen transition of the entire game from when the display result of the variable display game (special chart variable display game) becomes a special result state (jackpot result state) to when the special game (jackpot round) starts.

Figure 99 (b1) is the same as Figure 98 (a), and shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the game state is the normal game state (during the first period) and the stopped result (display result) of the variable display game is the jackpot result mode (special result mode), i.e., the first display mode.

As shown in FIG. 99(b2), the performance control device 300 hides the decorative first patterns A to C in the first display mode. In addition, as part of the fanfare performance, the performance control device 300 displays the identification information (stop pattern 611d) of the third display mode in the variable display area 610D at the position of the number (identification information, pattern) (e.g., "7") of the decorative first pattern B (right pattern 611b) in the variable display area 610B that is displayed when the jackpot result mode is reached. Note that the words "! Jackpot!" are left at the top of the display screen, but may be hidden.

As shown by the dashed arrow in Figure 99 (b3), the performance control device 300 smoothly moves the identification information (stopping pattern 611d) of the third display mode of the variable display area 610D to the bottom center of the display screen, allowing the player to visually recognize the manner in which the "7" of the stopping pattern 611d is moving.

Then, as shown in FIG. 99(b4), the performance control device 300 smoothly moves the identification information (stopping pattern 611d) of the third display mode of the variable display area 610D to the lower left corner of the display screen before the start of the round, so that a "7" is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, as in the stopping pattern 611d of the third display mode described above in FIG. 98(c), and the round performance begins ("1 ROUND" is displayed).

In this way, when the display result of the variable display game is a jackpot result mode, the identification information (stopping pattern 611d) of the third display mode is displayed in the place where the decorative first pattern B (right pattern 611b) of the first display mode was displayed from the fanfare effect to the round effect, and the stopping pattern 611d is smoothly moved to the lower left corner of the display screen. Not only can this allow the player to easily recognize the type of specific game state after the round ends, but it can also be used to create a performance with a visual effect, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In FIG. 99, the identification information (pattern) of the third display mode (stop pattern 611d) is displayed in the location where the decorative first pattern B (right pattern 611b) of the identification information (pattern) of the first display mode was displayed, and the stop pattern 611d is moved to the lower left corner of the display screen. However, the stop pattern 611d may be displayed in the location where the decorative first pattern A (left pattern 611a) or the decorative first pattern C (middle pattern 611c) of the first display mode was displayed, and the stop pattern 611d may be moved to the lower left corner of the display screen.

[Actions and Effects of the Tenth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment includes a presentation control means (presentation control device 300) capable of displaying presentations related to a variable display game (special pattern variable display game) that varies identification information (identification pattern, decorative special pattern, decorative first pattern A to C, main special pattern) on a display device 41. The presentation control means displays the identification information in a first display mode (a jackpot result mode in a normal game state (FIG. 98(a))) during a first period (normal game state), displays the identification information in a second display mode (a jackpot result mode in a specific game state (FIG. 98(b))) during a second period (specific game state), and displays the identification information in a third display mode (a display mode in a special game state (FIG. 98(c))) during a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a game value is given to a player when the display result of the variable display game becomes a special result (jackpot state).

With this type of gaming machine 10, the display mode of the identification information changes depending on the gaming state, making it possible to inform the player whether or not the gaming state is advantageous, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. In addition, by displaying the identification information during a special gaming state, it becomes easier to know in advance the advantageous state (specific gaming state, special benefit) that will occur after the special gaming state ends.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the presentation control means (presentation control device 300) detects whether the identification information (identification pattern, decorative special pattern, decorative first pattern A to C, main special pattern) has a special result (jackpot state) in the first display mode (jackpot result mode in the normal gaming state (Figure 98 (a))) during the first period (normal gaming state), or has a special result in the second display mode (jackpot result mode in the specific gaming state (Figure 98 (b))) during the second period (specific gaming state). Even in this case, the identification information is displayed in the third display mode (display mode during special game state (FIG. 98(c))) during the special game state (jackpot game state). With this gaming machine 10, whether a special result is obtained in the first display mode or the second display mode, the identification information is displayed in the third display mode during the special game state, making it easier for the player to grasp in advance the advantageous state (specific game state, special offer) that will occur after the special game state ends.

[Eleventh embodiment]
The eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 100 to Fig. 103. Note that configurations other than those described below may be similar to those of the first to tenth embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to tenth embodiments, and duplicate descriptions are appropriately omitted in the description.

The eleventh embodiment relates to the configuration mode (configuration mode) of the decorative special symbols in the decorative special symbol variable display game executed on the display device 41, and the variable mode (variable display mode) of the decorative special symbols.

[Composition and variation of special decorative patterns]
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing the configuration and variation of the decorative special symbols (decoration identification information, decorative symbols) displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. On the display screen, the left symbol 611a (first identification information), the right symbol 611b (second identification information), and the middle symbol 611c (third identification information) can be displayed as decorative special symbols. The left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c are displayed in the left variable display area 610A, the right variable display area 610B, and the center variable display area 610C, respectively. These variable displays are set as part of the variable display by the performance control device 300 in steps B2010 and B2013 of the variable display setting process. In addition, with regard to the variation of the decorative special symbol variation display game, the variation before the reach is established is sometimes called the first half variation, and the variation after the reach is established (during the reach) is sometimes called the second half variation.

As shown in (A1) of Figure 100, before the reach state is reached, that is, in the variable display before the reach is established, the left pattern 611a is composed of a character image 612a (character component, character part) showing a character and a letter image 613a (letter component, letter part) showing numbers (letters). Similarly, in the variable display before the reach is established, the right pattern 611b is composed of a character image 612b (character component, character part) showing a character and a letter image 613b (letter component, letter part) showing numbers. Note that numbers are letters that represent numbers, and include Arabic numerals as shown in the figure, as well as Chinese numerals and Roman numerals.

In this embodiment, when the decorative special design includes characters and numbers as images, the characters correspond one-to-one to the numbers and are different for each number, but this is not limited to the above and the same character may be used for different numbers.

On the other hand, in the variable display before the reach is established in (A1), the middle pattern 611c displayed in the center is composed only of a character image 613c (character component, character portion) showing a number. In this way, the middle pattern 611c is displayed smaller than the left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b, and the central variable display area 610C becomes smaller (narrower) than the left variable display area 610A and the right variable display area 610B. As a result, the area other than the variable display area 610 on the display screen is expanded, and the performance area for performances other than the variable display can be effectively secured, improving the interest of the game. Furthermore, since the middle pattern 611c is small and is composed only of character images 613c showing numbers, it does not overlap with the left pattern 611a or right pattern 611b (or the left variable display area 610A or right variable display area 610B), making it easier for the player to see the variable displays of the left pattern 611a, right pattern 611b, and middle pattern 611c, increasing the fun of the game.

In addition, in (A1), not only the center pattern 611c, but also one of the left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b may be composed only of the character images 613a, 613b showing numbers. In this case, the area other than the variable display area 610 on the display screen will be further expanded.

If the three decorative special patterns, left pattern 611a, right pattern 611b, and center pattern 611c, each contained a character image representing a character in order to impress the character on the player, the three decorative special patterns would occupy most of the display screen of the display device 41, and there would be a risk that the effects would not be able to be displayed effectively outside the variable display area 610.

Also, before the reach of (A1) is achieved, the left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b are displayed in a variable manner by vertical scrolling. For example, in vertical scrolling, a series of nine patterns (decorative identification patterns) corresponding to the numbers 1 to 9 appear in sequence on the display screen, move vertically (up and down) across the display screen, and then disappear from the display screen. Note that the left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b may also be displayed in a variable manner by horizontal scrolling, in which a series of patterns move horizontally.

On the other hand, before the reach of (A1) is established, the direction of the change display of the center symbol 611c (third identification information) is different from that of the left symbol 611a (first identification information) and the right symbol 611b (second identification information), and the change is displayed in a rotational change that is visually recognized by the player as rotating around an axis. The rotational change may not only be a mode in which one symbol rotates, but also a mode in which a series of multiple symbols are switched and displayed for each rotation. Note that instead of a rotational change, a forward and backward change (forward and backward scrolling) in which a series of overlapping multiple symbols are made to appear to move forward and backward using perspective or the like, a switching change in which a series of multiple symbols are simply switched and displayed in order at the same position, or a swinging change in which one symbol swings slightly may be performed.

The rotational change of the middle pattern 611c (which can also be a forward/backward change, a switching change, or a swinging change) is a change in which the pattern does not cross the display screen, and unlike the vertical scrolling of the left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b, does not require a wide changing display area that extends long in one direction (scroll direction) like the left changing display area 610A or the right changing display area 610B. Therefore, due to the rotational change of the middle pattern 611c, the central changing display area 610C becomes smaller (narrower) than the left changing display area 610A or the right changing display area 610B. This makes it possible to effectively secure a performance area for performances other than the changing display, and makes it easier to visually recognize each of the changing displays of the left pattern 611a, the right pattern 611b, and the middle pattern 611c, improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in (A1), two pending displays 633 are displayed in the pending display section 630 at the bottom of the display screen corresponding to pending (here, the first start memory). In addition, a rectangular pending consumption area 640 is displayed in the center bottom of the display screen. A changing pending display 633a indicating a pending related to the currently running special chart change display game (the start memory that was the execution right of this special chart change display game) is displayed in the pending consumption area 640. However, due to the rotational change of the middle pattern 611c, the central changing display area 610C becomes smaller and does not overlap with the pending display section 630 or the pending consumption area 640, so that the middle pattern 611c does not overlap with the pending display 633 or the changing pending display 633a, and the visibility of the middle pattern 611c, the pending display 633, or the changing pending display 633a is good, and the interest in the game is increased. Furthermore, the special chart 1 reserved number display 650 displays the current number of special chart 1 reserved (first start memory) "2", and the special chart 2 reserved number display 660 displays the current number of special chart 2 reserved (second start memory) "0".

As shown in (A2) of FIG. 100, when a reach is reached (when a reach is reached), the left and right patterns 611a and 611b temporarily stop and sway and fluctuate, so the fluctuating mode (i.e., the fluctuating display mode) is changed and changed from the vertical scroll before the reach is reached. The configuration mode of the left pattern 611a does not change, and the left pattern 611a is composed of a character image 612a showing a character and a letter image 613a showing a number, just like (A1). Similarly, the configuration mode of the right pattern 611b does not change, and the right pattern 611b is composed of a character image 612b showing a character and a letter image 613b showing a number, just like (A1). However, the overall size of the left and right patterns 611a and 611b becomes smaller compared to before the reach is reached (before the temporary stop).

On the other hand, when the reach is reached in (A2), the middle pattern 611c is displayed by vertical scrolling, and the display of the rotational change before the reach is reached is changed and changed. The direction of the display of the middle pattern 611c is the same as the direction of the display of the left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b before they are temporarily stopped (i.e., the vertical or up-down direction of the display screen) and corresponds to it (the direction of the display is aligned). This eliminates the sense of incongruity felt by the player due to the rotational change of the middle pattern 611c, and can surprise the player and increase the interest of the game. In (A2), the middle pattern 611c of the consecutive number 5 and the middle pattern 611c' of the number 6 are shown among a series of multiple patterns (decorative identification patterns) that move on the display screen by vertical scrolling.

Furthermore, when the reach of (A2) is established, the configuration of the middle pattern 611c is changed and changed, changing from the configuration before the reach was established, which was only the character image 613c, to a configuration consisting of a character image 612c showing a character and a character image 613c showing a number. Therefore, the configuration of the middle pattern 611c becomes the same as the configuration of the left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b, and a commonality appears between these three (three types) decorative special patterns, eliminating the player's sense of incongruity, and giving the player a surprise, which can increase the interest of the game. Furthermore, the player will focus on the middle pattern 611c (611c') which has been changed to a new configuration by the addition of the character image 612c (612c'), making it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game, such as the establishment of the reach.

In addition, because the overall size of the left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b is reduced from before the reach is established (before the temporary stop), even if the middle pattern 611c, which is composed of the character image 612c and the text image 613c, is displayed in a variable manner by vertical scrolling, it does not overlap with the left pattern 611a or the right pattern 611b (or the left variable display area 610A or the right variable display area 610B).

In addition, the small symbols, which are decorative special symbols that are displayed in a small variable display area 615 before and after a reach is reached, do not change in configuration and variable state, giving the player a sense of security. The left symbol 611a, right symbol 611b, and middle symbol 611c are large symbols, and the decorative special symbols that are displayed in a variable display area 615 that is smaller than the large symbol variable display area 610 and are smaller than the large symbol are small symbols. The small symbols may be the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) mentioned above.

[Variations of the configuration and variation of the decorative special pattern]
Fig. 101 is a diagram showing modified examples of the configuration and variation of the decorative special symbols displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. Configurations other than those described below are common to both Fig. 101 and Fig. 100.

In (I1) of Figure 101, the configuration and change patterns of the decorative special symbols before the reach is achieved have been changed from (A1) of Figure 100.

As shown in (i1), in the variable display before the reach is established, the left pattern 611a is composed only of a letter image 613a showing a number. Also, the right pattern 611b is composed only of a letter image 613b showing a number. The left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b are displayed with a rotational variation that is visually recognized by the player as rotating around an axis. Instead of a rotational variation, the aforementioned forward/backward variation or switching variation may also be used.

In (a1), the left variable display area 610A and the right variable display area 610B become smaller (narrower) than the central variable display area 610C due to the rotational fluctuation of the left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b. This makes it possible to effectively secure a performance area for performances other than the variable display, and makes it easier to see the variable displays of the left pattern 611a, the right pattern 611b, and the center pattern 611c, increasing the interest in the game.

On the other hand, in (i1), in the variable display before the reach is achieved, the middle pattern 611c is composed of a character image 612c showing a character and a letter image 613c showing a number. The middle pattern 611c is displayed variable by vertical scrolling.

In FIG. 101 (a2), when a reach is reached (when a reach is reached), the left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b temporarily stop and sway, so that the fluctuation mode is changed and changed from the rotational fluctuation before the reach is reached. Also, the configuration mode of the left pattern 611a is changed and changed, and changes from the configuration mode before the reach is reached, which was only the character image 613a, to a configuration mode composed of a character image 612a showing a character and a character image 613a showing a number. Also, the configuration mode of the right pattern 611b is changed and changed, and changes from the configuration mode before the reach is reached, which was only the character image 613b, to a configuration mode composed of a character image 612b showing a character and a character image 613b showing a number. The change in the configuration modes of the left pattern 611a, the right pattern 611b, and the center pattern 611c can surprise the player and increase the interest of the game.

In (i2), when a reach is reached, the middle pattern 611c is displayed in a rotating manner, and the manner of change is changed from the manner of change displayed by vertical scrolling before the reach is reached. Instead of a rotating manner, the aforementioned forward and backward change or switching change may be used. The direction of the display of the middle pattern 611c corresponds to the direction of the display of the left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b before they temporarily stopped (i.e., the circumferential direction around the axis). The change in the manner of change of the left pattern 611a, right pattern 611b, and middle pattern 611c can surprise the player and increase the interest of the game.

Similarly, in (i2), the rotational change of the middle pattern 611c makes the central variable display area 610C smaller (narrower) than the left variable display area 610A and the right variable display area 610B. This effectively ensures an area for effects other than the variable display, and makes it easier to see the variable displays of the left pattern 611a, right pattern 611b, and middle pattern 611c, increasing the interest of the game.

[Reference Table]
The table in Fig. 102A is a reference table referenced by the performance control device 300, for example, in steps B2010 and B2013 of the variable performance setting process. Such a reference table is stored in the storage unit (memory such as RAM 322 and FeRAM 323) of the performance control device 300. The performance control device 300 sets the configuration and variable aspects of the decorative special pattern as part of the variable performance by referring to the table in Fig. 102A. The table in Fig. 102A corresponds to the configuration and variable aspects of the decorative special pattern in Fig. 100.

The performance control device 300 can determine whether or not there is a reach in the decorative special symbol change display game to be executed from the change pattern type (B1904, B2001). If there is a reach, i.e., if a reach occurs, the configuration mode and change mode of the decorative special symbol before and after the reach is established are set as in the table of FIG. 102A. As a result, as shown in FIG. 100, the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b change from the vertical scrolling before the reach is established to a temporary stop state when the reach is established, but the configuration mode including numbers and characters does not change. The middle symbol 611c changes from the rotational change before the reach is established to vertical scrolling when the reach is established, and the configuration mode changes from one including only numbers to one including numbers and characters.

In this embodiment, the configuration and change modes of the decorative special symbols do not change from the start of the decorative special symbol change display game until the reaching is established, but a configuration in which they change is also possible. In other words, it is sufficient that the configuration and change modes before the reaching are as shown in the table in FIG. 102A just before the reaching is established.

When there is no reach, i.e. when no reach occurs, the configuration and variation of the decorative special symbols are set not to change from the start to the end of the decorative special symbol variation display game, as in the table in Figure 102A. From the start to the end of the decorative special symbol variation display game, the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b are displayed in a vertical scroll, and the center symbol 611c is displayed in a rotational variation.

It is also possible for the performance control device 300 to be configured to determine the variation mode of the decorative identification pattern by lottery. For example, if there is no reach, the middle pattern 611c may be scrolled vertically with a high probability of winning and rotated with a low probability of winning (unlike FIG. 102A, the middle pattern 611c may also be scrolled vertically). Conversely, if there is a reach, before the reach is established, the middle pattern 611c may be scrolled vertically with a low probability of winning and rotated with a high probability of winning (unlike FIG. 102A, the middle pattern 611c may also be scrolled vertically). In this way, at the start of the decorative special pattern variation display game, the rotational variation (variation mode) of the middle pattern 611c can notify the expectation of the reach and the expectation of the jackpot. In other words, if there is a rotational variation of the middle pattern 611c, the player can expect the occurrence of the reach and the occurrence of the jackpot, which increases the interest in the game.

It is also possible to configure the configuration and change of the decorative special symbol according to the game state, such as the normal game state or the time-saving/probability-changing state (specific game state). For example, in the time-saving/probability-changing state where the change time is short, it is difficult to tell if the configuration and change of the decorative special symbol changes, so the configuration and change of the decorative special symbol may be set not to change from the start to the end of the decorative special symbol change display game. Also, since the decorative special symbol 2 change display game often occurs in the time-saving/probability-changing state and the change time is short, in the decorative special symbol 2 change display game, the configuration and change of the decorative special symbol may be set not to change from the start to the end of the decorative special symbol change display game, regardless of whether or not a reach is reached. In other words, the configuration and change of the decorative special symbol may be set to change only in the decorative special symbol 1 change display game before and after the reach is reached.

Furthermore, the configuration and variation of the special decorative symbols after a reach is achieved may be set according to the type of reach (N reach, SP reach, etc.) that can be determined from the variation pattern type (B1904, B2001). In this way, the configuration and variation of the special decorative symbols can notify the expectation of a jackpot.

Figure 102B is a modified example of the reference table corresponding to Figure 101. With this reference table, as shown in Figure 101, when a reach is reached, the left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b change from the rotational fluctuation before the reach is reached to a temporary stop state, and the configuration mode changes from one including only numbers to one including numbers and characters. When a reach is reached, the middle pattern 611c changes from the vertical scrolling before the reach is reached to a rotational fluctuation, and the configuration mode changes from one including numbers and characters to one including only numbers. When there is no reach (when a reach does not occur), the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special pattern are set not to change from the start to the end of the decorative special pattern variation display game, as in the table of Figure 102B.

In addition, in Figures 102A and 102B, the configuration and change mode of one of the left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b before the reach is established may be the same as that of the center pattern 611c. In this case, the area other than the change display area 610 will be further expanded on the display screen before the reach is established.

[Screen transition]
103A and 103B are screen transition diagrams showing display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order in the eleventh embodiment.

(U1) in FIG. 103A is a display screen when starting the decorative special chart change display game. As a result of stopping the previous decorative special chart change display game, the left pattern 611a, the right pattern 611b, and the middle pattern 611c are displayed in the change display area 610 as missing stop patterns. Also, the three small patterns are displayed in the small change display area 615 as missing stop patterns. Then, the reserved display 633 displayed corresponding to the reserved (here, the first start memory) moves to the right (reservation shift), and the reserved display 633 at the right end of the reserved display section 630 moves to the reserved consumption area 640 in a rectangular frame (reservation shift). Furthermore, in the special chart 1 reserved number display 650, the number of special chart 1 reserved (first start memory) changes from "3" to "2", and the special chart 2 reserved number display 660 displays the current number of special chart 2 reserved (second start memory) "0".

(U2) in Fig. 103A is the same as (A1) in Fig. 100, but the left pattern 611a, right pattern 611b, and middle pattern 611c as decorative special patterns (large patterns) are changing in the changing display area 610, and the small pattern as a decorative reduced pattern is changing in the changing display area 615. The left pattern 611a and right pattern 611b are enlarged in size and change vertically by scrolling compared to the stopped pattern that is the stopping result of the decorative special pattern changing display game in which a reach has occurred in (U1) (the configuration form does not change). In addition, the middle pattern 611c changes from the configuration form (consisting of a character image 612c and a text image 613c) of the stopped pattern that is the stopping result of the decorative special pattern changing display game in which a reach has occurred in (U1), and rotates and changes to a configuration form consisting of only the text image 613c showing numbers.

After the fluctuating display continues as in (U3) and (U4), a reach occurs as in (U5) of Figure 103A, the left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b temporarily stop (shaking and fluctuating), and the configuration and fluctuation of the center pattern 611c changes. Note that (U5) of Figure 103A is the same as (A2) of Figure 100, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, as shown in (U6), the reach fluctuation continues, and then, as shown in (U7), in addition to the left pattern 611a and right pattern 611b, the center pattern 611c also temporarily stops (fluctuations), resulting in a total of three patterns temporarily stopping (fluctuations). After that, as shown in (U8), the three patterns stop completely and a stop pattern is displayed.

In the losing stop pattern of (U8), the left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b are enlarged in size from the decorative pattern during the temporary stop (swinging change) of (U7). Also, the center pattern 611c changes from the configuration (consisting of character image 612c and letter image 613c) during the temporary stop (swinging change) of (U7) to a configuration consisting of only letter image 613c showing a number.

After that, in (U9), the decorative special symbol variable display game is executed again. Then, as in (U10), after the decorative special symbol variable display game continues, no reach occurs, so in (U11), the configuration and variable modes of the left symbol 611a, right symbol 611b, and center symbol 611c do not change, and a missing stop symbol is displayed.

As described above, the configuration and change modes of the decorative special symbols have been explained, but when a pseudo-sequential performance is executed, the configuration and change modes of the middle symbol 611c may be changed each time the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b are temporarily stopped, even before a reach is achieved. Note that a pseudo-sequential performance is a performance in which a pseudo-change (secondary change) that temporarily stops the decorative special symbol that is being changed is performed a predetermined number of times in succession between the start and end of a single special symbol change display game. Note that, at the time of the temporary stop, a pseudo-sequential pattern that suggests a pseudo-sequential performance may be displayed as a stopped middle symbol 611c.

The configuration of the decorative special design may include not only a configuration consisting of only a text image, or a configuration consisting of a character image and a text image, but also a configuration consisting of a text image and a frame image surrounding the text image, or a configuration consisting of a character image, a text image, and a frame image (one that surrounds the character image and the text image). Also, a configuration in which other images such as a frame image are used instead of a character image is possible.

[Actions and Effects of Eleventh Embodiment]
According to the eleventh embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a performance control means (performance control device 300) capable of displaying a variable display game in which the first identification information (e.g., left pattern 611a), the second identification information (e.g., right pattern 611b), and the third identification information (e.g., middle pattern 611c) are variably displayed on the display device 41. The performance control means is capable of displaying the first identification information or the second identification information in a configuration form including a component (character image) indicating a character and a component (character image) indicating a number on the display device 41. The performance control means is capable of displaying the third identification information in a configuration form including a component (character image) indicating a number and not including a component (character image) indicating a character on the display device 41 together with the first identification information and the second identification information.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the third identification information (e.g., the middle pattern 611c) has a configuration that includes a component (character image) indicating a number and does not include a component (character image) indicating a character, so that the area other than the variable display area 610 that displays each identification information is expanded on the display screen of the display device 41. Therefore, in this expanded area, a performance area for performing performances other than the variable display can be effectively secured, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, since the third identification information (e.g., the middle pattern 611c) is small and consists only of a character image indicating a number, the first identification information (e.g., the left pattern 611a), the second identification information (e.g., the right pattern 611b), and the third identification information (e.g., the middle pattern 611c) can be displayed without overlapping each other, and the player can easily visually recognize the variable display of each identification information, and the interest of the game is improved. Therefore, in order to allow the player to recognize characters such as the characters that are the motif of the performance of the gaming machine 10, even if a character image is included in the configuration of the first identification information (e.g., left pattern 611a) or the second identification information (e.g., right pattern 611b), the variable display game can be reliably executed on the display device 41.

In addition, according to the eleventh embodiment, the presentation control means (presentation control device 300) can change the configuration of the third identification information (e.g., the middle symbol 611c) and display it on the display device 41 when a reach is achieved in relation to a variable display game. This can therefore surprise the player and increase his or her interest in the game. In addition, because the player focuses on the third identification information that has been changed to a new configuration, it becomes easier for the player to understand the progress of the game, such as the achievement of a reach.

Also, according to the eleventh embodiment, the performance control means (performance control device 300) makes the change mode of the third identification information (e.g., middle pattern 611c) different from the change mode of the first identification information (e.g., left pattern 611a) and the second identification information (e.g., right pattern 611b) as the change mode before a reach is established for the variable display game. Also, the performance control means (performance control device 300) temporarily stops the first identification information and the second identification information when a reach is established for the variable display game, and makes the change mode of the third identification information correspond to the change mode of the first identification information and the second identification information before the temporary stop.

Therefore, when a reach is achieved, the player's sense of discomfort caused by the direction of the variable display of the third identification information (e.g., middle pattern 611c) being different from the direction of the variable display of the first identification information (e.g., left pattern 611a) and the second identification information (e.g., right pattern 611b) before the reach is achieved is reduced when the reach is achieved. Also, the change in the direction of the variable display of the third identification information (e.g., middle pattern 611c) can surprise the player and increase his or her interest in the game.

[Twelfth embodiment]
The twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 104 to 108. Note that configurations other than those described below may be similar to those of the first to eleventh embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to eleventh embodiments, and duplicate descriptions are omitted as appropriate.

The twelfth embodiment relates to a hitting style notification that recommends (or instructs, guides, or notifies) a specific hitting style, such as hitting left or hitting right, to a player. As described above, a hitting style is the launch mode of the ball launching device, and corresponds to an area in the game area 32 where it is recommended to launch the game ball and let it flow down. Hitting style notifications that notify information on hitting styles include, in particular, hitting style instruction displays such as right-hit instruction displays 657, 658 and left-hit instruction display 659 that are displayed on the display screen of the display device 41, and mode display 645 that indirectly recommends a specific hitting style to a player.

The right hit notification among the hitting method notifications recommends the player to shoot the game ball in the right area (first game area) that is the area to the right of the center case 40 in the game area 32. The left hit notification (normal hit notification) among the hitting method notifications recommends the player to shoot the game ball in the left area (second game area) that is the area to the left of the center case 40 in the game area 32.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, it is recommended that the game ball be shot into the left area of the game area 32, and left-hit information to recommend left-hitting is notified to the player. Also, in the special game state (big win state, small win state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and in the specific game state (time-saving state or probability change state), it is recommended that the game ball be shot into the right area of the game area 32, and right-hit information to recommend right-hitting is notified to the player.

[Main processing (performance control device)]
The main processing according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 104. Fig. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main processing executed by the performance control device 300. The main processing in Fig. 104 is obtained by adding step B0014a to the main processing in Fig. 36. Note that the same processes as those in Fig. 36 are given the same step numbers and will not be described.

In step B0014a, a hitting style notification process is executed to notify the player of the hitting style, such as left hitting or right hitting, based on the game status determined from the command received in the received command check process in step B0014.

[How to hit]
Fig. 105 explains the details of the hitting method notification process (B0014a) in the above-mentioned main process (Fig. 104). Fig. 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hitting method notification process executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first determines whether the current game state is a special game state (such as a jackpot state) or a time-saving/probability-change state (specific game state) (B3501). If the current game state is a normal game state (the result of B3501 is "N"), the play method notification process ends.

The performance control device 300 can determine whether the current game state is a normal game state, a special game state (a jackpot state, etc.), a high probability state, or a time-saving state from the most recently received winning command information, the most recently received symbol command information (special symbol type in B1801, symbol type in B1802), the number of times the high probability state continues (for example, 50 times or until the next time), the number of times the time-saving state continues (for example, 70 times), the number of times the special symbol change display game is executed after the jackpot ends, the probability information (B1313), etc. The symbol type in B1802 indicates whether it is a high probability jackpot that will enter a high probability state after the jackpot ends, or a normal jackpot that will enter a time-saving state after the jackpot ends. The current game state can also be determined from the performance mode (B1318) corresponding to the stopping symbol pattern and the probability state.

When the current game state is a special game state (jackpot state, etc.) or a time-saving/probability-change state (specific game state) (the result of B3501 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 sets the display device 41 to display the right-hit instruction display 657 (first display) in the normal mode of the playing instruction display as a playing method notification (B3502). Next, it is determined whether or not the current time is after the specified timing (B3503). If the current time is not after the specified timing (the result of B3503 is "N"), the playing method notification process is terminated.

Here, the predetermined timing is the start of the big win ending, the start of the time-saving/probability change state, or a timing during the time-saving/probability change state. The start of the big win ending is when the ending command is received (B2111). The start of the time-saving/probability change state is when the first variable command (variation command) is received after the ending command is received (B1206). In this embodiment, either the time-saving state or the probability change state always occurs after the end of the big win state. The timing during the time-saving/probability change state is, for example, when the variable command (variation command) is received a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 times) after the start of the time-saving/probability change state.

On the other hand, if the current time is after the specified timing (the result of B3503 is "Y"), the presentation control device 300 sets the display device 41 to display a mode display (second display) corresponding to the current game state as a play method notification (B3504), and ends the play method notification process. The mode of the mode display may correspond to a presentation mode that reflects the probability bonus state.

By this type of hit notification process, the right hit instruction display 657 (first display) and the mode display (second display) can be displayed on the display device 41 as a right hit notification that recommends the player to shoot the game ball into the right area (first game area) of the game area 32. Note that if the current game state that can be seen from the mode display is a time-saving/probability change state (specific game state), the player can recognize that he or she should hit to the right, so the mode display also becomes a right hit notification. Therefore, the right hit notification can be reliably executed by both the right hit instruction display 657 (first display) and the mode display (second display).

By the processing of steps B3501 and B3502, the right-hit instruction display 657 will continue to be displayed during the special game state and the time-saving/high probability state (specific game state) to which the player transitions after the special game state. Therefore, the right-hit instruction display 657 can continuously notify the player to hit right for the required period (the period of the special game state and the time-saving/high probability state), so that the player will not miss the right-hit notification.

Furthermore, by the processing of steps B3503 and B3504, the mode display (second display) is displayed after a predetermined timing (the end of a special game state, or the start of a specific game state, or during a specific game state). By displaying the mode display, the player can understand the probability variable state or the normal power support state, and can also recognize that a game ball can be launched into the right area, which increases the interest of the game. Furthermore, if the predetermined timing is the end of a special game state or the start of a time-saving/probability variable state, the mode display can be displayed for an appropriate period of time. Furthermore, if the predetermined timing is during a time-saving/probability variable state, the mode display can be displayed without being disturbed by other effects, avoiding the ending effects at the end of a special game state or the effects at the start of a specific game state.

[Single command processing]
The one-shot command processing (B1212) according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 106. Fig. 106 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the one-shot command processing executed by the performance control device 300 in the received command analysis processing (Fig. 38). The one-shot command processing in Fig. 106 is obtained by adding steps B1333 and B1334 to the one-shot command processing in Fig. 39. Note that the same processing as in Fig. 39 is given the same step number and the description is omitted.

If the MODE section does not represent a command to stop the pattern (the result of B1329 is "N"), the performance control device 300 judges whether the MODE section represents a play instruction command (B1333). The play instruction command is a right-hand play instruction notification command (A2705) or a left-hand play instruction notification command (A7703). If the MODE section does not represent a play instruction command (the result of B1333 is "N"), the single-shot command processing ends.

When the MODE section indicates a play instruction command (the result of B1333 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes a play instruction reception process, which is the process performed when a play instruction command is received (B1334), and ends the single-shot command processing.

[Processing when receiving hitting instructions]
Fig. 107 explains the details of the hitting instruction reception process (B1334) in the single-shot command process (Fig. 106) described above. Fig. 107 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hitting notification process executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first determines whether the command in the MODE section is a normal command (B3701). If the command in the MODE section is not a normal command (the result of B3701 is "N"), the process when the playing instructions are received ends.

If the command from the MODE section is a normal command (result of B3701 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 judges whether or not a right-hit instruction notification command has been received from among the hitting instruction commands, i.e., whether or not the received hitting instruction command is a right-hit instruction notification command (B3702). If a right-hit instruction notification command has been received (result of B3702 is "Y"), the special mode right-hit instruction display 658 (first display) is displayed and set (B3703), and the processing upon receiving the hitting instruction is terminated.

When a left-handed hitting instruction notification command is received from among the hitting instruction commands (the result of B3702 is "N"), the left-handed hitting instruction display 659 (third display) from among the hitting instruction displays is set to be displayed as the hitting instruction notification (B3704), and the processing upon receiving hitting instructions is terminated.

[Screen transition]
108A to 108C are screen transition diagrams illustrating display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order in relation to the twelfth embodiment.

(E1) in FIG. 108A is a display screen in the change display area 610 during the execution of the decorative special chart change display game. Here, the special chart change display game is the special chart 1 change display game. A change pending display 633a indicating the pending related to the running special chart change display game is displayed in the pending consumption area 640. In addition, one pending display 633 is displayed in the pending display section 630a corresponding to the pending related to the special chart change display game before execution (here, the first start memory). The pending display section 630a displays a pending display 633 (start memory display) corresponding to the first start memory. Furthermore, the special chart 1 pending number display 650 displays the number of current special chart 1 pending (first start memory) "1", and the special chart 2 pending number display 660 displays the number of current special chart 2 pending (second start memory) "0".

After that, in (E2), the decorative special symbol change display game ends, and the jackpot stop symbol "3, 3, 3" corresponding to the jackpot result is derived. Here, the change pending display 633a is erased.

Next, in (E3), a jackpot fanfare effect is executed, and "Congratulations on the jackpot!!" is displayed in the center of the display screen, while the jackpot stopping pattern "3, 3, 3" moves to the upper left corner and is displayed in small size. Note that the jackpot stopping pattern here is assumed to be a 6R special jackpot pattern in the following explanation. Note that in this embodiment, the jackpot state (special game state) begins from the point when the effect control device 300 receives the jackpot fanfare command and starts the jackpot fanfare effect.

Furthermore, in (E3), the right-hit instruction display 657 (first display) in the normal mode is displayed in the upper right corner of the display device 41 by the processing of step B3502 of the hitting method notification process (Fig. 105). The right-hit instruction display 657 in the normal mode is a display in which a character image 657a "Right hit" (character display) showing a character and a graphic image 657b "⇒" (graphic display) showing an arrow figure (or symbol) are displayed together. In the jackpot state (special game state), it is advantageous to launch the game ball into the right area of the game area 32 where the special variable winning device 39 is located. For this reason, the player is encouraged (instructed, guided) to launch the game ball into the right area (first game area) by the right-hit instruction display 657 in the hitting method notification.

The entire image of the right hit instruction display 657 is a combination of a text image 657a and a graphic image 657b, and is stored in the image ROM 325 of the performance control device 300. Alternatively, when the right hit instruction display 657 is displayed, the text image 657a and the graphic image 657b stored in the image ROM 325 may be combined and displayed as the right hit instruction display 657.

Next, in (E4) and (E5), the jackpot round starts, and the jackpot round presentation is executed from round 1 to round 6. The jackpot here is a 6R variable jackpot, and the jackpot round lasts up to round 6, but the right-hit instruction display 657 is continuously displayed from round 1 to round 6.

After that, in (D6), the big win ending performance is executed. Here too, the normal right-hit instruction display 657, consisting of a character image 657a showing the character "Right Hit" and a graphic image 657b showing an arrow shape "⇒", continues to be displayed.

Next, in (E7) of FIG. 108B, the special probability state of the time-saving/special probability state begins. Here too, the right-hit instruction display 657 in the normal mode continues to be displayed (B3502). In the special probability state (high probability state), normal power support is executed, so it is advantageous to pass the game ball through the normal map start gate 34 and execute the normal map change display game. For this reason, it is advantageous to launch the game ball into the right region of the game area 32 where the normal map start gate 34 is located. Therefore, the player is recommended (instructed, guided) to hit with the right to launch the game ball into the right region (first game area) by the right-hit instruction display 657 of the hitting method instruction displays.

In addition, in (E7), since this is a predetermined timing (here, the start of a specific game state), the mode display 645 "Entering probability fluctuation mode!!" (second display, text image), which indicates the current game state, which is a probability fluctuation state (probability fluctuation state), is displayed large in the center of the display screen together with the right-hit instruction display 657, by the processing of step B3504 of the play method notification process (Fig. 105). Note that this mode display 645 may simply be the text image "Probability fluctuation mode".

In addition, in (E7), one hold display 633 is displayed in the hold display section 630b corresponding to the hold (here, the second start memory) related to the special chart change display game before execution. The hold display section 630b displays the hold display 633 (start memory display) corresponding to the second start memory. Furthermore, the special chart 1 hold number display 650 displays the number of current special chart 1 holds (first start memory) "0", and the special chart 2 hold number display 660 displays the number of current special chart 2 holds (second start memory) "1".

After that, in (E8), a hold shift is executed, the decorative special symbol variation display game starts, and a variable hold display 633a indicating the hold related to the running special symbol variation display game is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. Here, the special symbol variation display game is the special symbol 2 variation display game. In addition, a mode display 645 "probability variation mode" (second display) indicating a probability variation state is displayed small in the upper left corner of the display screen together with a right hit instruction display 657, and its form changes from the start of the probability variation state (specific game state). The mode display 645 recommends (instructs) the player to hit right by indicating that it is a probability variation state. The right hit instruction display 657 in the normal mode is displayed on the front side (upper layer) in priority to the decorative special symbol of the decorative special symbol variation display game.

Next, in (E9), the player hits with his left hand even though the right-hit instruction display 657 recommends hitting with the right. As a result, the game ball flows down the left area and enters the starting winning hole 36 (second predetermined area), and the right-hit instruction notification command (A2705) from the game control device 100 is received by the performance control device 300 (B1334 in FIG. 106). Then, by processing step B3703 of the hitting instruction reception processing (FIG. 107), a special right-hit instruction display 658 (first display) is displayed in the center of the display screen for a predetermined period of time. The special right-hit instruction display 658 is displayed on the front side (upper layer) in priority to the decorative special pattern of the decorative special pattern variable display game.

The entire image of the right-hit instruction display 658 is a combination of a character image 658a "Right hit" showing the character and a graphic image 658b "⇒" showing an arrow graphic (or symbol), and is stored in the image ROM 325 of the performance control device 300. Alternatively, when the right-hit instruction display 658 is displayed, the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b stored in the image ROM 325 may be combined and displayed as the right-hit instruction display 658.

In this embodiment, the right hit instruction display 658 in the special mode has a similar shape to the right hit instruction display 657 in the normal mode, but differs only in size, but is not limited to this, and may have a different shape that is not similar to the right hit instruction display 657. In addition, the right hit instruction display 658 in the special mode may have the same shape as the right hit instruction display 657 in the normal mode, but differs only in color.

When a player hits left despite being recommended (instructed) to hit right, the special mode right hit instruction display 658 strongly recommends (instructs) the player to hit right. Therefore, the special mode right hit instruction display 658 is displayed larger and more noticeable than the normal mode right hit instruction display 657. Also, the player can be strongly recommended (instructed) to hit right by both the normal mode right hit instruction display 657 (first image) and the special mode right hit instruction display 658 (second image), which is larger than the normal mode right hit instruction display 657.

In addition, in (E9), there is no change in the mode display 645 "Probability fluctuation mode" indicating the probability of a special state. There is also no change in the display mode (display position and form) of the right-hit instruction display 657, and both the character image 657a "Right hit" indicating the character and the graphic image 657b "⇒" indicating the arrow shape continue to be displayed in the same position in the upper right corner. However, under a specified condition (specified case) in which the special mode right-hit instruction display 658 is displayed, only the graphic image 657b "⇒" indicating the arrow shape may be displayed on the display screen for the normal mode right-hit instruction display 657 so as not to get in the way or to secure the area for the display screen effects.

Next, in (E10), the special mode right-hit instruction display 658 is displayed in the center of the display screen for a specified period of time and then erased. Also, here, a hold (second start memory) occurs due to a win in the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning port), and the hold display 633 corresponding to this hold is generated, but a hold change notice (pre-reading effect) is executed for the hold display 633, and the hold display 633b is displayed, which has changed from the normal mode (e.g. white) to a suggestive mode (e.g. green) suggesting a high expectation of a jackpot. Note that the hold change notice is executed by the processing of step B1716 of the pre-reading variable command processing (Fig. 41) when the expectation of a jackpot in the special chart variable display game related to the hold is high.

In addition, in (E10), in response to the change to a suggested mode and the high expectation (reliability) of the hold, the presentation control device 300 changes the display mode (shape, size, color) of the mode indicator 645 "probability fluctuation mode" from the normal mode to a special mode, but the display mode (display position and form) of the right-hit instruction indicator 657 is maintained. In this way, the mode indicator 645 changes according to the expectation of a jackpot, increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of the expected degree of reservation, the display manner of the mode display 645 "Probability fluctuation mode" may be changed in response to the high expectation of a jackpot in the currently executed special chart fluctuation display game.

Next, in (E11), an SP reach occurs and the SP reach effect (a specified effect) is executed in the center of the screen. In order to secure the effect display area for the SP reach effect, the mode display 645 "Probability fluctuation mode" is hidden. This allows the SP reach effect to be executed in a wide area of the display screen, increasing the excitement of the game.

After that, by executing the special chart variation display game several times, in (E12), the special chart variation display game has been executed the number of times the special chart variation state continues (for example, 50 times) since the start of the special chart variation state, so the special chart variation state ends and "probability variation mode ended" is displayed. Note that in this example, the gaming machine 10 is an ST machine.

As described above, throughout the special game state and the subsequent time-saving/high probability state (specific game state), the display mode (display position and shape) of the right-hit instruction display 657 (first display) does not change, and is always displayed continuously in a constant display mode. On the other hand, the mode display 645 (second display), which indicates that the game is in a high probability state and recommends that the player hit to the right, may change its display mode depending on the situation, as in (E7) and (E10), or may be switched to a non-display state and displayed intermittently, as in (E11).

In addition, throughout the special game state and the subsequent time-saving/probability-changing state, the right-hit instruction display 657 does not have to be displayed in a constant manner, and may be displayed gradually fainter or in a different position over time. Also, to prevent a situation in which the player stops playing and takes a break during the time-saving/probability-changing state, when both the hold display 633 and the variable hold display 633a disappear, the mode display 645 (second display) may be made to flash, for example, to urge the player to continue playing.

After that, in (D13) of FIG. 108C, the normal game state starts instead of the probability change state, and the recommended hitting method changes from right hitting to left hitting. At the start of the normal game state, the game control device 100 may transmit a left hitting instruction notification command. When the performance control device 300 receives the left hitting instruction notification command (B1334 of FIG. 106), the performance control device 300 displays the left hitting instruction display 659 as a hitting instruction display in the center position of the display screen for a predetermined period of time by processing in step B3704 of the hitting instruction reception processing (FIG. 107). The left hitting instruction display 659 (third display, third image) is larger than the right hitting instruction display 657 (first image) of the normal mode, but is approximately the same size as the right hitting instruction display 658 (second image) of the special mode. Therefore, the left hitting instruction display 659 is displayed large and conspicuous. The left hitting instruction display 659 is displayed on the front side in priority to the decorative special pattern of the decorative special pattern variable display game.

The entire image of the left hit instruction display 659 is a combination of a character image 659a showing the characters "LEFT HITTING" and a graphic image 659b showing an arrow shape (or symbol), and is stored in the image ROM 325 of the performance control device 300. Alternatively, when the left hit instruction display 659 is displayed, the character image 659a and the graphic image 659b stored in the image ROM 325 may be combined and displayed as the left hit instruction display 659.

In addition, in (E13), one pending display 633 is displayed in the pending display section 630a corresponding to the pending related to the special chart change display game before execution. The pending display section 630a displays a pending display 633 (start memory display) corresponding to the first start memory. A changing pending display 633a indicating a pending related to the currently executed special chart change display game is displayed in the pending consumption area 640. Furthermore, the special chart 1 pending number display 650 displays the number of current special chart 1 pending (first start memory) "1", and the special chart 2 pending number display 660 displays the number of current special chart 2 pending (second start memory) "0".

After that, in (E14), a special decoration chart change display game is being played.

And in (E15), the player hits with his right hand even though the normal game state recommends hitting with his left hand. Then, as the game ball flows down the right area and passes through the normal start gate 34 (first predetermined area), the left hit instruction notification command (A7703) from the game control device 100 is received by the performance control device 300 (B1334 in FIG. 106). Then, by the processing of step B3704 of the hitting instruction reception processing (FIG. 107), the left hit instruction display 659 is displayed in the center of the display screen for a predetermined period of time. Here again, the left hit instruction display 659 (third display, third image) is larger than the right hit instruction display 657 (first image) of the normal mode, but is approximately the same size as the right hit instruction display 658 (second image) of the special mode. Therefore, the right hit instruction display 658 of the special mode is displayed large and conspicuous.

Next, in (E16), the left-handed hit instruction display 659 (third display), which was displayed for a specified period of time, is erased.

In the screen transition described above, at the start of the jackpot state (E3), the game control device 100 may send a right-hit instruction notification command to the presentation control device 300, and the presentation control device 300 may display a special right-hit instruction display 658, as in (E9).

[Actions and Effects of the Twelfth Embodiment]
According to the twelfth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a presentation control means (presentation control device 300) capable of displaying a variable display game (decorative special chart variable display game) that variably displays identification information on the display device 41. The gaming machine 10 can generate a normal gaming state, a special gaming state (e.g., a jackpot state) and a specific gaming state (time-saving/probability-changing state) that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. The gaming machine 10 also includes a first gaming area (the right area of the gaming area 32) in which it is recommended to launch a gaming ball in the special gaming state and the specific gaming state, and a second gaming area (the left area of the gaming area 32) in which it is recommended to launch a gaming ball in the normal gaming state. The presentation control means can display a first display (right-hit instruction display) and a second display (mode display) on the display device 41 as displays that recommend the player to launch a gaming ball into the first gaming area. The effect control means continuously displays the first display (right hit instruction display) in the special game state and in the specific game state to which the special game state is entered after the special game state. The effect control means displays the second display (mode display) from the end of the special game state, or from the start of the specific game state, or from the middle of the specific game state.

With this type of gaming machine 10, the first display (right-hit instruction display) and the second display (mode display) can reliably notify the player of a right hit, and the second display (mode display) can be displayed at the end of a special gaming state, or at the start of a specific gaming state, or at an appropriate time after the middle of a specific gaming state. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Also, according to the twelfth embodiment, the performance control means (performance control device 300) can display a first display (right hit instruction display) on the display device 41 using a first image (normal mode right hit instruction display 657) and a second image (special mode right hit instruction display 658) that is larger than the first image. Furthermore, the performance control means can display a third display (left hit instruction display) on the display device 41 using a third image that is larger than the first image, which recommends the player to launch the game ball into the second game area.

Therefore, both the first image (normal right-hit instruction display 657) and the second image (special right-hit instruction display 658) that is larger than the first image can strongly recommend (instruct) the player to shoot the game ball into the first game area (right area). In addition, the third display (left-hit instruction display) can be displayed large and conspicuously on the display device 41.

In addition, according to the twelfth embodiment, the presentation control means (presentation control device 300) can display the third display (left hit instruction display) on the display device 41 when the game ball flows down the first game area (right area) and passes through the first predetermined area (normal start gate 34) in the normal game state. The presentation control means (presentation control device 300) can display the first display (right hit instruction display) on the display device 41 when the game ball flows down the second game area (left area) and passes through the second predetermined area (start winning hole 36) in the special game state or the specific game state. Therefore, when the game ball is launched toward one of the first and second game areas that is not recommended in the current game state, the first display (right hit instruction display) or the third display (left hit instruction display) can be displayed as a warning.

[Thirteenth embodiment]
The thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 109 to Fig. 117. Note that configurations other than those described below may be similar to those of the first to twelfth embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to twelfth embodiments, and duplicate descriptions are appropriately omitted in the description.

The thirteenth embodiment relates to a persistent notification effect that persistently notifies one piece of information. The persistent notification effect is executed on a display device such as the display device 41 (or a sub-display other than the display device 41) under the control of the effect control device 300. In this embodiment, in particular, the hitting style information of the twelfth embodiment described above is taken as an example of one piece of information, and a hitting style notification effect that notifies information on a hitting style is described as an example of the persistent notification effect.

The example of the playing style notification in this embodiment is, in particular, a playing style instruction display that is displayed when the player executes a playing style that differs from the recommended playing style (see (D9) in FIG. 108B and (D15) in FIG. 108C), or a playing style instruction display that is displayed when the game state changes and the recommended playing style changes (see, for example, (D13) in FIG. 108B).

The following describes the persistent notification display, which notifies information about right-handed hitting to encourage right-handed hitting by using a special form of the right-handed hitting instruction display 658 among the hitting instruction displays. As described below, the form of the persistent notification display is characterized by multiple parameters.

[Image Form (First Parameter)]
109 is a diagram illustrating the form of the image of the right hit instruction display 658 itself as a first parameter (first factor) that defines and characterizes the presentation mode of the persistent notification presentation by the right hit instruction display 658. Here, the form includes shape, pattern, and color. The form of the image itself as the first parameter can make an impression on the player with the entire image of the right hit instruction display 658.

(A), (B), and (C) in FIG. 109 each show an example of the shape of an image of a right-hit instruction display 658. (A), (B), and (C) are particularly different in shape, but they may also be different in color or pattern. Note that the performance control device 300 may not only use an image of a right-hit instruction display 658 of a certain shape (one of (A), (B), and (C)) stored in the image ROM 325, but may also store multiple images of a right-hit instruction display 658 having different shapes such as (A), (B), and (C) in the image ROM 325 and select an appropriate one.

As shown in FIG. 109, the image of the right-hit instruction display 658 is composed of a character image 658a showing the characters "right hit" and a graphic image 658b showing an arrow, as well as a frame image 658c showing a frame graphic. The frame image 658c, which is shaped to match the graphic image 658b, is in contact with the outer periphery of the graphic image 658b and surrounds it. Therefore, the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c are displayed as one. Note that the frame image 658c is not limited to this, and may have other shapes that surround the character image 658a and/or the graphic image 658b (see FIG. 113 (B1)-(B3) described later). Note that the character image 658a, the graphic image 658b, and the frame image 658c may be called the first image, the second image, and the third image, respectively.

The color of the text image 658a, the graphic image 658b, and the frame image 658c may be multicolored (multiple colors) or single color, but in this embodiment, the multicolored image is shown. In the multicolored case, each image is painted with multiple colors that differ depending on the location. Furthermore, the text image 658a, the graphic image 658b, and the frame image 658c may have a predetermined pattern.

[Color change (second parameter)]
FIG. 110 is a diagram illustrating a color change inside the right hit instruction display 658 as a second parameter (second factor) that defines and characterizes the presentation mode of the persistent notification presentation by the right hit instruction display 658. Here, the color change is a change in color over time. The color change as the second parameter can make an impression on the player with the image of the entire right hit instruction display 658.

The performance control device 300 can change the color of the interior of the right hit instruction display 658 on the display screen of the display device 41 over time, but the color of the interior of the right hit instruction display 658 can also be changed over time as a video (movie, animation).

(A1) to (A3) in FIG. 110A show the change over time in color of the character image 658a in the image of the right-hit instruction display 658, with the color of each part of the character image 658a changing over time as (A1) → (A2) → (A3). The inside of the character image 658a is painted in multiple colors (multiple colors), and there are a blue area 661A shown with vertical stripes, a green area 661B shown with diagonal stripes, a yellow area 661C shown with a checkered pattern, and a red area 661D shown with a mesh-like stripe. The color areas are arranged horizontally (left-right) on the display screen, but may also be arranged vertically (up-down) or diagonally.

In (A1) of FIG. 110A, from the left, blue region 661A, green region 661B, yellow region 661C, and red region 661D are arranged; in (A2), blue region 661A spreads out in the center, and green region 661B, yellow region 661C, and red region 661D are arranged outward in the left-right direction; and in (A3), the opposite of (A1), red region 661D, yellow region 661C, green region 661B, and blue region 661A are arranged from the left.

(B1) to (B3) in FIG. 110A show the change over time in color of graphic image 658b in the image of right-hit instruction display 658, with the color of each part of graphic image 658b changing over time as (B1) → (B2) → (B3). The inside of graphic image 658b is painted in multiple colors (multiple colors), and there are blue area 661A shown with vertical stripes, green area 661B shown with diagonal stripes, yellow area 661C shown with checkered stripes, and red area 661D shown with mesh-like stripes.

In (B1) of FIG. 110A, red region 663D, yellow region 663C, green region 663B, and blue region 663A are arranged from the left, while in (B2), blue region 663A spreads out in the center, and green region 663B, yellow region 663C, and red region 663D are arranged outward in the left-right direction, and in (B3), the opposite of (B1), blue region 663A, green region 663B, yellow region 663C, and red region 663D are arranged from the left.

In FIG. 110A, the color of each part of the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b changes over time in various ways. For example, the color of the left part of the character "da" in the character image 658a (the hand radical part) changes over time from green to blue to yellow, and the color of the right part of the character "da" (the character "cho") changes over time from yellow to blue to green.

More simply, as shown in (A1) to (A3) of FIG. 110B, the blue area 661A, the green area 661B, the yellow area 661C, and the red area 661D may move in a flowing manner to the right, and the information about a right hit may be notified by the direction in which the colors of the text image 658a flow. Similarly, as shown in (B1) to (B3) of FIG. 110B, the red area 661D, the yellow area 661C, the green area 661B, and the blue area 661A may move in a flowing manner to the right, and the information about a right hit may be notified by the direction in which the colors of the graphic image 658b flow.

For convenience of illustration, in Fig. 110, blue region 663A, green region 663B, yellow region 663C, and red region 663D are arranged separated by clear boundaries, but as shown in Fig. 111, the colors may not have clear boundaries and may gradually change left and right (spatially) according to the color wheel. Note that (A1) to (A3) and (B1) to (B3) in Fig. 111 correspond to (A1) to (A3) and (B1) to (B3) in Fig. 110, respectively.

Figure 111 is an example in which the colors in the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b are arranged so that they gradually change left and right (spatially) according to a color wheel. In Figure 111, the darker parts are reddish colors, and the lighter parts are blueish colors. For example, in Figure 111, orange appears between yellow and red, and yellow-green appears between green and yellow. In Figure 111, the color inside the character image 658a changes over time, from (A1) → (A2) → (A3). Also, in Figure 111, the color inside the graphic image 658b changes over time, from (B1) → (B2) → (B3).

Furthermore, the color changes over time from (A1) to (A3) and (B1) to (B3) in Figures 110 and 111 are merely examples and are not limited to these. For example, if the text image 658a and the graphic image 658b are painted in a single color rather than multiple colors, the overall color (single color) of the text image 658a and the graphic image 658b may be gradually changed over time according to the color wheel.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the color of the frame image 658c does not change over time, but may change over time, similar to the text image 658a and the graphic image 658b. For example, a portion of the frame image 658c and a portion of the graphic image 658b that faces (contacts) it may change over time in different colors or the same color. Also, in this embodiment, the color of the frame image 658c is a single color (e.g., white), but it may be multiple colors.

[Display position change (third parameter, movement)]
112 is a diagram illustrating a change in the display position of the right hit instruction display 658 on the display screen of the display device 41, that is, a movement of the right hit instruction display 658, as a third parameter (third factor) that defines and characterizes the presentation mode of the persistent notification presentation by the right hit instruction display 658. The change (movement) in the display position as the third parameter can leave an impression on the player with the image of the whole right hit instruction display 658.

The performance control device 300 can change the display position of the right hit instruction display 658 on the display screen of the display device 41, and move the right hit instruction display 658. The performance control device 300 may also move the right hit instruction display 658 as a video (movie, animation).

In FIG. 112, the right-hit instruction display 658, which is made up of a character image 658a, a graphic image 658b, and a frame image 658c, moves across the display screen of the display device 41, and the display position of the right-hit instruction display 658 changes over time. The right-hit instruction display 658 moves in the rightward direction toward the right in order to notify (instruct, recommend, guide) a right hit.

The relative positions of the letter image 658a, graphic image 658b, and frame image 658c within the right hit instruction display 658 are fixed even if the right hit instruction display 658 moves. That is, the letter image 658a, graphic image 658b, and frame image 658c move as a unit. Within the right hit instruction display 658, the letter image 658a is positioned to the right of the integrated graphic image 658b and frame image 658c. To enhance the interest of the game, it is also possible to configure the positions of the letter image 658a, graphic image 658b, and frame image 658c within the right hit instruction display 658 (relative positions) to change over time as the right hit instruction display 658 moves.

First, in FIG. 112 (O1), the text image 658a "Hit Right" appears on the display screen from the left edge and moves to the right. The information about hitting right is impressed upon the player by the shape of the image itself (first parameter), the color change (second parameter), and the change in display position (third parameter) of the text image 658a (first image).

Next, in (O2), the integrally combined graphic image 658b (second image) and frame image 658c (third image) appear from the leftmost position and move to the right. The shape of the graphic image 658b itself, the color change, and the change in display position impress and notify the player of the information of a right hit. The shape of the frame image 658c itself, and the change in display position impress and notify the player of the information of a right hit. Note that the color change of the frame image 658c may also impress and notify the player of the information of a right hit.

If the information about hitting to the right is notified to the player by the shape, color change, and display position change of the graphic image 658b (second image) or frame image 658c (third image), the information about hitting to the right can be reliably notified by the single arrow of the integrally combined graphic image 658b and frame image 658c in addition to the text information of the text image 658a.

Next, in (E3), the character image 658a "Right hit" moves to the right, reaches the rightmost position on the display screen, and disappears from the screen. After that, the graphic image 658b and frame image 658c also move to the right, and reach the rightmost position and disappear from the display screen.

In addition, in (O1) to (O3), the presentation control device 300 displays the right hit instruction display 665, which notifies the player of right hit information, on the display device 41 at the same time as the persistent notification presentation, independently of the persistent notification presentation by the right hit instruction display 658. The right hit instruction display 665 (fourth image) notifies the player of right hit information as a single piece of information solely through the form of the image itself (first parameter). In FIG. 114, the right hit instruction display 665 is a graphic image (fourth image) showing an arrow, but it may also be a text image showing text (for example, "right hit").

Unlike the right hit instruction display 658 (first right hit instruction display), the right hit instruction display 665 (second right hit instruction display) does not move and is fixed in its displayed position, and does not change color, so that the right hit information is notified in an unobtrusive manner independent of the persistent notification performance based on the multiple parameters of the right hit instruction display 658. Also, the right hit instruction display 665 is smaller than the right hit instruction display 658 and is therefore less noticeable. The right hit instruction display 665 may be continuously displayed in the special game state and/or the time-saving/probability change state (specific game state) to which the special game state is transitioned, as with the right hit instruction display 657 of the normal mode in the 12th embodiment. In other words, the right hit instruction display 665 can not only be displayed simultaneously with the right hit instruction display 658, but can also be displayed in a situation different from the right hit instruction display 658, so that it can be displayed for a longer period of time than the right hit instruction display 658, and is accordingly smaller and less noticeable than the right hit instruction display 658. The right hit instruction display 665 may be made the same size as the right hit instruction display 658 and displayed in a faint light to make it less noticeable.

In addition, in (O1) to (O3), an effect image 658d that can be moved relative to the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c is added to the frame image 658c, but the effect image 658d will be described later.

[Add effect (4th parameter, emphasis)]
113 is a diagram illustrating the addition of an effect image 658d to the right hit instruction display 658 (here, a frame image 658c) as a fourth parameter (fourth factor) that defines and characterizes the presentation mode of the persistent notification presentation by the right hit instruction display 658. By adding an effect (adding the effect image 658d) as the fourth parameter, the right hit instruction display 658 can leave an impression on the player.

The performance control device 300 can change and move the display position of the effect image 658d. The performance control device 300 may also move the effect image 658d as a moving image (movie, animation).

As shown in FIG. 113 (A1) to (A3), the effect image 658d notifies the right-hand hit information by moving relative to the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c as time passes, from (A1) → (A2) → (A3). In addition, the movement of the effect image 658d can emphasize the integrated arrow of the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c, and the right-hand hit information by the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c can be emphasized. The effect image 658d moves on the frame image 658c, and after moving to the right end of the frame image 658c, may start moving again from the left end in the right direction.

As another example of the effect image 658d, the effect image 658d may move to the right on a frame image 658c that surrounds the character image 658a with a gap, as in (B1) to (B3) of FIG. 113. The shape of the effect image 658d may not be constant and may change over time. The effect image 658d notifies the right-hand hit information by moving to the right relative to the character image 658a and frame image 658c over time, as in (B1) → (B2) → (B3).

[Examples of whether each parameter is present or not]
114 is a diagram illustrating the presence or absence of each parameter (each factor) that defines and characterizes the presentation mode of the notification presentation by the right hit instruction display. Each parameter (each factor) can make an impression on the player with the notification presentation.

As described above, the first notification effect (i.e., persistent notification effect) by the right-hit instruction display 658 consisting of multiple images, the first image (text image 658a), the second image (graphic image 658b), and the third image (frame image 658c), can persistently notify the player of right-hit information to encourage right-hit by the first parameter (shape of the image itself), the second parameter (color change), the third parameter (display position change), and the fourth parameter (addition of effect) of each image. The first notification effect (i.e., persistent notification effect) is characterized by at least two or more multiple parameters. On the other hand, the second notification effect by the right-hit instruction display 665 consisting only of the fourth image (graphic image) notifies the player of right-hit information by only the first parameter (shape of the image itself).

In the example of FIG. 114, as described above, the presentation of the first image (text image 658a) and the second image (graphic image 658b) is characterized by the first parameter, the second parameter, and the third parameter. The presentation of the third image (frame image 658c) is characterized by the first parameter, the third parameter, and the fourth parameter.

The presentation of the first and second images may also be characterized by a fourth parameter (addition of an effect), and the presentation of the third image may also be characterized by a second parameter (color change).

In another example of FIG. 115, the presentation of the first image (text image 658a) is characterized by a first parameter, a second parameter, and a fourth parameter. The presentation of the second image (graphic image 658b) is characterized by a first parameter and a third parameter. The presentation of the third image (frame image 658c) is characterized by a first parameter, a second parameter, a third parameter, and a fourth parameter. The first notification presentation (i.e., the persistent notification presentation) is characterized by at least two or more parameters.

In addition to the first to fourth parameters described in Figures 114 and 115, parameters that characterize the presentation mode of the persistent notification presentation may include the addition of a voice from a speaker (such as "Please hit right") as a fifth parameter, the illumination of a light-emitting member (the LED of the board presentation device 44) located on the right side of the game board 30 as a sixth parameter, the change in the shading of each image over time as a seventh parameter, and the change in the shape of each image over time (for example, the change from (A) to (B) to (C) in Figure 109) as an eighth parameter. In addition, the spatial change in color of each image itself or the spatial change in shading itself can also be considered as a parameter.

[Variations of persistent notification performance]
Fig. 116 is a screen transition diagram showing a modified example of the persistent notification effect by the right-hit instruction display 658. In Fig. 116, the color of each part of the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b may change over time in the same direction of the hue circle. For example, the color of each part of the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b may change over time in one direction of the hue circle (...red → blue → green → yellow → red → blue → green → ...).

In FIG. 116, the display screen of the display device 41 is divided horizontally (left-right) into a blue area 41A, a green area 41B, a yellow area 41C, and a red area 41D. In the moving character image 658a and graphic image 658b, the part that overlaps with the blue area 41A is a blue area 661A painted blue, the part that overlaps with the green area 41B is a green area 661B painted green, the part that overlaps with the yellow area 41C is a yellow area 661C painted yellow, and the part that overlaps with the red area 41D is a red area 661D painted red. In this way, the color of each part of the character image 658a and graphic image 658b changes over time in one direction of the color wheel (...red → blue → green → yellow → red → blue → green → ...) as the character image 658a and graphic image 658b move.

Also, the effect image 658d may be always displayed at the vertical center line of the display screen. Even in this way, the effect image 658d moves relative to the graphic image 658b and frame image 658c by moving the frame image 658c, and the right-hit information of the graphic image 658b and frame image 658c can be emphasized and displayed. However, since the effect image 658d itself moves leftward relative to the graphic image 658b and frame image 658c, the right-hit information cannot be announced.

[Left-handed hit instruction display]
In Figures 109 to 113, the presentation mode of the persistent notification presentation using the right-hit instruction display 658 has been explained, but as shown in the screen transition diagram of Figure 117, the persistent notification presentation of left-hit information may also be executed using the left-hit instruction display 659, similar to the right-hit instruction display 658.

In Fig. 117 (K1) to (K3), the first notification effect (i.e., persistent notification effect) by the left hit instruction display 659 consisting of multiple images, the first image (text image 659a), the second image (graphic image 659b), and the third image (frame image 659c), can persistently notify the player of left hit information to encourage left hit by the first parameter (shape of the image itself), the second parameter (color change), the third parameter (change in display position), and the fourth parameter (addition of effect) of each image. On the other hand, the second notification effect by the left hit instruction display 667 consisting only of the fourth image (graphic image) notifies the player of left hit information by only the first parameter (shape of the image itself).

Note that, since a left hit state (normal game state) is more disadvantageous to the player than a right hit state (such as a special chance state), the left hit instruction display 659 may be in a different form from the right hit instruction display 658. For example, the left hit instruction display 659 may be a different color from the right hit instruction display 658. The left hit instruction display 659 may be a subdued color such as gray that changes spatially and temporally, or may be a single color that does not change spatially or temporally (no second parameter). Furthermore, the left hit instruction display 659 may not have any effects added (no fourth parameter).

As described above, the persistent notification effect has been described, but the persistent notification effect of this embodiment can also be applied to the case of notifying information other than the playing method. Examples of notifications of information other than the playing method include notifications of operation instructions of the effect button 25, notifications of temporary stop of decorative special symbols (reach notification), notifications of the occurrence of a jackpot (fanfare), notifications of rounds during a jackpot, and the like. Notifications of operation instructions of the effect button 25 are, for example, notifications using text images such as "press the button" and graphic images imitating operation buttons. Notifications of temporary stop of decorative special symbols are, for example, notifications using text images such as "reach". Notifications of the occurrence of a jackpot are, for example, notifications using text images such as "jackpot". Notifications of rounds are, for example, notifications using text images such as "1 round" and "3 rounds".

[Actions and Effects of the Thirteenth Embodiment]
According to the thirteenth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a performance control means (performance control device 300) capable of displaying a variable display game (decorative special chart variable display game) that variably displays identification information on the display device 41. The performance control means is capable of executing a persistent notification performance that persistently notifies a player of one piece of information (e.g., information on a right hit) by displaying a first image (e.g., a character image 658a), a second image (e.g., a graphic image 658b), and a third image (e.g., a frame image 658c) that are characterized by at least a first parameter (e.g., the form of the image itself) on the display device 41. At least one of the first image, the second image, and the third image is characterized by a second parameter (e.g., a color change) and a third parameter (e.g., a display position change) in addition to the first parameter. The first parameter, the second parameter, and the third parameter can notify a player of one piece of information (e.g., information on a right hit).

According to such a gaming machine 10, the persistent notification effect using three images and three parameters makes it possible to clearly display (notify) the first information on the display device 41 and leave an impression on the player. For example, even if the first information is preferentially displayed on the front side (upper layer), there is a risk that the first information will become difficult to see if the background changes rapidly, but this can be prevented. In addition, the persistent notification effect using three images and three parameters makes it possible to clearly display (notify) the first information on the display device 41 and leave an impression on the player, even for novice players and players whose native language is not the specified language (Japanese). In addition, the three images and three parameters make the persistent notification effect more lively, increasing the interest of the game.

According to the thirteenth embodiment, the presentation control means (presentation control device 300) can inform the player of a piece of information using the first parameter, second parameter, and third parameter of the first image, and then inform the player of the piece of information using the first parameter, second parameter, and third parameter of the second image or the third image. Therefore, the three parameters can be used to impress the player with persistent notification presentations multiple times.

According to the thirteenth embodiment, the presentation control means (presentation control device 300) can display a fourth image (e.g., an image of the right hit instruction display 665) that notifies the player of one piece of information independently of the persistent notification presentation on the display device 41 at the same time as the persistent notification presentation. The fourth image notifies the player of one piece of information by the first parameter (e.g., the form of the image itself). Therefore, by displaying the fourth image in addition to the persistent notification presentation, the one piece of information can be displayed (notified) on the display device 41 in an easy-to-understand manner, impressing the player. In addition, the fourth image can always notify the one piece of information (e.g., information on right hit), and only in special situations where the need for notification increases (e.g., a situation where a left hit is made in a game state in which right hitting is recommended), the persistent notification presentation can be executed to emphasize and notify the one piece of information (e.g., information on right hit).

According to the thirteenth embodiment, at least one of the first image, the second image, and the third image is characterized by a fourth parameter (e.g., the addition of an effect) in addition to the first parameter, the second parameter, and the third parameter. The presentation control means can notify the player of one piece of information using the first parameter, the second parameter, the third parameter, and the fourth parameter. Therefore, a persistent notification presentation that more emphatically notifies the player of one piece of information can be executed, and the persistent notification presentation becomes even more lively, increasing the interest of the game.

According to the thirteenth embodiment, the first parameter is the shape of each image itself, the second parameter is a color change of each image, the third parameter is a change in the display position of each image on the display device 41, and the fourth parameter is the addition of an effect. Therefore, the appearance of the persistent notification presentation itself becomes lively, and the interest of the game is increased.

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and alterations are possible within the scope of the technical concept, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. For example, it is also possible to combine multiple embodiments. Furthermore, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (such as slot machines). The scope of the present invention is set forth in the claims, and it is intended that all modifications within the scope of the claims and the meaning and content equivalent thereto are included.

In addition, the following are representative aspects of the present invention other than those described in the claims:

(1) A gaming machine equipped with a performance control means capable of displaying, on a display device, a performance related to a variable display game that varies identification information, comprising a movable role that can perform a predetermined operation in front of the display device, and a light-emitting performance means that can perform a predetermined light-emitting performance in front of the display device, the performance control means being capable of performing an initial operation of the movable role and the light-emitting performance means when the gaming machine is powered on, and not performing the light-emitting performance and initial operation of the light-emitting performance means during the initial operation of the movable role.

(2) The gaming machine described in (1) is characterized in that the light-emitting performance means includes a light guide plate on which a predetermined pattern appears based on the irradiation of light from the end, and an irradiation means arranged at the end of the light guide plate so as to face the opposite side of the light guide plate and capable of irradiating light onto the light guide plate, and the performance control means does not cause the irradiation means to irradiate light during the initial operation of the movable role piece.

(3) The gaming machine described in (1) is characterized in that the light-emitting means is a light source installed on the movable part.

According to the invention of (1), the initial operation of the movable parts (internal parts 44c, 44d) and the light-emitting means (light guide plate 251 and its light-emitting member, or the light-emitting member of internal parts 44c, 44d) that are the multiple members that perform the effects related to the game can be easily confirmed, so that maintenance can be performed efficiently.

According to the invention (2), the amusement facility manager or the like can check the initial operation of the light guide plate 251 and the movable props separately, allowing for efficient maintenance.

According to the invention of (3), the operation of the movable prop itself and the light-emitting operation of the light-emitting means of the movable prop can be checked separately as initial operations, so that maintenance can be performed efficiently in the same manner as described above.

Furthermore, the following are representative aspects of the present invention other than those described in the claims:

(4) A gaming machine equipped with a presentation control means capable of displaying on a display device a presentation related to a variable display game that variably displays identification information, the presentation control means being capable of executing a decorative variable display that variably displays decorative identification information on the display device in response to the execution of the variable display game, and capable of displaying, during the execution of the variable display game, a first start memory display that corresponds one-to-one with the start memory and a second start memory display that corresponds to the number of the start memory, as start memory displays that correspond to start memories that constitute the right to execute the variable display game.

(5) The gaming machine described in (4) is characterized in that it is equipped with a movable device that performs a game presentation, and the presentation control means is capable of operating the movable device in response to the execution of the variable display game.

According to the invention (4), as a start memory display corresponding to a start memory that is the right to play a variable display game, a first start memory display that corresponds one-to-one with the start memory and a second start memory display that corresponds to the number of the start memory can be displayed during the execution of the variable display game, thereby improving visibility and increasing the interest of the game.

According to the invention (5), the effect of the presentation can be enhanced by operating the movable parts in response to the execution of the variable display game to perform the game presentation, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

10 Gaming machine 12 Front frame (gaming frame)
25: performance button 30: game board 32: game area 36: first start winning port (first start winning area)
36b LED
37 Normal variable winning device (second start winning area)
39 Special variable prize device 40 Center case 41 Display device 42 Setting change device 44 Board performance device 44c, 44d Internal role (movable body)
46 Board decoration device 50 Collective display device (LED)
51 First special chart change display unit (special chart 1 display unit)
52 Second special chart change display unit (special chart 2 display unit)
93 Setting key switch 95a External part (outer movable member)
102 Setting value change switch 143 Probability setting value display device 150 Driver 152 Status display device 153 LED driver 100 Game control device (main board)
200 Payout control device 300 Performance control device (sub-board)
341 Error code 342 Error code 343 Text information 344 Underline 345 Notification information 400 Power supply unit 510 Parts 513 Identification board 516 Parallel-serial conversion unit 519 Wiring (electric wire)
630 Hold display section 640 Hold digestion area 815 I2CI/O expander

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed,
A special game state can be generated in which a game value is awarded to a player in response to the result of the variable display game being a special result;
the identification information can be displayed on the identification information display means in a first configuration mode which is a configuration mode including a first component indicating a number and a second component indicating a character, or in a second configuration mode which is a configuration mode including the first component but not including the second component,
As the identification information, first identification information, second identification information, and third identification information can be displayed,
A performance display means capable of displaying performance related to a game;
A performance control means capable of controlling the display of the identification information display means,
The performance control means includes:
the first identification information, the second identification information, or the third identification information during a reach can be displayed on the identification information display means in the first configuration mode or the second configuration mode according to the type of reach having a different expectation degree of the special result,
During the variable display of the first identification information, the second identification information, and the third identification information before the reach is established , the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information is performed in the first configuration mode, and the variable display of the third identification information is performed in the second configuration mode, the first identification information and the second identification information are temporarily stopped to establish the reach , and after the reach is established, the variable display of the third identification information is changed from the second configuration mode to the first configuration mode to make the reach variation executable,
The identification information to be displayed by the identification information display means as the special result in a first state is made displayable in the first configuration mode, and the identification information to be displayed by the identification information display means as the special result in a second state different from the first state is made displayable in the second configuration mode.
Amusement machine.

Images